+ All Categories
Home > Documents > Secondary Mathematics 2 Table of Contents

Secondary Mathematics 2 Table of Contents

Date post: 18-Dec-2021
Category:
Upload: others
View: 3 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
404
Jordan School District Page 1 Secondary Mathematics 2 Secondary Mathematics 2 Table of Contents Unit 1: Extending the Number System Cluster 1: Extending Properties of Exponents (N.RN.1 and N.RN.2) ......................................................................................... 3 Cluster 2: Using Properties of Rational and Irrational Numbers (N.RN.3) ........................................................................................................... 10 Cluster 4: Performing Arithmetic Operations on Polynomials (A.APR.1) ......................................................................................................... 21 Unit 2: Quadratic Functions and Modeling Cluster 1 and 2: Interpreting and Analyzing Functions (F.IF.4, F.IF.5, F.IF.7 and F.IF.9) ..................................................................... 26 Cluster 1 and 5: Quadratic Functions and Modeling (F.IF.6 and F.LE.3) ........................................................................................... 42 Factoring ....................................................................................................................... 48 Cluster 2: Forms of Quadratic Functions (F.IF.8a, A.SSE.1a, and A.SSE.3a and b) ......................................................... 57 Cluster 3 (Unit 6): Translating between descriptions and equations for a conic section (G.GPE.2) ......................................................................................................... 67 Honors H.5.1 (G.GPE.3) .................................................................................. 73 Cluster 3: Building Functions that Model Relationships between Two Quantities (F.BF.1) ............................................................................................................. 90 Cluster 4: Transformations and Inverses (F.BF.3 and F.BF.4) ........................................................................................ 104 Unit 3: Expressions and Equations Cluster 1: Interpreting the Structure of Expressions (A.SSE.2) ........................................................................................................ 120 Cluster 3 (Unit 1): Performing Arithmetic Operations with Complex Numbers (N.CN.1 and N.CN.2) ..................................................................................... 124 Honors H.2.1: (N.CN.3) ................................................................................. 129 Cluster 4 and 5: Solving Equations in One Variable with Complex Solutions (A.REI.4 and N.CN.7) .................................................................................... 134 Honors (N.CN.8 and N.CN.9) ........................................................................ 145 Cluster 3: Writing and Solving Equations and Inequalities in One Variable (A.CED.1 and A.CED.4) ................................................................................ 148 Honors H.1.2 .................................................................................................. 162 Cluster 3: Writing and Graphing Equations in Two Variables (A.CED.2) ....................................................................................................... 172 Cluster 6: Solving Systems of Equations (A.REI.7) ......................................................................................................... 181 Honors (A.REI.8 and A.REI.9) ...................................................................... 186 Cluster 2: Forms and Uses of Exponential Functions (F.IF.8b, A.SSE.1b, and A.SSE.3c) ................................................................ 196
Transcript

Jordan School District Page 1 Secondary Mathematics 2

Secondary Mathematics 2 Table of Contents

Unit 1: Extending the Number System Cluster 1: Extending Properties of Exponents

(N.RN.1 and N.RN.2) ......................................................................................... 3

Cluster 2: Using Properties of Rational and Irrational Numbers

(N.RN.3) ........................................................................................................... 10

Cluster 4: Performing Arithmetic Operations on Polynomials

(A.APR.1) ......................................................................................................... 21

Unit 2: Quadratic Functions and Modeling Cluster 1 and 2: Interpreting and Analyzing Functions

(F.IF.4, F.IF.5, F.IF.7 and F.IF.9) ..................................................................... 26

Cluster 1 and 5: Quadratic Functions and Modeling

(F.IF.6 and F.LE.3) ........................................................................................... 42

Factoring ....................................................................................................................... 48

Cluster 2: Forms of Quadratic Functions

(F.IF.8a, A.SSE.1a, and A.SSE.3a and b) ......................................................... 57

Cluster 3 (Unit 6): Translating between descriptions and equations for a conic section

(G.GPE.2) ......................................................................................................... 67

Honors H.5.1 (G.GPE.3) .................................................................................. 73

Cluster 3: Building Functions that Model Relationships between Two Quantities

(F.BF.1) ............................................................................................................. 90

Cluster 4: Transformations and Inverses

(F.BF.3 and F.BF.4) ........................................................................................ 104

Unit 3: Expressions and Equations Cluster 1: Interpreting the Structure of Expressions

(A.SSE.2) ........................................................................................................ 120

Cluster 3 (Unit 1): Performing Arithmetic Operations with Complex Numbers

(N.CN.1 and N.CN.2) ..................................................................................... 124

Honors H.2.1: (N.CN.3) ................................................................................. 129

Cluster 4 and 5: Solving Equations in One Variable with Complex Solutions

(A.REI.4 and N.CN.7) .................................................................................... 134

Honors (N.CN.8 and N.CN.9) ........................................................................ 145

Cluster 3: Writing and Solving Equations and Inequalities in One Variable

(A.CED.1 and A.CED.4) ................................................................................ 148

Honors H.1.2 .................................................................................................. 162

Cluster 3: Writing and Graphing Equations in Two Variables

(A.CED.2) ....................................................................................................... 172

Cluster 6: Solving Systems of Equations

(A.REI.7) ......................................................................................................... 181

Honors (A.REI.8 and A.REI.9) ...................................................................... 186

Cluster 2: Forms and Uses of Exponential Functions

(F.IF.8b, A.SSE.1b, and A.SSE.3c) ................................................................ 196

Jordan School District Page 2 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 4: Applications of Probability Cluster 1: Understand independence and conditional probability and use them to

interpret data.

(S.CP.1) ..................................................................................................... 213

Cluster 2: Use the rules of probability to compute probabilities of compound events in a

uniform probability model.

(S.CP.2 through S.CP.7) ........................................................................... 215

Cluster 3: Use probability to evaluate outcomes of decisions.

Honors (S.CP.8, S.CP.9, S.MD.6 and S.MD.7) ......................................... 224

Unit 5: Similarity, Right Triangle Trigonometry, and Proof Cluster 1: Understand similarity in terms of similarity transformations

(G.SRT.1, G.SRT.2, and G.SRT.3) .......................................................... 239

Cluster 2: Prove geometric theorems.

(G.CO.9) ................................................................................................... 248

(G.CO.10) ................................................................................................. 254

(G.CO.11) ................................................................................................. 263

Cluster 3: Prove theorems involving similarity.

(G.SRT.4 and G.SRT.5) ............................................................................ 270

Cluster 4: Use coordintes to prove simple geometric theorems algebraically.

(G.GPE.6) ................................................................................................. 275

Cluster 5: Define trigonometric ratios and solve problems involving right triangles.

(G.SRT.6, G.SRT.7, and G.SRT.8) .......................................................... 282

Honors (N.CN.3, N.CN.4, N.CN.5, and N.CN.6) .................................... 289

Cluster 6: Prove and apply trigonometric identities.

(F.TF.8) ..................................................................................................... 301

Honors (H.5.6) Unit Circle ....................................................................... 304

Honors (H.5.7) Trigonometry Proofs ....................................................... 317

Honors (F.TF.9 and H.5.9) ....................................................................... 324

Unit 6: Circles With and Without Coordinates Cluster 1: Understand and apply theorems about circles.

(G.C.1, G.C.2, G.C.3, and G.C.4 (Honors)) ............................................. 334

Cluster 2: Find arc length and areas of sectors of circles.

(G.C.5) ...................................................................................................... 353

Cluster 3: Translate between the geometric description and the equation for a conic

section.

(G.GPE.1) ................................................................................................. 360

Cluster 4: Use coordinates to prove simple geometric theorems algebraically.

(G.GPE.4) ................................................................................................. 365

Cluster 5: Explain volume formulas and use them to solve problems.

(G.GMD.1, G.GMD.2 (Honors), and G.GMD.3) .................................... 368

Selected Answers ............................................................................................. 386

Jordan School District Page 3 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 1

Extending the Number

System

Jordan School District Page 4 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 1 Cluster 1 (N.RN.1 & N.RN.2):

Extending Properties of Exponents

Cluster 1: Extending properties of exponents

1.1.1 Define rational exponents and extend the properties of integer exponents to

rational exponents

1.1.2 Rewrite expressions, going between rational and radical form

VOCABULARY

If the exponent on a term is of the formm

n, where 0n , then the number is said to have a

rational exponent. 1

38 is an example of a constant with a rational exponent.

Properties of

Exponents

(All bases are non-zero)

Properties of Rational

Exponents

(All bases are non-zero)

Examples

a b a bx x x

p p rr

q q ssx x x

3 193 1 15 4 5 204x x x x

aa b

b

xx

x

pp rqq s

r

s

xx

x

23

32 13 5 15

35

xx x

x

0 1x

Students should have this

property memorized.

0

0

However

: 1

Therefore: 1

aa a

a

a

a

xx x

x

x

x

x

1a

ax

x

1p

q

p

q

x

x

25

25

1 x

x

n n nxy x y

p pp

q qqxy x y

3 3 34 4 4xy x y

n

m m nx x

rp p rsq q sx x

2

33 2 2 134 34 4 2x x x x

Jordan School District Page 5 Secondary Mathematics 2

m m

m

x x

y y

ppqq

p

q

x x

yy

2 23 3

23

x x

y y

1m m n

n n m

x x y

y y x

1m m an n b

a a mb b n

x x y

y y x

31 12 2 4

3 3 124 4

1

x x y

xy y

Practice Exercises A

Simplify each expression using only positive exponents.

1. 1 2 1/45 5 2.

21/3

1/3

12

4

3. 1/3

1

k

4. 2

1 2 1/38 5 5. 3/2y 6. 2/13/2 zz

7. 1/4

4 42 3

8. 63/24 9. 0z

10. 1/3

7

7 11.

3/1

3/2

y

y 12.

4

3

7

x

x

Definition

A radical can also be written as a term with a rational exponent. For example, 1

nnx x where n

is an integer and 0n . In general, m

n mnx x where m and n are integers and 0n .

m

mnnx x

can alsobewritten asm

mnnx x

The denominator of the rational

exponent becomes the index of the

radical.

Jordan School District Page 6 Secondary Mathematics 2

Rational Exponent

Form

Radical Form

1920x

20 19x 3

2x 3x

7

3a 3 7a

Practice Exercises B

Rewrite each expression in radical form

1. 4 38

4. 3 236

7. 2 3

64

2. 3/4x

5. 3/2k

8. 5 3

8

3. 5/9a

6. 1/52x

9. 1/5

2x

Practice Exercises C

Rewrite each expression with rational exponents.

1. 3 11

4. 2

4 5

7.7 5w

2. 2

7 42

5. 6 7x

8.3 2k

3. 8

3 10

6. 3 r

9. 2

5 z

Vocabulary

For an integer n greater than 1, if na k , then a is the nth root of k.

A radical or the principal nth

root of k: k, the radicand, is a real number.

n, the index, is a positive integer greater than one.

Jordan School District Page 7 Secondary Mathematics 2

Properties of Radicals

n na a n n nab a b

n

nn

a a

b b

Vocabulary

A prime number is a whole number greater

than 1 that is only divisible by 1 and itself. In

other words, a prime number has exactly two

factors: 1 and itself.

Example:

5 1 5 prime

30 2 3 5 not prime

Division Rules For a Few Prime Numbers

A number is divisible by: If: Example:

2 The last digit is even

(0, 2, 4, 6, 8)

256 is

255 is not

3 The sum of the digits is

divisible by 3

381 (3+8+1=12 and 12÷3=4) Yes

383 (3+8+3=14 and 2

14 3 43

) No

5 The last digit is 0 or 5 175 is

809 is not

7

If you double the last digit

and subtract it from the rest

of the number and the

answer is:

0

Divisible by 7

672 (Double 2 is 4, 67 4 63 and

63 7 9 ) Yes

905 (Double 5 is 10, 90 10 80 and

380 7 11

7 ) No

Simplifying Radicals: Radicals that are simplified have:

no fractions left under the radical.

no perfect power factors in the radicand, k.

no exponents in the radicand, k, greater than

the index, n.

Jordan School District Page 8 Secondary Mathematics 2

Simplifying Radicals

Method 1:

Find Perfect Squares Under the Radical

1. Rewrite the radicand as factors that are

perfect squares and factors that are not

perfect squares.

2. Rewrite the radical as two separate

radicals.

3. Simplify the perfect square.

Example: 75

25 3

25 3

5 3

Method 2:

Use a Factor Tree

1. Work with only the radicand.

2. Split the radicand into two factors.

3. Split those numbers into two factors

until the number is a prime number.

4. Group the prime numbers into pairs.

5. List the number from each pair only

once outside of the radicand.

6. Leave any unpaired numbers inside the

radical.

Note: If you have more than one pair, multiply

the numbers outside of the radical as well as

the numbers left inside.

Example: 75

75

25 3

5 5

5 3

Method 3:

Divide by Prime Numbers

1. Work with only the radicand.

2. Using only prime numbers, divide each

radicand until the bottom number is a

prime number.

3. Group the prime numbers into pairs.

4. List the number from each pair only

once outside of the radicand.

5. Leave any unpaired numbers inside the

radical.

Note: If you have more than one pair, multiply

the numbers outside of the radical as well as

the numbers left inside.

Example: 75

5 75

5 15

3

5 3

5

Jordan School District Page 9 Secondary Mathematics 2

Method 4:

Use Exponent Rules

Example: 75

1. Rewrite the exponent as a rational

exponent. 1/275

2. Rewrite the radicand as factors that are

perfect squares and factors that are not

perfect squares.

1/2

25 3

3. Rewrite the perfect square factors with

an exponent of 2.

1/225 3

4. Split up the factors, giving each the

rational exponent.

1/2 1/225 3

5. Simplify.

1/2

5 3

6. Rewrite as a radical 5 3

Method 4 with Variables: Example:

3 7x

1. Rewrite the exponent as a rational

exponent. 7/3x

2. Rewrite the radicand as two factors.

One with the highest exponent that is

divisible by the root and the other

factor with an exponent of what is left

over.

1/36x x

3. Split up the factors, giving each the

rational exponent.

1/36 1/3x x

4. Rewrite the exponents using exponent

rules. 6/3 1/3x x

5. Simplify. 2 1/3x x

6. Rewrite as a radical 2 3x x

Practice D

Simplify each radical expression.

1. 245p

2. 380 p

3. 3 33 24x y

4. 3 4 316u v

5. 275x y

6. 3 3 364m n

7. 34 36y 8. 6 150r 9. 3 37 96m

Jordan School District Page 10 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 1 Cluster 2 (N.RN.3):

Using Properties of Rational and Irrational numbers

Cluster 1: Extending properties of exponents

1.2.1 Properties of rational and irrational numbers (i.e. sum of 2 rational numbers is

rational, sum of a rational and irrational number is irrational)

Number Systems

Complex Numbers: all numbers of the form a + bi where a and b

are real numbers. -4 + 3i, 2 – i

Real Numbers

Imaginary

Numbers: are

of the form of bi

where 1i

-3i, 2i

Irrational Numbers consist of all

numbers that cannot be written as the ratio of

two integers.

4, 3, 5

Rational Numbers consist of all

numbers that can be written as the ratio of two

integers 12, 0.125, , 0.91

3

Integers are the whole numbers and

their opposites (-3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, …)

Natural

Numbers (Counting

Numbers)

Whole

Numbers

include zero

and the natural

numbers

Jordan School District Page 11 Secondary Mathematics 2

Properties of Real Numbers

Description Numbers Algebra

Commutative Property

You can add or multiply real

numbers in any order without

changing the result.

7 11 11 7

7 11 11 7

a b b a

ab ba

Associative Property

The sum or product of three or

more real numbers is the same

regardless of the way the numbers

are grouped.

5 3 7 5 3 7

ab c a bc

Distributive Property

When you multiply a sum by a

number, the result is the same

whether you add and then

multiply or whether you multiply

each term by the number and then

add the products.

5 2 8 5 2 5 8

2 8 5 2 5 2 8

a b c ab bc

b c a ba ca

Additive Identity Property

The sum of a number and 0, the

additive identity, is the original

number.

3 0 3 0 0n n n

Multiplicative Identity Property

The product of a number and 1,

the multiplicative identity, is the

original number.

2 21

3 3

1 1n n n

Additive Inverse Property

The sum of a number and its

opposite, or additive inverse, is 0.

5 5 0

0n n

Multiplicative Inverse Property

The product of a non-zero number

and its reciprocal, or

multiplicative inverse

18 1

8

11, 0n n

n

Closure Property

The sum or product of any two

real numbers is a real number.

2 3 5

2 6 12

a b

ab

Jordan School District Page 12 Secondary Mathematics 2

Closure

When an operation is executed on the members of a set, the result is guaranteed to be in the set.

Addition: If two integers are added together,

the sum is an integer. Therefore, integers are

closed under addition.

Example: 2 5 3

Multiplication: If two integers are multiplied

together, the product is an integer. Therefore,

integers are closed under multiplication.

Example: 6 7 42

Subtraction: If one integer is subtracted from

another, the difference is an integer. Therefore,

integers are closed under subtraction.

Example: 2 6 4

Division: If one integer is divided by another

integer, the quotient may or may not be an

integer. Therefore, integers are not closed

under division. Example:

10 2 5

12 10

5

closed

not closed

You Decide

1. What number systems are closed under addition? Justify your conclusions using the method

of your choice.

2. What number systems are closed under multiplication? Justify your conclusions using the

method of your choice.

3. What number systems are closed under subtraction? Justify your conclusions using the

method of your choice.

4. What number systems are closed under division? Justify your conclusions using the method

of your choice.

Why can’t I

come in?????

Sorry we are

a CLOSED

set!

Jordan School District Page 13 Secondary Mathematics 2

Vocabulary

For an integer n greater than 1, if na k , then a is the nth root of k.

A radical or the principal nth

root of k: k, the radicand, is a real number.

n, the index, is a positive integer greater than one.

Properties of Radicals

n na a n n nab a b

n

nn

a a

b b

Vocabulary

A prime number is a whole number greater

than 1 that is only divisible by 1 and itself. In

other words, a prime number has exactly two

factors: 1 and itself.

Example:

5 1 5 prime

30 2 3 5 not prime

Division Rules For a Few Prime Numbers

A number is divisible by: If: Example:

2 The last digit is even

(0, 2, 4, 6, 8)

256 is divisible by 2

255 is not divisible by 2

3 The sum of the digits is

divisible by 3

381 (3+8+1=12 and 12÷3=4) Yes

383 (3+8+3=14 and

214 3 4

3

) No

5 The last digit is 0 or 5 175 is divisible by 5

809 is not divisible by 5

7

If you double the last digit

and subtract it from the rest

of the number and the

answer is:

0

Divisible by 7

672 (Double 2 is 4, 67 4 63 and

63 7 9 ) Yes

905 (Double 5 is 10, 90 10 80 and

380 7 11

7

) No

Simplifying Radicals: Radicals that are simplified have:

no fractions left under the radical.

no perfect power factors in the radicand, k.

no exponents in the radicand, k, greater than

the index, n.

Jordan School District Page 14 Secondary Mathematics 2

Simplifying Radicals

Method 1:

Find Perfect Squares Under the Radical

4. Rewrite the radicand as factors that are

perfect squares and factors that are not

perfect squares.

5. Rewrite the radical as two separate

radicals .

6. Simplify the perfect square.

Example: 75

25 3

25 3

5 3 Method 2:

Use a Factor Tree

7. Work with only the radicand.

8. Split the radicand into two factors.

9. Split those numbers into two factors

until the number is a prime number.

10. Group the prime numbers into pairs.

11. List the number from each pair only

once outside of the radicand.

12. Leave any unpaired numbers inside the

radical.

Note: If you have more than one pair, multiply

the numbers outside of the radical as well as

the numbers left inside.

Example: 75

75

25 3

5 5

5 3

Method 3:

Divide by Prime Numbers

6. Work with only the radicand.

7. Using only prime numbers, divide each

radicand until the bottom number is a

prime number.

8. Group the prime numbers into pairs.

9. List the number from each pair only

once outside of the radicand.

10. Leave any unpaired numbers inside the

radical.

Note: If you have more than one pair, multiply

the numbers outside of the radical as well as

the numbers left inside.

Example: 75

5 75

5 15

3

5 3

5

Jordan School District Page 15 Secondary Mathematics 2

Method 4:

Use Exponent Rules

Example: 75

7. Rewrite the exponent as a rational

exponent. 1/275

8. Rewrite the radicand as factors that are

perfect squares and factors that are not

perfect squares.

1/2

25 3

9. Rewrite the perfect square factors with

an exponent of 2.

1/225 3

10. Split up the factors, giving each the

rational exponent.

1/2 1/225 3

11. Simplify.

1/2

5 3

12. Rewrite as a radical 5 3

Method 4 with Variables: Example:

3 7x

7. Rewrite the exponent as a rational

exponent. 7/3x

8. Rewrite the radicand as two factors.

One with the highest exponent that is

divisible by the root and the other

factor with an exponent of what is left

over.

1/36x x

9. Split up the factors, giving each the

rational exponent.

1/36 1/3x x

10. Rewrite the exponents using exponent

rules. 6/3 1/3x x

11. Simplify. 2 1/3x x

12. Rewrite as a radical 2 3x x

Adding and Subtracting Radicals

To add or subtract radicals, simplify first if possible, and then add or subtract “like” radicals.

1. They both have the same term under

the radical so they are “like” terms.

Example:

2 3 5 3

2. Add the coefficients of the radicals. (2 5) 3 7 3

1. They both have the same term under

the radical so they are “like” terms.

Example:

4 3 7 3

2. Subtract the coefficients of the radicals. (4 7) 3 ( 3) 3

Jordan School District Page 16 Secondary Mathematics 2

1. They are not “like” terms, but one of

them can be simplified.

Example:

5 3 2 75

2. Rewrite the number under the radical. 5 3 2 25 3 3. Use the properties of radicals to write

the factors as two radicals. 5 3 2 25 3

4. 25 is a perfect square and the square

root of it is 5. 5 3 2 5 3

5. Multiply the coefficients of the second

radical. 5 3 10 3

6. Now they are “like” terms, add the

coefficients. (5 10) 3

15 3

1. None of them are “like” terms.

Simplify if you can.

Example:

5 8 3 18 3

2. Factor each number inside the radical. 5 4 2 3 9 2 3 3. Use the properties of radicals to

simplify. 5 4 2 3 9 2 3

4. 4 and 9 are perfect squares; their square

roots are 2 and 3. 5 2 2 3 3 2 3

5. Multiply the numbers outside of the

radical. 10 2 9 2 3

6. Only the terms with 2 are “like”

terms. (10 9) 2 3

7. Simplify. 2 3

1. They are not like terms, but they can be

simplified.

Example:

3 3 340 3 5 2 135

2. Rewrite the expressions under the

radical. 3 3 35 8 3 5 2 5 27

3. Use properties of radicals to rewrite the

expressions. 3 3 3 3 35 8 3 5 2 5 27

4. The cube root of 8 is 2 and the cube

root of 27 is 3. 3 3 35 2 3 5 2 3 5

5. Multiply the coefficients of the last

radical. 3 3 32 5 3 5 6 5

6. Add or subtract the coefficients of the

like terms. 32 3 6 5

7. Simplify. 35 5

Jordan School District Page 17 Secondary Mathematics 2

1. They are not like terms, but one of

them can be simplified.

Example:

3 3 32 24 3x x

2. Rewrite the expression under the

radical. 3 3 32 8 3 3x x

3. Use properties of radicals to rewrite the

expression. 3 33 3 32 8 3 3x x

4. 8 and 3x are perfect cubes. The cube

root of 8 is 2 and 3x is x.

3 32 2 3 3x x

5. Multiply the coefficients of the first

radical. 3 34 3 3x x

6. Now they are like terms, add the

coefficients of each. 34 3x x

7. Simplify. 33 3x

Multiplying Radicals

Multiplying radicals with the same index

Example:

2 6 3 7 1. Multiply the coefficients and multiply

the numbers under the radicand. (2 3) 6 7

2. If possible, simplify. This is already

simplified. 6 42

Example:

3 2 6 3

1. Use the distributive method to multiply.

3 6 3 3 2 6 2( 3)

2. Use properties of radicals to simplify.

18 3 3 2 6 6 3. Simplify any radicals.

9 2 3 3 2 6 6 4. Combined “like” terms if possible.

3 2 3 3 2 6 6

Example:

5 1 5 4

1. Use the distributive method to multiply.

5 5 5( 4) ( 1) 5 ( 1)( 4) 2. Use properties of radicals to simplify.

5 5 4 5 5 4 3. Simplify and combine “like” terms.

25 ( 4 1) 5 4 4. The square root of 25 is 5.

5 5 5 4 5. Combine like terms.

9 5 5

Jordan School District Page 18 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

5 2 3 5 2 3

1. Use the distributive method to multiply.

5 2 5 2 5 2( 3) 3 5 2 3( 3)

2. Use properties of radicals to simplify. 5 5 2 2 3 5 2 3 5 2 9 3. Simplify and combine like terms. 25 4 ( 15 15) 2 9 4. The square root of 4 is 2. 25 2 9 5. Simplify. 50 9 41

Multiplying Radicals with Different Indices

Note: In order to multiply radicals with different indices the radicands must be the same.

Example:

57 7

1. Rewrite each radical using rational

exponents.

11

527 7

2. Use properties of exponents to

simplify.

1 1

2 57

3. Combine the fractions by finding a

common denominator.

7

107

Example:

3 2 4x x

1. Rewrite each radical using rational

exponents.

2 1

3 4x x

2. Use properties of exponents to

simplify.

2 1

3 4x

3. Combine the fractions by finding a

common denominator.

11

12x

Example:

3 x

1. Rewrite the inner radical using rational

exponents.

1

3x 2. Rewrite the outer radical using rational

exponents.

11 23x

3. Use properties of exponents to

simplify.

1 1

3 2x

4. Simplify by multiplying fractions.

1

6x

Jordan School District Page 19 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises A

Add or Subtract

1. 10 7 12 7

2. 332 3 2 24

3. 12 3 3

4. 3 33 2 54

5. 333 16 3 2

6. 3 20 5

7. 3 340 2 6 3 5

8. 3 18 3 8 24

9. 2 18 2 12 2 18

Practice Exercises B

Multiply and simplify the result.

1. 34 28 7x x 2. 3 33 12 6 3.

3 2 320 4 20x x

4. 6 3 12 5. 3 3 34 2 5 6. 3 5 10 6

7. 5 3 5 3 8. 2 3 2 3 5 9. 5 4 5 2 5

10. 3 56 6 11. 74 2 2y y 12. 3 8 z

Jordan School District Page 20 Secondary Mathematics 2

You Decide:

1. Add: 4

25

. Can you write the result as the ratio of two numbers? (Use your graphing

calculator to change the sum from a decimal to a fraction by pushing the math button and

select FRAC)

2. Add: 1 2

2 3 . Can you write the result as the ratio of two numbers?

3. Add: 2 1.5 . Can you write the result as the ratio of two numbers?

4. Add: 1.75 1.35 . Can you write the result as the ratio of two numbers?

5. Add: 2 3 . Can you write the result as the ratio of two numbers?

6. Add: 5

3 . Can you write the result as the ratio of two numbers?

7. Write a rule based on your observations with adding rational and irrational numbers.

Jordan School District Page 21 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 1 Cluster 4 (A.APR.1): Polynomials

Cluster 4: Perform arithmetic operations on polynomials

1.4.1 Polynomials are closed under addition, subtraction, and multiplication

1.4.1 Add, subtract, and multiply polynomials (NO DIVISION)

VOCABULARY

A term that does not have a variable is called a constant. For example the number 5 is a constant because

it does not have a variable attached and will always have the value of 5.

A constant or a variable or a product of a constant and a variable is called a term. For example 2, x , or 23x are all terms.

Terms with the same variable to the same power are like terms. 22x and

27x are like terms.

An expression formed by adding a finite number of unlike terms is called a polynomial. The variables

can only be raised to positive integer exponents.3 24 6 1x x is a polynomial, while

32 12 5x x is not

a polynomial. NOTE: There are no square roots of variables, no fractional powers, and no variables in the

denominator of any fractions.

A polynomial with only one term is called a monomial 46x . A polynomial with two terms is called a

binomial ( 2 1x ). A polynomial with three terms is called a trinomial 25 3x x .

Polynomials are in standard (general) form when written with exponents in descending order and the

constant term last. For example 4 3 22 5 7 3x x x x is in standard form.

The exponent of a term gives you the degree of the term. The term23x has degree two. For a

polynomial, the value of the largest exponent is the degree of the whole polynomial. The polynomial 4 3 22 5 7 3x x x x has degree 4.

The number part of a term is called the coefficient when the term contains a variable and a number. 6x

has a coefficient of 6 and 2x has a coefficient of -1.

The leading coefficient is the coefficient of the first term when the polynomial is written in standard

form. 2 is the leading coefficient of 4 3 22 5 7 3x x x x .

General Polynomial: 1 2

1 2 1 0( ) n n

n nf x a x a x a x a x a

Leading

Term Constant

Degree n

Leading

Coefficient na

Jordan School District Page 22 Secondary Mathematics 2

CLASSIFICATIONS OF POLYNOMIALS Name Form Degree Example

Zero ( ) 0f x None ( ) 0f x

Constant ( ) , 0f x a a 0 ( ) 5f x

Linear ( )f x ax b 1 ( ) 2 1f x x

Quadratic 2( )f x ax bx c 2 2 1 7

( ) 32 9

f x x x

Cubic 3 2( )f x ax bx cx d 3 3 2( ) 3f x x x

Practice Exercises A:

Determine which of the following are polynomial functions. If the function is a polynomial, state

the degree and leading coefficient. If it is not, explain why.

1. 5( ) 3 17f x x

2. ( ) 9 2f x x

3. 5 1( ) 2 9

2f x x x

4. ( ) 13f x

5. 3 3 6( ) 27 8f x x x

6. 2( ) 4 5f x x x

Operations of Polynomials

Addition/Subtraction: Combine like terms.

Example 1:

Horizontal Method

3 2 3 2

3 3 2 2

3 2

2 3 4 1 2 5 3

2 3 2 4 5 1 3

3 2

x x x x x x

x x x x x x

x x x

Vertical Method

3 2

3 2

3 2

2 3 4 1

2 5 3

3 2

x x x

x x x

x x x

Example 2:

Horizontal Method

24 3 4x x 3 22 2x x x

= 2 3 24 3 4 2 2x x x x x

= 3 22 3 4 6x x x

Vertical Method

2

3 2

3 2

4 3 4

2 2

2 3 4 6

x x

x x x

x x x

Jordan School District Page 23 Secondary Mathematics 2

Multiplication: Multiply by a monomial

Example 3:

23 2 6 5x x x

2

3 2

3 2 3 6 3 5

6 18 15

x x x x x

x x x

Example 4:

2 3 2

5 4 3 2

5 3 2 6 8

15 10 30 40

x x x x

x x x x

Multiplication: Multiply two binomials 5 7 2 9x x

Distributive (FOIL) Method

5 7 2 9x x

2

2

5 2 9 7 2 9

10 45 14 63

*

10 31 63

x x x

x x x

combineliketerms

x x

Box Method

5x 7

2x 210x 14x

9 45x 63

*combine terms on the

diagonals of the unshaded

boxes(top right to lower left)

210 31 63x x

Vertical Method

2

2

5 7

2 9

45 63

10 14

10 31 63

x

x

x

x x

x x

Multiplication: Multiply a binomial and a trinomial 22 3 6 7 5x x x

Distributive Method

22 3 6 7 5x x x

2 2

3 2 2

3 2 2

3 2

2 6 7 5 3 6 7 5

12 14 10 18 21 15

12 14 10 18 21 15

*

12 4 31 15

x x x x x

x x x x x

x x x x x

combineliketerms

x x x

Box Method

26x 7x 5

2x

312x

214x

10x

3 218x

21x 15

*combine terms on the

diagonals of the unshaded

boxes(top right to lower left)

3 212 4 31 15x x x

Vertical Method

2

2

3 2

3 2

6 7 5

2 3

18 21 15

12 14 10

12 4 31 15

x x

x

x x

x x x

x x x

Jordan School District Page 24 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B:

Perform the required operations. Write your answers in standard form and determine if the result

is a polynomial.

1. 2 23 7 3 5 3x x x x

2. 2 23 5 7 12x x x

3. 3 2 34 3 12 3x x x x x

4. 2 22 3 5 3 4y y y y

5. 22 3x x x

6. 2 22 3 4y y y

7. 3 4 1u u

8. 22 3 5x x x

9. 7 3x x

10. 3 5 2x x

11. 2 3 4 1x x

12. 3 3x y x y

13. 2

2 7x

14. 2

3 5x

15. 2

35 1x

16. 3 32 3 2 3x y x y

17. 2 2 3 4x x x

18. 2 3 2 3x x x

19. 2 23 1x x x x

20. 2 22 3 1 1x x x x

YOU DECIDE

Are polynomials closed under addition, subtraction, multiplication? Justify your conclusion

using the method of your choice.

Jordan School District Page 25 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 2

Quadratic Functions

and Modeling

Jordan School District Page 26 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 2 Cluster 1 (F.1F.4, F.1F.5, F.1F.6)

Unit 2 Cluster 2 (F.1F.7, F.1F.9)

Interpret functions that arise in applications in terms of a context

Analyzing functions using different representations

Cluster 1:

2.1.1 Interpret key features; intercepts, intervals where increasing and decreasing,

intervals where positive and negative, relative maximums and minimums,

symmetry, end behavior, domain and range, periodicity

2.1.2 Relate the domain of a function to its graph or a context

2.1.3 Average rate of change over an interval: calculate, interpret, and estimate from a

graph.

Cluster 2:

2.2.1 Graph functions from equations by hand and with technology showing key

features (square roots, cube roots, piecewise-defined functions including step and

functions, and absolute value).

2.2.1 Graph linear and quadratic functions and show intercepts, maxima, and minima

2.2.3 Compare properties (key features) of functions each represented differently (table,

graph, equation or description)

VOCABULARY

The domain is the set of all first coordinates when given a table or a set of ordered pairs. It is the

set of all -coordinates of the points on the graph and is the set of all numbers for which an

equation is defined. The domain it is written from the least value to the greatest value.

The range is the set of all second coordinates when given a table or a set of ordered pairs. It is

the set of all y-coordinates of the points on the graph. When modeling real world situations, the

range is the set of all numbers that make sense in the problem. The range is written from the

least value to the greatest value.

Example:

Find the domain and range of 2 2 3f x x .

Domain

1. Find any values for which the function is

undefined.

The square root function has real number

solutions if the expression under the radicand

is positive or zero. This means that 2 0x

therefore 2x .

2. Write the domain in interval notation.

The domain is [ 2, ) .

Jordan School District Page 27 Secondary Mathematics 2

Range

1. Find all values for which the output exists.

The square root function uses the principal

square root which is a positive number or zero

( 0y ). However, the function has been

shifted down three units so the range is also

shifted down three units 3y .

2. Write the range in interval notation. The range is [ 3, )

Example:

Find the domain and range of the function graphed to the right.

Domain

1. List all the x-values of the function

graphed.

If you were to flatten the function against the

x-axis you would see something like this:

The function is defined for all the x-values

along the x-axis.

2. Write the domain in interval notation. The domain is , .

Range

1. List all the y-values of the function

graphed.

If you were to flatten the function against the

y-axis you would see something like this:

The function is defined for all the y-values

greater than or equal to -2.

2. Write the range in interval notation. The range is [ 2, ) .

Jordan School District Page 28 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

The path of a ball thrown straight up can be modeled by the equation

216 20 4h t t t where t is the time in seconds that the ball is in the air and h is the

height of the ball. What is the real world domain and range for the situation?

Domain

1. Find all the values that would make sense

for the situation.

The domain represents the amount of time that

the ball is in the air. At t = 0 the ball is thrown

and enters the air shortly afterwards so the

domain must be greater than zero. The ball

will hit the ground at 1.425 seconds. Once it is

on the ground it is no longer in the air so the

domain must be less than 1.425 seconds. The

ball is in the air for 0 1.425t seconds.

2. Write the domain in interval notation. The domain is (0,1.425) .

Range

1. Find all the values that would make sense

for the situation.

The ball will not go lower than the ground so

the height must be greater than zero. The ball

will go no higher than its maximum height so

the height must be less than or equal to 10.25

feet. The range will be 0 10.25h .

2. Write the range in interval notation. The range is (0,10.25] .

Practice Exercises A:

Find the domain and range.

1. 3 2f x x 2. 3( ) 1f x x

3. 4.

5. Your cell phone plan charges a flat fee of $10 for up to1000 texts and $0.10 per text over

1000.

6. The parking lot for a movie theater in the city has no charge for the first hour, but charges

$1.50 for each additional hour or part of an hour with a maximum charge of $7.50 for the

night.

Jordan School District Page 29 Secondary Mathematics 2

VOCABULARY

The x-intercept is where a graph crosses or touches the -axis. It is the ordered pair ,0a .

Where a is a real number.

The y -intercept is where a graph crosses or touches the -axis. It is the ordered pair 0,b .

Where b is a real number.

A relative maximum occurs when the y-value is greater than all of the y-values near it. A

function may have more than one relative maximum value. A relative minimum occurs when

the y-value is less than all of the y-values near it. A function may have more than one relative

minimum value.

Example:

Find the intercepts of the function 2 1f x x .

x-intercept

1. Substitute y in for f(x).

2 1y x

2. Substitute 0 in for y. 0 2 1x

3. Solve for x. 1 2

1

2

x

x

4. Write the intercept as an ordered pair. 1,0

2

y-intercept

1. Substitute 0 in for x.

2(0) 1y

2. Solve for y. 0 1

1

y

y

3. Write the intercept as an ordered pair. 0, 1

Jordan School District Page 30 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Find the intercepts of the function 23 5 2f x x x .

x-intercept

1. Use your graphing calculator to graph the

function.

2. Use the Calculate Menu (2nd

, Trace, Zero) to

find the x-intercepts. (Zero is another name

for the x-intercept)

The x-intercepts are

1,0

3

and 2,0 .

y-intercept

1. To find the y-intercept, replace each x with 0.

2

3 0 5 0 2y

2. Solve the equation for y. 0 0 2

2

y

y

3. Write the intercept as an ordered pair. 0,2

Example:

Find the maximum of 2 4 4f x x x .

To find the maximum use your graphing calculator to graph the

function. Then use the Calculate Menu (2nd

, Trace, Maximum).

Enter a number that is to the left of the maximum, for example 0,

then push enter. Then enter a number that is to the right of the

maximum, for example 4, then push enter. You can guess the

value of the maximum or just push enter again and the maximum

will be calculated. The maximum is (2, 8).

Example:

Find the minimum of 2

2 3f x x .

To find the maximum use your graphing calculator to graph the

function. Then use the Calculate Menu (2nd

, Trace, Minimum).

Enter a number that is to the left of the minimum, for example -3,

then push enter. Then enter a number that is to the right of the

minimum, for example -1, then push enter. You can guess the

value of the minimum or just push enter again and the minimum

will be calculated. The minimum is (-2, -3).

Jordan School District Page 31 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

Find the x and y-intercepts for each function.

1. 2 5 10x y

4. 1

43

f x x

2. 4 7f x x

5. 2 3 18f x x x

3. 2 30f x x x

6. 22 3 4f x x x

Find the relative maximums or minimums of each function.

7. 2

2 1 3f x x

10. 2

5 4f x x

8. 2

3 2 7f x x

11. 23 18 23f x x x

9. 24 16 18f x x x

12. 2 8 14f x x x

VOCABULARY

An interval is a set of numbers between two x -values. An open interval is a set of numbers

between two x -values that doesn’t include the two end values. Open intervals are written in the

form 1 2,x x or 1 2x x x . A closed interval is a set of numbers between two -values that

does include the two end values. Closed intervals are written in the form 1 2,x x or 1 2x x x .

A function f is increasing when it is rising (or going up) from left to right and it is decreasing

when it is falling (or going down) from left to right. A constant function is neither increasing nor

decreasing; it has the same y-value for its entire domain.

A function is positive when 0f x or the y-coordinates are always positive. A function is

negative when 0f x or the y-coordinates are always negative.

Example:

Find the intervals where the function 2 2 3f x x x is:

a. increasing

b. decreasing

c. constant

d. positive

e. negative

Jordan School District Page 32 Secondary Mathematics 2

Increasing/Decreasing/Constant

1. Find the maximums or minimums.

The minimum is (-1, -4).

2. Determine if the function is rising, falling,

or constant between the maximums and

minimums.

To the left of the minimum the function is

falling or decreasing. To the right of the

minimum the function is rising or increasing.

3. Write the intervals where the function is

increasing, decreasing, or constant using

interval notation.

The function is increasing on the interval

( 1, ) . The function is decreasing on the

interval ( , 1) . The function is never

constant.

Positive/Negative

1. Find all the x-intercepts of the function.

The x-intercepts are at (-3, 0) and (1, 0).

2. Determine if the function has positive or

negative y-values on the intervals between

each x-intercept by testing a point on the

interval.

3x 3 1x 1x

4x

( 4) 5f

Positive

0x

(0) 3f

Negative

2x

(2) 5f

Positive

3. Write the intervals where the function is

positive or negative using interval notation.

The function is positive on the intervals

( , 3) and (1, ) . The function is negative

on the interval ( 3,1) .

Example:

Find the intervals where the function 3 2 1f x x is:

a. increasing

b. decreasing

c. constant

d. positive

e. negative

Increasing/Decreasing/Constant

1. Find the maximums or minimums.

There are no maximums or minimums.

2. Determine if the function is rising, falling,

or constant on its entire domain.

The function is rising from left to right so it is

increasing on its entire domain.

3. Write the intervals where the function is

increasing, decreasing, or constant using

interval notation.

The function is increasing on the interval

, . The function is never decreasing nor

is it constant.

Jordan School District Page 33 Secondary Mathematics 2

Positive/Negative

1. Find all the x-intercepts of the function.

The x-intercept is (-1, 0).

2. Determine if the function has positive or

negative y-values on the intervals between

each x-intercept by testing a point on the

interval.

1x 1x

2x

( 2) 1f

Negative

0x

(0) 0.26f

Positive

3. Write the intervals where the function is

positive or negative using interval notation. The function is positive on the interval ( 1, ).

The function is negative on the interval

( , 1) .

Example:

Find the intervals where the function | 2 | 3, 1

3, 1

x xf x

x

is:

a. increasing

b. decreasing

c. constant

d. positive

e. negative

Increasing/Decreasing/Constant

1. Find the maximums or minimums and any

breaks in the domain.

There is a maximum at (-2, 0) and a break in

the domain at x = -1.

2. Determine if the function is rising, falling,

or constant between each maximum or

minimum and each break in the graph.

The function is rising (increasing) to the left of

the maximum. It is falling (decreasing) to the

right of the maximum. It is constant to the

right of x = -1.

3. Write the intervals where the function is

increasing, decreasing, or constant using

interval notation.

The function is increasing on the interval

, 2 . It is decreasing on the interval

2, 1 . It is constant on the interval 1, .

Jordan School District Page 34 Secondary Mathematics 2

Positive/Negative

1. Find all the x-intercepts of the function and

any places where there is a break in the

domain.

The x-intercept is (-5, 0). There is a break in

the domain at x = -1.

2. Determine if the function has positive or

negative y-values on the intervals between

each x-intercept by testing a point on the

interval.

5x 5 1x 1x

6x

( 6) 1f

Negative

3x

( 3) 2f

Positive

0x

(0) 3f

Positive

3. Write the intervals where the function is

positive or negative using interval notation.

The function is positive on the intervals

( 5, 1) and ( 1, ) . The function is negative

on the interval ( , 5) .

Practice Exercises C

Find the intervals where the function is:

a. increasing

b. decreasing

c. constant

d. positive

e. negative

1. 1

32

f x x

2. 22 3 2f x x x

3. 2 3f x x

4. 3 3f x x

5. 4 1f x x

6. 2

2, 0

1, 0

xf x

x x

Jordan School District Page 35 Secondary Mathematics 2

VOCABULARY GRAPHICALLY ALGEBRAICALLY

A function is symmetric

with respect to the y-axis if,

for every point ,x y on the

graph, the point ,x y is

also on the graph. In other

words,

if you substitute –x in for

every x you end up with the

original function. When

looking at the graph, you

could “fold” the graph along

the y-axis and both sides are

the same.

( ) 5

( ) 5

( ) ( ) 5

f x x

f x x

f x f x x

A function is symmetric

with respect to the origin

if, for every point ,x y on

the graph, the point ,x y

is also on the graph. In other

words,

if you substitute –x in for

every x you end up with the

opposite of the original

function. When looking at

the graph, there is a mirror

image in Quadrants 1 & 3 or

Quadrants 2 & 4.

3

3

3

( ) 8

( ) 8

( ) ( ) 8

f x x

f x x

f x f x x

An equation with no

symmetry. If you substitute

–x in for every x you end up

with something that is

neither the original function

nor its opposite. When

looking at the graph, you

could not “fold” the graph

along the y-axis and have

both sides the same. It also

does not reflect a mirror

image in opposite quadrants.

2

2

2

( ) 2

( ) ( ) 2( )

( ) 2 ( ) ( )

f x x x

f x x x

f x x x f x f x

Jordan School District Page 36 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Determine what kind of symmetry, if any, 2 1f x x has.

Test for y-axis Symmetry

Replace x with –x and see if

the result is the same as the

original equation.

2( ) 1

( ) | 2 1|

f x x

f x x

This is not the same as the

original equation.

Test for Origin Symmetry

Replace x with –x and see if

the result is the opposite of the

original equation.

2( ) 1

( ) | 2 1|

f x x

f x x

This is not the opposite of the

original equation.

Graph

The function 2 1f x x has no symmetry.

Example:

Determine what kind of symmetry, if any, 22f x x

Test for y-axis Symmetry

Replace x with –x and see if

the result is the same as the

original equation.

2

2

2( )

( ) 2

f x x

f x x

This is equal to the original

equation.

Test for Origin Symmetry

Replace x with –x and see if

the result is the opposite of the

original equation.

2

2

2( )

( ) 2

f x x

f x x

This is not the opposite of the

original equation.

Graph

The function 22f x x has y-axis symmetry.

Example:

Determine what kind of symmetry, if any, the function graphed at

the right has.

Test for y-axis Symmetry

Pick a point ,x y on the graph and see if

,x y is also on the graph. The point (-2, 2)

is on the graph but the point (2, 2) is not. The

function does not have y-axis symmetry.

Test for origin symmetry

Pick a point ,x y on the graph and see if

,x y is also on the graph. The point (-2, 2)

is on the graph and the point (2, -2) is also on

the graph. The function has origin symmetry.

The function graphed has origin symmetry.

Jordan School District Page 37 Secondary Mathematics 2

VOCABULARY

End behavior describes what is happening to the y-values of a graph when x goes to the far right

or x goes the far left .

End behavior is written in the following format:

Right End Behavior: Left End Behavior:

lim ( )x

f x c

lim ( )x

f x c

Example:

Find the end behavior of 4 3f x x .

As x gets larger the function is getting more and more negative.

Therefore, the right end behavior is lim ( )x

f x

. As x gets

smaller the function is getting more and more positive. Therefore

the left end behavior is lim ( )x

f x

.

Example:

Find the end behavior of 23 1f x x x .

As x gets larger the function is getting more and more negative.

Therefore, the right end behavior is lim ( )x

f x

. As x gets

smaller the function is getting more and more negative. Therefore

the left end behavior is lim ( )x

f x

.

Example:

Find the end behavior of 2 1f x x .

As x gets larger the function is getting more and more positive.

Therefore, the right end behavior is lim ( )x

f x

. The domain is

restricted to numbers greater than or equal to 2, therefore this graph

has no left end behavior.

Jordan School District Page 38 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises D

Graph each function below and find the:

a. Domain and Range

b. Intercepts, if any

c. Determine whether the function has any symmetry.

d. List the intervals where the function is increasing, decreasing, or constant.

e. List the intervals where the function is positive or negative.

f. Find all the relative maximums and minimums.

g. Find end behavior

1. ( ) 2 5f x x

4. 2

( ) 3f x x

2. ( ) 3 1f x x 5. 3( ) 1 5f x x

3. ( ) 2 4f x x 6.

3, 1

( ) 12, 1 12

3

x

f xx x

VOCABULARY

Periodicity refers to a function with a

repeating pattern. The period of this function is

6 horizontal units. Meaning the pattern will

repeat itself every 6 horizontal units.

Jordan School District Page 39 Secondary Mathematics 2

You Decide

Mr. Astro’s physics class created rockets for an end of the year competition. There were three

groups who constructed rockets. On launch day the following information was presented for

review to determine a winner.

Group A estimated that their rocket was easily modeled by the equation: 216 176 3y x x .

Group B presented the following graph of the height of their rocket, in feet, over time.

Group C recorded their height in the table below.

Time (seconds) 0 2 4 6 8 10

Height (feet) 3 256 381 377 246 0

Who should be the winner of the competition? Use mathematical reasons to support your

conclusion.

hei

ght

(fee

t)

time (seconds)

Jordan School District Page 40 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 2 Cluster 2 (F.IF.7b)

Graphing Square Root, Cube Root, and Piecewise-Defined

Functions, Including Step Functions and Absolute Value Functions

Cluster 2: Analyzing functions using different representations

2.2.1b Graph functions from equations by hand and with technology showing key

features (square roots, cube roots, piecewise-defined functions including step

functions, and absolute value)

VOCABULARY

There are several types of functions (linear, exponential, quadratic, absolute value, etc.). Each of

these could be considered a family with unique characteristics that are shared among the

members. The parent function is the basic function that is used to create more complicated

functions.

Square Root Function

Parent Function

1/2f x x x

Key Features

Domain: 0,

Range: 0,

Intercepts: x-intercept 0,0 , y-intercept 0,0

Intervals of Increasing/Decreasing: increasing 0,

Intervals where Positive/Negative: 0,

Relative maximums/minimums: minimum at 0,0

Symmetries: none

End Behavior: right end behavior limx

x

; left end

behavior0

lim 0x

x

Jordan School District Page 41 Secondary Mathematics 2

Cube Root Function

Parent Function

1/33f x x x

Key Features

Domain: ,

Range: ,

Intercepts: x-intercept 0,0 , y-intercept 0,0

Intervals of Increasing/Decreasing: increasing ,

Intervals where Positive/Negative: positive 0, ,

negative ,0

Relative maximums/minimums: none

Symmetries: origin

End Behavior: right end behavior3lim

xx

; left end

behavior3lim

xx

Absolute Value Function

Parent Function

f x x

Key Features

Domain: ,

Range: 0,

Intercepts: x-intercept 0,0 , y-intercept 0,0

Intervals of Increasing/Decreasing: increasing 0, ,

decreasing ,0

Intervals where Positive/Negative: positive

,0 0,

Relative maximums/minimums: minimum at 0,0

Symmetries: y-axis symmetry

End Behavior: right end behavior limx

x

; left end

behavior limx

x

Piecewise-Defined Functions

A piecewise-defined function is a function that consists of pieces of two or more functions. For

example

2, 2

1, 2 0

2 5, 0

x x

f x x

x x

is a piecewise-defined function. It has a piece of the

Jordan School District Page 42 Secondary Mathematics 2

function 2f x x but only the piece where 2x . It also contains the function 1f x ,

but only where 2 0x . Finally, it contains the function 2 5f x x but only where

0x .

Piecewise-Defined Function

2, 2

1, 2 0

2 5, 0

x x

f x x

x x

Key Features

Domain: ,

Range: ,5

Intercepts: x-intercept 2.5,0 , y-intercept 0,1

Intervals of Increasing/Decreasing: increasing , 2 ,

decreasing 5,

Intervals where Positive/Negative: positive

2,0 and 0,2.5 , negative , 2 and 2.5,

Relative maximums/minimums: none

Symmetries: none

End Behavior: right end behavior lim 2 5x

x

; left

end behavior lim 2x

x

Step Functions are piecewise-defined functions made up of constant functions. It is called a

step function because the graph resembles a staircase.

Step Function

intf x x

Key Features

Domain: ,

Range: | is an integery y

Intercepts: x-intercept 0,1 and 0,x y y-intercept

0,0

Intervals of Increasing/Decreasing: neither increasing nor

decreasing

Intervals where Positive/Negative: positive 1, ,

negative ,0

Relative maximums/minimums: none

Symmetries: none

End Behavior: right end behavior limintx

x

; left end

behavior lim intx

x

Jordan School District Page 43 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 2 Cluster 1(F.IF.6) and Cluster 5(F.LE.3)

Quadratic Functions and Modeling

Cluster 1: Interpret Functions that Arise in Applications in Terms of a Context

2.1.3 Average rate of change over an interval: calculate, interpret, and estimate from a

graph.

Cluster 5: Constructing and comparing linear, quadratic, and exponential models; solve problems

2.5.1 Exponential functions will eventually outgrow all other functions

VOCABULARY

The average rate of change of a function over an interval is the ratio of the difference (change)

in y over the difference (change) in x.

2 1

2 1

average rate of changey yy

x x x

Example:

Find the average rate of change for 22 3 1f x x x on the interval [0, 2].

First, find the value of the function at each end point of the interval.

20 2(0) 3(0) 1f 22 2(2) 3(2) 1f

0 0 0 1f 2 2 4 6 1f

0 1f 2 8 6 1f

2 3f

Next, find the slope between the two points (0, 1) and (2, 3).

3 1 21

2 0 2m

The average rate of change of 22 3 1f x x x on the interval [0, 2] is 1.

0,1

2,3

Jordan School District Page 44 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

The per capita consumption of ready-to-eat and ready-to-cook breakfast cereal is shown

below. Find the average rate of change from 1992 to 1995 and interpret its meaning.

Years since 1990 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Cereal Consumption

(pounds) 15.4 16.1 16.6 17.3 17.4 17.1 16.6 16.3 15.6 15.5

The year 1992 is two years since 1990 and 1995 is 5 years since 1990, therefore the

interval is [2, 5]. Find the slope between the two points (2, 16.6) and (5, 17.1).

17.1 16.6 0.50.16

5 2 3m

The average rate of change from 1992 to 1995 is 0.16 pounds per year. This means that

each household increased their cereal consumption an average of 0.16 pounds each year

from 1992 to 1995.

Example:

Joe is visiting the Eiffel Tower in Paris. He accidentally

drops his camera. The camera’s height is graphed. Use

the graph to estimate the average rate of change of the

camera from 4 to 7 seconds and interpret its meaning.

At 4 seconds the height of the camera is approximately

650 feet. At 7 seconds the height of the camera is

approximately 100 feet. Find the slope between the

points (4, 650) and (7, 100).

100 650 550183.3

7 4 3m

The negative indicates that the camera is falling. The camera is picking up speed as it is

falling. This means that for each second the camera is falling from 4 to 7 seconds, it

increases in speed an average of 183.3 feet per second from 4 to 7 seconds.

Hei

ght

in f

eet

Time in seconds

Jordan School District Page 45 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises A

Find the average rate of change for each function on the specified interval.

1. 23 5f x x x on [-1, 3]

3. 2 4f x x on [-4, -2]

2. 24 12 9f x x x on [-3, 0]

4. 22 6f x x x on [-1, 0]

Find the average rate of change on the specified interval and interpret its meaning.

5. Many of the elderly are placed in nursing

care facilities. The cost of these has risen

significantly since 1960. Use the table

below find the average rate of change from

2000 to 2010.

Years since

1960

Nursing Care

Cost

(billions of $)

0 1

10 4

20 18

30 53

40 96

50 157

6. The height of an object thrown straight up

is shown in the table below. Find the

average rate of change from 1 to 2

seconds.

Time

(seconds)

Height

(feet)

0 140

1 162

2 152

3 110

4 36

7. The net sales of a company are shown in the

graph below. Estimate the average rate of

change for 2007 to 2009.

8. The graph below shows fuel consumption

in billions of gallons for vans, pickups and

SUVs. Estimate the average rate of

change for 2005 to 2012.

Years since 1999

Net

Sal

es i

n m

illi

on

s o

f $

Years since 1980

Fuel

Co

nsu

mp

tio

n

Jordan School District Page 46 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

Complete the tables.

x ( ) 2f x x x 2( )g x x x ( ) 2xh x

-2 -2 -2

-1 -1 -1

0 0 0

1 1 1

2 2 2

3 3 3

4 4 4

5 5 5

Practice Exercises C

Find the average rate of change for functions ( ), ( ),and ( )f x g x h x for the specified intervals.

Determine which of the three functions is increasing the fastest.

1. [0, 1]

4. [0, 3]

2. [3, 5]

5. [-2, 0]

3. [-2, 5]

6. [0, 5]

Jordan School District Page 47 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises D

1. Graph the following functions on the same coordinate plane.

a. 3

( ) 12

k x x b. 2

( ) 2 3 5p x x c. 2( ) 3 7xr x

2. Find the average rate of change for functions ( ), ( ), and ( )k x p x r x for the specified

intervals. Determine which of the three functions is increasing the fastest.

a. [-4, 2] b. [3, 5] c. [0, 10]

You Decide

Use exercises C and D to help you answer the following questions.

1. For each exercise, determine which function has the greatest average rate of change on

the interval 0, ?

2. In general, what type of function will increase faster? Explain your reasoning.

Jordan School District Page 48 Secondary Mathematics 2

FACTORING

(To be used before F.IF.8)

VOCABULARY

Factoring is the reverse of multiplication. It means to write an equivalent expression that is a

product. Each of the items that are multiplied together in a product is a factor. An expression is

said to be factored completely when all of the factors are prime polynomials, that is they

cannot be factored any further.

The greatest common factor is the largest expression that all the terms have in common.

FACTOR OUT A COMMON TERM

Example:

22 6 8x x

What is the largest factor that evenly divides 22 ,6 , and 8x x ?

22 : 1 2

6 : 1 2 3

8 : 1 2 2 2

x x x

x x

The common numbers are 1and 2. Multiply

them and the product is the greatest common

factor.

22 6 8

2 2 2

x x

Divide each term by the greatest common

factor.

22 3 4x x

Rewrite with the common term on the outside

of the parenthesis and the simplified terms

inside the parenthesis.

Example:

4 3 28 3 5w w w

What is the largest factor that evenly divides 4 3 28 ,3 , and 5w w w ?

4

3

2

8 : 1 2 2 2

3 : 1 3

5 : 1 5

w w w w w

w w w w

w w w

The common numbers are w and w. Multiply

them and the product is the greatest common

factor.

4 3 2

2 2 2

8 3 5w w w

w w w

Divide each term by the greatest common

factor.

2 28 3 5w w w Rewrite with the common term on the outside

of the parenthesis and the simplified terms

inside the parenthesis.

Jordan School District Page 49 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

3 29 3 15z z z

What is the largest factor that evenly divides 3 29 ,12 , and 15z z z ?

3

2

9 : 1 3 3

3 : 1 3

15 : 1 3 5

z z z z

z z z

z z

The common numbers are 3 and z. Multiply

them and the product is the greatest common

factor.

3 29 3 15

3 3 3

z z z

z z z

Divide each term by the greatest common

factor.

23 3 5z z z Rewrite with the common term on the outside

of the parenthesis and the simplified terms

inside the parenthesis.

Practice Exercises A

Factor out the greatest common factor.

1. 24 12 16x x

4. 3 22 3x x x

2. 5 4 35 10 15x x x

5. 227 36 18x x

3. 4 3 28 32 16x x x

6. 214 21 49x x

FACTOR A TRINOMIAL WITH A LEADING COEFFICIENT OF 1

When factoring a trinomial of the form 2ax bx c ,where a = 1, and b and c are

integers, find factors of c that add to equal b.

If p and q are the factors, the factored form looks like x p x q .

Example:

2 5 6x x

Factors of 6 Sum

(adds to be)

1 6 7

2 3 5

-1 -6 -7

-2 -3 -5

Find factors of 6 that add to be 5. The factors

are 2 and 3.

2 3x x This is the factored form.

Jordan School District Page 50 Secondary Mathematics 2

Another way to look at factoring is with an area model like the one pictured below.

When factoring a trinomial of the form 2ax bx c ,where a = 1, and b and c are

integers, find factors of c that add to equal b.

If p and q are the factors, the factored form looks like x p x q .

Example:

2 5 6x x

Factors of 6 Sum

(adds to be)

1 6 7

2 3 5

-1 -6 -7

-2 -3 -5

Find factors of 6 that add to be -5. The factors

are -2 and -3.

2 3x x This is the factored form.

This example can also be modeled with an area model as the picture below demonstrates.

The rectangular area represents the trinomial 2 5 6x x . The width across the top is

1 1 1x or 3x and the length down the

side is 1 1x or 2x . To obtain the area

of the rectangle, you would multiply the

length times the width or 2 3x x .

Notice that this result is the same as when we

found factors of the constant term that added

to the coefficient of the x term.

The rectangular area represents the trinomial 2 5 6x x . The width across the top is

1 1 1x or 3x and the length down the

side is 1 1x or 2x . To obtain the area

of the rectangle, you would multiply the

length times the width or 2 3x x .

Notice that this result is the same as when we

found factors of the constant term that added

to the coefficient of the x term.

2x

x

x

x x

1 1

11 1

1

x 1 1

x

1

x

1

1

2x

x

x

x x

1 1

11 1

1

x 1 1

x

1

x

1

1

Jordan School District Page 51 Secondary Mathematics 2

When factoring a trinomial of the form 2ax bx c ,where a = 1, and b and c are

integers, find factors of c that add to equal b.

If p and q are the factors, the factored form looks like x p x q .

Example:

2 5 6x x

Factors of 6 Sum

(adds to be)

1 -6 -5

2 -3 -1

-1 6 5

-2 3 1

Find factors of -6 that add to be 5. The factors

are -1 and 6.

1 6x x This is the factored form.

This example can also be modeled with an area model as the picture below demonstrates.

The rectangular area represents the trinomial 2 5 6x x . The width across the top is

1 1 1 1 1 1x or 6x and the length down the side is 1x . To obtain the area of

the rectangle, you would multiply the length times the width or 1 6x x . Notice

that this result is the same as when we found factors of the constant term that added to the

coefficient of the x term.

When factoring a trinomial of the form 2ax bx c ,where a = 1, and b and c are

integers, find factors of c that add to equal b.

If p and q are the factors, the factored form looks like x p x q .

2x

x

x x

1 1

1 11

1

x 1 1

x

1

x

1

x x x

1 1 1

Jordan School District Page 52 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

2 5 6x x

Factors of 6 Sum

(adds to be)

1 -6 -5

2 -3 -1

-1 6 5

-2 3 1

Find factors of -6 that add to be -5. The factors

are 1 and -6.

1 6x x This is the factored form.

This example can also be modeled with an area model as the picture below demonstrates.

The rectangular area represents the trinomial 2 5 6x x . The width across the top is

1 1 1 1 1 1x or 6x and the length down the side is 1x . To obtain the area of

the rectangle, you would multiply the length times the width or 1 6x x . Notice

that this result is the same as when we found factors of the constant term that added to the

coefficient of the x term.

Practice Exercises B

Factor each expression.

1. 2 4 21x x

4. 2 9 18x x

7. 2 215 14x xy y

2. 2 4 12x x

5. 2 72x x

8. 2 23 2x xy y

3. 2 2x x

6. 2 5 36x x

9. 2 217 72x xy y

2x

x

x x

1 1

1 11

1

x 1 1

x

1

x

1

x x x

1 1 1

Jordan School District Page 53 Secondary Mathematics 2

VOCABULARY

A perfect square is a number that can be expressed as the product of two equal integers. For

example: 100 is a perfect square because 10 10 100 and 2x is a perfect square because

2.x x x

FACTOR USING THE DIFFERENCE OF TWO SQUARES

When something is in the form 2 2a b , where a and b are perfect square expressions, the

factored form looks like a b a b .

Example:

2 49x

2

49 7 7

x x x

2x and 49 are both perfect squares and you are

finding the difference between them, so you

can use the difference of two squares to factor.

Therefore:

a x and 7b

7 7x x This is the factored form.

Example:

2 225 36x y

2

2

25 5 5

36 6 6

x x x

y y y

225x and 236y are both perfect squares and

you are finding the difference between them,

so you can use the difference of two squares to

factor.

Therefore:

5a x and 6b y

5 6 5 6x y x y This is the factored form.

Jordan School District Page 54 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises C

Factor each expression.

1. 249 25x

2. 2 264x y

3. 29 4x

4. 2 216 81x y

5. 236 121x

6. 2 2100 64x y

FACTOR BY GROUPING

When factoring a trinomial of the form 2ax bx c ,where a, b, and c are integers,

you will need to use the technique of factoring by grouping.

Example:

156 2 xx

(6)(15) = 90 Multiply the leading coefficient and

the constant.

Factors of 90

1 90

2 45

3 30

5 18

6 15

9 10

Choose the combination that will

either give the sum or difference

needed to result in the coefficient of

the x term.

In this case the difference should be -1,

so 9 and -10 will give you the desired

result. Or in other words, when you

combine 9 and 10x x you will end

up with x .

26 9 10 15x x x

Rewrite the equation using the

combination in place of the middle

term.

26 9 10 15x x x

Group the first two terms and the last

two terms together in order to factor.

3 2 3 5 2 3x x x

Factor the greatest common factor out

of each group.

32 x

Write down what is in the parenthesis

(they should be identical). This is one

of the factors.

5332 xx Add the “left-overs” to obtain the

second factor.

Jordan School District Page 55 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

212 7 10x x

(12)(10) = 120 Multiply the leading coefficient and

the constant.

Factors of 90

1 120

2 60

3 40

4 30

5 24

6 20

8 15

10 12

Choose the combination that will

either give the sum or difference

needed to result in the coefficient of

the x term.

In this case the difference should be 7,

so -8 and 15 will give you the desired

result. Or in other words, when you

combine 8 and 15x x you will end up

with 7x .

212 8 15 10x x x

Rewrite the equation using the

combination in place of the middle

term.

212 8 15 10x x x

Group the first two terms and the last

two terms together in order to factor.

4 3 2 5 3 2x x x

Factor the greatest common factor out

of each group.

3 2x

Write down what is in the parenthesis

(they should be identical). This is one

of the factors.

3 2 4 5x x Add the “left-overs” to obtain the

second factor.

Example:

24 25x

(4)(25) = 100 Multiply the leading coefficient and

the constant.

Factors of 100

1 100

2 50

4 25

5 20

10 10

Choose the combination that will

either give the sum or difference

needed to result in the coefficient of

the x term.

In this case the difference should be 0,

so -10 and 10 will give you the desired

result. Or in other words, when you

combine 10 and 10x x you will end

up with 0.

Jordan School District Page 56 Secondary Mathematics 2

24 10 10 25x x x

Rewrite the equation using the

combination in place of the middle

term.

24 10 10 25x x x

Group the first two terms and the last

two terms together in order to factor.

2 2 5 5 2 5x x x

Factor the greatest common factor out

of each group.

2 5x

Write down what is in the parenthesis

(they should be identical). This is one

of the factors.

2 5 2 5x x Add the “left-overs” to obtain the

second factor.

Practice Exercises D

Factor the expression.

1. 22 13 6x x

4. 22 11 6x x

7. 210 6x x

2. 24 3 1x x

5. 22 4 2x x

8. 26 7 20x x

3. 23 2 8x x

6. 23 6 3x x

9. 212 17 6x x

FACTORING GUIDELINES

#1: Always look for a greatest common factor. Then factor it out if there is one.

#2: Count the number of terms. If there are two terms, determine if you can use the

difference of two squares. If you can, factor. If not, proceed to #3.

#3: If there are three terms, check the leading coefficient. If it is “1”, then find factors of

the constant term that add to the coefficient of the x-term. If not, proceed to #4.

#4: If the leading coefficient is not “1”, factor by grouping.

Mixed practices E

Factor the expression.

1. 22 50x

4. 25 10 5x x

7. 24 4y y

10. 2 6x x

2. 2 22 16 32x xy y

5. 2 225 64x y

8. 2 13 42x x

11. 29 12 4x x

3. 23 5 12x x

6. 23 27x

9. 24 12 9x x

12. 28 2 3x x

Jordan School District Page 57 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 2 Cluster 2 (F.IF.8) , Unit 3 Cluster 1 (A.SSE.1a) and Unit 3

Cluster 2 (A.SSE.3a,b)

Forms of Quadratic Functions

Cluster 2: Analyzing functions using different representations

2.2.2 Writing functions in different but equivalent forms (quadratics: standard,

vertex, factored) using the processes of factoring or completing the square to

reveal and explain different properties of functions. Interpret these in terms of

a context.

Cluster 1: Interpret the structure of expressions

3.1.1a Interpret parts of an expression, such as terms, factors, and coefficients

Cluster 2: Writing expressions in equivalent forms and solving

3.2.1 Choose an appropriate from of an equation to solve problems (factor to find

zeros, complete the square to find maximums and minimums

VOCABULARY

Forms of Quadratic Functions

Standard Form: 2f x ax bx c , where 0a . Example: 2( ) 4 6 3 f x x x

Vertex Form: 2( ) ( ) f x a x h k , where 0a . Example:

2( ) 2( 3) 5 f x x

Factored Form: ( ) ( )( ) f x a x p x q , where 0a . Example: ( ) ( 4)( 7) f x x x

A zero of a function is a value of the input x that makes the output f x equal zero. The

zeros of a function are also known as roots, x-intercepts, and solutions of 2 0ax bx c .

The Zero Product Property states that if the product of two quantities equals zero, at least

one of the quantities equals zero. If 0ab then 0a or 0b .

Finding Zeros (Intercepts) of a Quadratic Function

When a function is in factored form, the Zero Product Property can be used to find the zeros

of the function.

If f x ax x p then 0ax x p can be used to find the zeros of f x .

If 0 ax x p then either 0ax or 0x p .

Therefore, either 0x or x p .

Jordan School District Page 58 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example: Find the zeros of 2 7f x x x

2 7f x x x

2 7 0x x

Substitute zero in for f(x).

2 0x or 7 0x Use the zero product property to set each

factor equal to zero.

0x or 7x Solve each equation.

The zeros are 0,0 and 7,0 Write them as ordered pairs.

If f x x p x q then 0x p x q can be used to find the zeros of

f x .

If 0x p x q then either 0x p or 0x q .

Therefore, either x p or x q .

Example: Find the zeros of 5 9f x x x

5 9f x x x

5 9 0x x Substitute zero in for f(x).

5 0x or 9 0x Use the zero product property to set each

factor equal to zero.

5x or 9x Solve each equation.

The zeros are 5,0 and 9,0 Write them as ordered pairs.

NOTE: If a quadratic function is given in standard form, factor first then

apply the Zero Product Property.

Example: Find the zeros of 2 11 24f x x x

2 11 24f x x x

2 11 24 0x x Substitute zero in for f(x).

8 3 0x x Factor the trinomial. (See factoring

lesson in Unit 2 for extra help.)

8 0x or 3 0x Use the zero product property to set each

factor equal to zero.

8x or 3x Solve each equation.

The zeros are 8,0 and 3,0 Write them as ordered pairs.

Jordan School District Page 59 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example: Find the zeros of 24 4 15f x x x

24 4 15f x x x

24 4 15 0x x Substitute zero in for f(x).

2 5 2 3 0x x Factor the trinomial.

2 5 0x or 2 3 0x Use the zero product property to set each

factor equal to zero. 2 5

5

2

x

x

or

2 3

3

2

x

x

Solve each equation.

The zeros are 5

,02

and 3

,02

Write them as ordered pairs.

Practice Exercises A

Find the zeros of each function.

1. 7f x x x

4. 21 3f x x x

7. 2 8 12f x x x

10. 29 25f x x

2. 2 6f x x x

5. 2 7 6f x x x

8. 2 10 24f x x x

11. 25 4 12f x x x

3. 13 4f x x x

6. 2 2f x x x

9. 24 12f x x x

12. 23 17 10f x x x

COMPLETING THE SQUARE

To complete the square of

2 ,x bx add

2

2

b

. In other

words, divide the x

coefficient by two and square

the result.

2

2

2

2

2 2

2

2

x bx

x bx

b bx x

bx

b

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

6

6

6

6

3 3

3

6

2

3

9

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x

Jordan School District Page 60 Secondary Mathematics 2

An area model can be used to represent the process of completing the square for the

expression 2 6 ___x x .

To complete the square of

2 ,x bx add

2

2

b

. In other

words, divide the x

coefficient by two and square

the result.

2

2

2

2

2 2

2

2

x bx

x bx

b bx x

bx

b

2

2

2

2

25

2

25

4

5

5

5

5 5

2 2

5

2

x x

x x

x x

x x

x

To complete the square of 2 ,ax bx factor out the

leading coefficient, a, giving

you 2 ba x x

a

. Now add

2

2

b

a

, which is the square

of the coefficient of x divided

by two. 2

2

2

2

2

2 2

2

2

ax bx

a x x

ba x x

a

b ba x x

a a

ba x

a

b

a

b

a

2

2

2

2

2

22

3 6

3

63

3

3 2

3 1 1

3

6

3

6

2 3

1

1

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x

The goal is to arrange the pieces into a square.

The x pieces are divided evenly between the

two sides so that each side is 3x long.

However, there is a large piece of the square

that is missing. In order to complete the

square you need to add 9 ones pieces.

x

x

1 1 1

1

1

1

2x x x x

x

x

x

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Jordan School District Page 61 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

For each expression complete the square.

1. 2 10 ___x x

4. 24 16 ___x x

2. 2 7 ___x x

5. 22 12 ___x x

3. 2 22 ___x x

6. 25 20 ___x x

Finding Maximum/Minimum (the vertex) Points of a Quadratic Function

VOCABULARY

Remember when a quadratic function is in vertex form 2( ) ( ) f x a x h k the point ,h k

is the vertex of the parabola. The value of a determines whether the parabola opens up or

down.

The vertex of a parabola that opens up, when 0a , is the minimum point of a quadratic

function.

The vertex of a parabola that opens up, when 0a , is the maximum point of a quadratic

function.

Example:

Find the vertex of 2

( ) 2 3f x x , then determine whether it is a maximum

or minimum point.

2

( ) 2 3f x x

2

( ) 2 3f x x Rewrite the equation so it is in the general

vertex form2( ) ( )f x a x h k .

Vertex: (-2, -3) 2 and 3h k

The vertex is a minimum. The leading coefficient is 1, which makes

0a

Jordan School District Page 62 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Find the vertex of 2

( ) 5 8 4f x x , then determine whether it is a maximum

or minimum point.

2

( ) 5 8 4f x x

2

( ) 5 8 4f x x This equation is already in the general vertex

form2( ) ( )f x a x h k .

Vertex: (8, 4) 8 and 4h k

The vertex is a maximum. The leading coefficient is -5, which makes

0a .

Practice Exercises C

Find the vertex and determine whether it is a maximum or minimum point.

1. 2

4 5 3f x x

4. 2

2 6f x x

2. 2

3 7f x x

5. 2

5 2 3f x x

3. 26 5f x x

6. 2

7 1 2f x x

NOTE: If a quadratic function is given in standard form, complete the

square to rewrite the equation in vertex form.

Example:

Find the vertex of 2( ) 12 7 f x x x , then determine whether it is a maximum

or minimum point.

2( ) 12 7 f x x x

2( ) 12 7f x x x

Collect variable terms together inside

parenthesis with constant term outside

the parenthesis.

2

2

2

( ) 1212

712

2 2f x x x

2 2 2( ) 12 76 6f x x x

Complete the square by adding

2

2

b

inside the parenthesis. Now subtract 2

2

b outside the parenthesis to

maintain equality. In other words you

are really adding zero to the equation.

Jordan School District Page 63 Secondary Mathematics 2

2( ) 12 36 67 3f x x x Simplify

2

( ) 6 29f x x Factor and combine like terms.

Vertex: (-6, -29) 6 and 29h k

The vertex is a minimum. The leading coefficient is 1, which

makes 0a

Example: Find the vertex of 2( ) 3 18 2 f x x x , then determine whether it is a

maximum or minimum point.

2( ) 3 18 2 f x x x

2( ) 3 18 2f x x x

Collect variable terms together inside

parenthesis with constant term outside

the parenthesis.

2( ) 3 6 2f x x x Factor out the leading coefficient. In

this case 3.

2

2

26 6

32 2

( ) 3 6 2f x x x

2 2 2( ) 3 6 23 3 3f x x x

Complete the square by adding

2

2

b

inside the parenthesis. Notice that

everything in the parenthesis is

multiplied by 3 so we need to subtract 2

32

b

outside the parenthesis to

maintain equality. In other words you

are really adding zero to the equation.

2( ) 3 6 9 272f x x x Simplify

2

( ) 3 3 29f x x Factor and combine like terms.

Vertex: (-3, -29) 3 and 29h k

The vertex is a minimum. The leading coefficient is 3, which

makes 0a

Jordan School District Page 64 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example: Find the vertex of 2( ) 4 8 3f x x x , then determine whether it is a

maximum or minimum point.

2( ) 4 8 3f x x x

2( ) 4 8 3f x x x

Collect variable terms together inside

parenthesis with constant term outside

the parenthesis.

2( ) 4 2 3f x x x Factor out the leading coefficient. In

this case -4.

2

2

22 2

( ) 4 22

3 42

f x x x

2 22( ) 4 1 13 42f x x x

Complete the square by adding

2

2

b

inside the parenthesis. Notice that

everything in the parenthesis is

multiplied by -4 so we need to subtract 2

42

b

outside the parenthesis to

maintain equality. In other words you

are really adding zero to the equation.

2 1 4( ) 4 2 3f x x x Simplify

2

( ) 4 1 7f x x Factor and combine like terms.

Vertex: (-1, 7) 1 and 7h k

The vertex is a maximum. The leading coefficient is -4, which

makes 0a

Practice Exercises D

Find the vertex of each equation by completing the square. Determine if the vertex is a

maximum or minimum.

1. 2( ) 10 20 f x x x

2. 2( ) 24 1 f x x x

3. 2( ) 5 20 9 f x x x

4. 2( ) 2 16 26 f x x x

5. 2( ) 8 10 f x x x

6. 2( ) 2 9f x x x

Jordan School District Page 65 Secondary Mathematics 2

The axis of symmetry is the vertical line that

divides a parabola in half. The zeros will

always be the same distance from the axis of

symmetry.

The vertex always lies on the axis of

symmetry.

When completing the square we end up with

2

( )2

bf x a x k

a

2

( )2

bf x a x k

a

2

( )f x a x h k

Notice the x-coordinate of the vertex is 2

b

a .

The y-coordinate can be found by evaluating

the function at 2

b

a .

Therefore, another method for finding the

vertex (h, k) from a standard form equation is

to use 2

bh

a and

2

bk f

a.

Example:

2( ) 3 2 1 f x x x

12 122

2( 3) 6

h

2(2) 3(2) 12(2) 1 11 k f

The point (2, 11) is the vertex. Since 3 0 ,

(2, 11) is the maximum point of the function.

Practice Exercises E

Identify the vertex of each function. Then tell if it is a maximum or minimum point.

1. 24 8 7f x x x

3. 22 12 3f x x x

2. 2 12 30f x x x

4. 2 14 1f x x x

Axis of symmetry

Jordan School District Page 66 Secondary Mathematics 2

YOU DECIDE

A model rocket is launched from ground level. The function 2( ) 16 160 h t t t models the

height h (measured in feet) of the rocket after time t (measured in seconds).

Find the zeros and the vertex of the function. Explain what each means in context of the

problem.

Practice Exercises F

Solve

1. The height h(t), in feet, of a “weeping willow” firework display, t seconds after having been

launched from an 80-ft high rooftop, is given by 216 64 80h t t t . When will it reach

its maximum height? What is its maximum height?

2. The value of some stock can be represented by 22 8 10V x x x , where x is the number

of months after January 2012. What is the lowest value V(x) will reach, and when did that

occur?

3. Suppose that a flare is launched upward with an initial velocity of 80 ft/sec from a height of

224 ft. Its height in feet, h(t), after t seconds is given by 216 80 224h t t t . How long

will it take the flare to reach the ground?

4. A company’s profit can be modeled by the equation 2( ) 980 3000p x x x where x is the

number of units sold. Find the maximum profit of the company.

5. The Rainbow Bridge Arch at Lake Powell is the world’s highest natural arch. The height of

an object that has been dropped from the top of the arch can be modeled by the equation 2( ) 16 256h t t , where t is the time in seconds and h is the height in feet. How long does

it take for the object to reach the ground?

6. The amount spent by U.S. companies for online advertising can be approximated by

212 8

2a t t t , where a(t) is in billions of dollars and t is the number of years after 2010.

In what year after 2010 did U.S. companies spend the least amount of money?

Jordan School District Page 67 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 6 Cluster 3 (G.GPE.2): Parabolas as Conics

Cluster 3: Translating between descriptions and equations for a conic section

6.3.2 Find the equation of a parabola given the focus and directrix parallel to a

coordinate axis.

VOCABULARY

A parabola is the set of all points , ,P x y , in a plane that are an equal distance from both a fixed

point, the focus, and a fixed line, the directrix.

Jordan School District Page 68 Secondary Mathematics 2

Standard Form for the Equation of a Parabola Vertex at (0, 0) Vertex at (h, k)

Equation 21

4y x

p

21

4 y k x h

p

Direction Opens upward if 0p

Opens downward if 0p

Opens upward if 0p

Opens downward if 0p

Focus (0, p) (h, k + p)

Directrix y p y k p

Graph

Example 1:

Use the Distance Formula to find the equation of a parabola with focus 0,3 and

directrix 3 y .

PF PD

2 2 2 2

1 1 2 2( ) ( ) ( ) ( )x x y y x x y y

A point ,P x y on the graph of a parabola is

the same distance from the focus 0,3F and

a point on the directrix , 3D x .

2 2 2 20 ( 3) ( ) ( 3)x y x x y

Substitute in known values.

22 2( 3) 3x y y Simplify.

22

22 2

2 2 2

( 3) 3

( 3) ( 3)

x y y

x y y

Square both sides of the equation and use the

properties of exponents to simplify.

Jordan School District Page 69 Secondary Mathematics 2

2 2 2

2 2 2

2

2

( 3) ( 3)

6 9 6 9

12

1

12

x y y

x y y y y

x y

y x

Solve for y.

Example:

Use the Distance Formula to find the equation of a parabola with focus (-5, 3) and

directrix 9y .

PF PD

2 2 2 2

1 1 2 2( ) ( ) ( ) ( )x x y y x x y y

A point ,P x y on the graph of a parabola is

the same distance from the focus 5,3F and

a point on the directrix ,9D x .

2 2 2 25 ( 3) ( ) ( 9)x y x x y

Substitute in known values.

2 225 ( 3) 9x y y Simplify.

2 22 22

2 2 2

5 ( 3) 9

5 ( 3) ( 9)

x y y

x y y

Square both sides of the equation and use the

properties of exponents to simplify.

2 2 2

2 2 2

2

2

2

5 ( 9) ( 3)

5 18 81 6 9

5 12 72

5 12 6

15 6

12

x y y

x y y y y

x y

x y

x y

Combine the x terms on one side of the

equation and the y terms on the other side of

the equation.

Practice Exercises A Use the distance formula to find the equation of parabola with the given information.

1. focus 0, 5

directrix 5y

2. focus 0,7

directrix 7y

3. focus 0, 3

directrix 6y

4. focus 2,6

directrix 8y

5. focus 3,4

directrix 1y

6. focus 3,3

directrix 7y

Jordan School District Page 70 Secondary Mathematics 2

Standard Form for the Equation of a Parabola Vertex at (0, 0) Vertex at (h, k)

Equation 21

4x y

p

21

4x h y k

p

Direction Opens to the right if 0p

Opens to the left if 0p

Opens to the right if 0p

Opens to the left if 0p

Focus ,0p ,h p k

Directrix x p x h p

Graph

Example:

Use the Distance Formula to find the equation of a parabola with focus 2,0 and

directrix 2x .

PF PD

2 2 2 2

1 1 2 2( ) ( ) ( ) ( )x x y y x x y y

A point ,x y on the graph of a parabola is the

same distance from the focus 2,0 and a point

on the directrix 2, y .

2 2 2 22 ( 0) ( 2) ( )x y x y y Substitute in known values.

2 222 2x y x Simplify.

2 22 22

2 2 2

2 2

2 ( 2)

x y x

x y x

Square both sides of the equation and use the

properties of exponents to simplify.

Jordan School District Page 71 Secondary Mathematics 2

2 22

2 2 2

2

2

2 2

4 4 4 4

8

1

8

y x x

y x x x x

y x

y x

Solve for x.

Example:

Use the Distance Formula to find the equation of a parabola with focus 4,3 and

directrix 6x .

PF PD

2 2 2 2

1 1 2 2( ) ( ) ( ) ( )x x y y x x y y

A point ,x y on the graph of a parabola is the

same distance from the focus 4,3 and a point

on the directrix 6, y .

2 2 2 2

4 3 6x y x y y Substitute in known values.

2 2 2

4 3 6x y x Simplify.

2 22 2 2

2 2 2

4 3 6

4 3 6

x y x

x y x

Square both sides of the equation and use the

properties of exponents to simplify.

2 2 2

2 2 2

2

2

2

3 6 4

3 12 36 8 16

3 4 20

3 4 5

13 5

4

y x x

y x x x x

y x

y x

y x

Combine the x terms on one side of the

equation and the y terms on the other side of

the equation.

Practice Exercises B Use the distance formula to find the equation of parabola with the given information.

1. focus 4,0

directrix 4x

2. focus 5,0

directrix 5x

3. focus 3,0

directrix 3x

4. focus 2, 3

directrix 5x

5. focus 2, 4

directrix 6x

6. focus 1,1

directrix 5x

Jordan School District Page 72 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises C Determine the vertex, focus, directrix and the direction for each of the following parabolas.

1. 2

12 1 3y x

4. 2

6 3 1y x

2. 2

4 6 1x y

5. 2

3 12 2y x

3. 2

1 4 5y x

6. 2

6 16 4y x

You Decide

A parabola has focus (-2,1) and directrix y = -3. Determine whether or not the point (2,1) is part

of the parabola. Justify your response.

Jordan School District Page 73 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 6 Cluster 3 Honors (G.GPE.3)

Deriving Equations of Ellipses and Hyperbolas

Cluster 3: Translate between the geometric description and the equation for a conic section

H.5.1 Derive the equations of ellipses and hyperbolas given the foci, using the fact that

the sum or difference of distances from the foci is constant.

VOCABULARY

An ellipse is the set of all points in a plane the sum of whose distances from two fixed points

(called foci), 1F and 2F , is constant. The midpoint of the segments connecting the foci is the

center of the ellipse.

An ellipse can be elongated horizontally or vertically. The line through the foci intersects the

ellipse at its vertices. The segment whose endpoints are the vertices is called the major axis.

The minor axis is a segment that is perpendicular to the major axis and its endpoints intersect

the ellipse.

Jordan School District Page 74 Secondary Mathematics 2

Deriving the Standard Equation of an Ellipse

1 2 2PF PF a

The sum of the

distance from a point

,P x y on the

ellipse to each foci,

,0 and ,0c c , is

equal to 2a.

2 2 2 2

0 0 2x c y x c y a

Use the distance

formula and

substitute in known

values.

2 2 2 2

0 2 0x c y a x c y Isolate one of the

radicals.

2 22 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 22

2 22 2 2 2 2 2 2

2 22

0 2 0

0 4 4 0 0

2 4 4 0 2

4 4 4 0

x c y a x c y

x c y a a x c y x c y

x xc c y a a x c y x xc c y

xc a a x c y

Square each side

then simplify.

2 22

22 2

2 22

2 22

4 4 4 0

4 40

4

0

0

cx a a x c y

cx aa x c y

cx a a x c y

a cx a x c y

Isolate the radical

again.

22 2 22

2 24 2 2 2 2

4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

0

2 0

2 2

2 2

a cx a x c y

a a cx c x a x c y

a a cx c x a x cx c y

a a cx c x a x a cx a c a y

a c x a x a c a y

Square each side

then simplify.

4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

a a c a x c x a y

a a c x a c a y

Combine all the

terms containing x

and y on one side.

2 2 2 2 2 2a b x b a y Let 2 2 2b a c .

Jordan School District Page 75 Secondary Mathematics 2

2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2

2 2

2 21

a b x b a y

a b a b

x y

a b

Divide by2 2a b .

Standard Form for the Equation of an Ellipse Centered at (0, 0)

Equation

Horizontal Ellipse

2 2

2 2

2 21,

x ya b

a b

Vertical Ellipse

2 2

2 2

2 21,

x ya b

b a

Major Axis Along the x-axis

Length: 2a

Along the y-axis

Length: 2a

Minor Axis Along the y-axis

Length: 2b

Along the x-axis

Length: 2b

Foci ,0 and ,0c c 0, and 0,c c

Vertices ,0 and ,0a a 0, and 0,a a

Pythagorean

Relation 2 2 2a b c

2 2 2a b c

Basic Graph

Example:

Locate the vertices and foci for the ellipse2 225 4 100x y . Graph the ellipse.

2 225 4 100x y 2 2

2 2

25 4 100

100 100 100

14 25

x y

x y

The standard equation of an ellipse is equal

to 1. Divide each side of the equation by

100 and simplify.

Jordan School District Page 76 Secondary Mathematics 2

2 2

14 25

25 5

4 2

x y

a

b

Identify a and b. Remember 2 2a b .

Note: a and b are lengths therefore the

positive square root will ALWAYS be

used. 2

2

25 4

21

21

c

c

c

Use a and b to find c.

Remember2 2 2a b c .

Vertices: 0, 5 and 0,5

Foci: 0, 21 and 0, 21

The vertices are 0, and 0,a a and the

foci are 0, and 0,c c because the

ellipse is vertical.

Begin graphing the ellipse by plotting the

center which is at (0, 0). Then plot the

vertices which are at 0, 5 and 0,5 .

Use the length of b to plot the endpoints

of the minor axis. 2b so the endpoints

are 2 units to the left and right of the

center (0, 0). They are at 2,0 and

2,0 .

Connect your points with a curve.

Jordan School District Page 77 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Write an equation in standard form for an ellipse with foci located at 2,0 and 2,0

and vertices located at 6,0 and 6,0 .

2 2

2 21

x y

a b

The ellipse is horizontal because the foci

and vertices are along the x-axis. Use the

standard equation for a horizontal ellipse. 2 2 2

2

2

6 2

36 4

32

b

b

b

6

2

a

c

Find 2b using

2 2 2a b c .

2 2

136 32

x y Substitute in known values.

Practice Exercises A Locate the vertices and foci of the ellipse, then graph.

1. 2 2

116 7

x y 2.

2 2

121 25

x y 3.

2 2

127 36

x y

4. 2 23 4 12x y 5.

2 29 4 36x y 6. 2 21 4x y

Write an equation in standard form for the ellipse that satisfies the given conditions.

7. Foci: 5,0 and 5,0

Vertices: 8,0 and 8,0

8. Foci: 0, 4 and 0,4

Vertices: 0, 7 and 0,7

9. Foci: 0, 3 and 0,3

Vertices: 0, 4 and 0,4

10. Foci: 6,0 and 6,0

Vertices: 10,0 and 10,0

11. Major axis endpoints: 0, 6

Minor axis length 8

12. Endpoints of axes are 5,0 and

0, 4

Jordan School District Page 78 Secondary Mathematics 2

Ellipses Centered at (h, k)

Standard Form for the Equation of an Ellipse Centered at (h, k)

Equation

2 2

2 2

2 21,

x h y ka b

a b

2 2

2 2

2 21,

x h y ka b

b a

Center ,h k ,h k

Major Axis Parallel to the x-axis

Length: 2a

Parallel to the y-axis

Length: 2a

Minor Axis Parallel to the y-axis

Length: 2b

Parallel to the x-axis

Length: 2b

Foci , and ,h c k h c k , and ,h k c h k c

Vertices , and ,h a k h a k , and ,h k a h k a

Pythagorean

Relation 2 2 2a b c

2 2 2a b c

Example:

Locate the center, the vertices and the foci of the ellipse 2 2

3 4 2 16x y . Graph

the ellipse.

2 2

3 4 2 16x y

2 2

2 2

3 4 2 16

16 16 16

3 21

16 4

x y

x y

The standard equation of an ellipse is

equal to 1. Divide each side of the

equation by 16 and simplify.

2 2

3 21

16 4

16 4

4 2

x y

a

b

Identify a and b. Remember

2 2a b .

2

2

16 4

12

12

2 3

c

c

c

c

Use a and b to find c.

Remember 2 2 2a b c .

Center: 3,2

Vertices:

3 4,2 and 3 4,2

7,2 and 1,2

Foci: 3 2 3,2 and 3 2 3,2

3 and 2h k

The ellipse is horizontal, therefore the

vertices are , and ,h a k h a k and

the foci are , and ,h c k h c k .

Jordan School District Page 79 Secondary Mathematics 2

Begin graphing the ellipse by plotting the

center of the ellipse 3,2 . Then plot the

vertices 7,2 and 1,2 .

Use the length of b to plot the endpoints of

the minor axis. 2b so the endpoints are

2 units above and below the center

3,2 . They are at 3,0 and 3,4 .

Connect your points with a curve.

Example:

Write an equation in standard form for an ellipse with foci at 2,1 and 2,5 and

vertices at 2, 1 and 2,7 .

2 2

2 21

x h y k

b a

The ellipse is vertical because the foci and

vertices are parallel to the y-axis. Use the

standard equation for a horizontal ellipse.

2 2 2

2

2

4 2

16 4

12

b

b

b

2 7 ( 1)

2 8

4

a

a

a

2 5 1

2 4

2

c

c

c

Find 2b using

2 2 2a b c .

Center: 2 2 1 7

, 2,32 2

The center is the midpoint of the vertices.

2 2

2 31

12 16

x y Substitute in known values.

Jordan School District Page 80 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B Locate the center, vertices and foci of the ellipse, then graph.

1.

2 22 1

19 4

x y 2.

2 2

4 21

9 25

x y 3.

2 2

3 11

9 16

x y

4. 2 2

3 9 2 18x y 5. 2 2

9 1 4 3 36x y 6. 2 2

2 4 4 3 24x y

Write an equation in standard form for the ellipse that satisfies the given conditions.

7. Foci: 1, 4 and 5, 4

Vertices: 0, 4 and 6, 4

8. Foci: 3, 6 and 3,2

Vertices: 3, 7 and 3,3

9. Foci: 4,2 and 6,2

Vertices: 2,2 and 8,2

10. Foci: 1,0 and 1, 4

Vertices: 1,1 and 1, 5

11. Vertices: 5,2 and 3,2

Minor axis length is 6.

12. Vertices: 0,2 and 6,2

Minor axis length is 2.

Jordan School District Page 81 Secondary Mathematics 2

VOCABULARY

A hyperbola is the set of all points in a plane whose distances from two fixed points in the plane

have a constant difference. The fixed points are the foci of the hyperbola.

The line through the foci intersects the hyperbola at its vertices. The segment connecting the

vertices is called the transverse axis. The center of the hyperbola is the midpoint of the

transverse axis. Hyperbolas have two oblique asymptotes that intersect at the center.

Deriving the Standard Equation of a Hyperbola

1 2 2PF PF a

The difference of the

distance from a point

,P x y on the

hyperbola to each foci,

,0 and ,0c c , is

equal to 2a .

Jordan School District Page 82 Secondary Mathematics 2

2 2 2 2

2 22 2

0 0 2

2

x c y x c y a

x c y x c y a

Use the distance formula

and substitute in known

values.

2 22 22x c y a x c y

Isolate one of the

radicals.

2 22 22 2

2 2 22 2 2 2

2 2 22 2 2 2

22 2 2 2 2 2

22 2

2

4 4

4 4

2 2 4 4

4 4 4

x c y a x c y

x c y a a x c y x c y

x c y x c y a a x c y

x cx c x cx c a a x c y

cx a a x c y

Square each side then

simplify.

22 2

22 2

22 2

4 4 4

4 4

4

cx a a x c y

cx aa x c y

cx a a x c y

Isolate the radical again.

22 22 2

22 2 2 4 2 2

2 2 2 4 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2

2

2 2

2 2

cx a a x c y

c x a cx a a x c y

c x a cx a a x cx c y

c x a cx a a x a cx a c a y

c x a a x a c a y

Square each side then

simplify.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

c x a x a y a c a

x c a a y a c a

Combine all the terms

containing x and y on

one side.

2 2 2 2 2 2x b a y a b Let 2 2 2b c a .

2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2

2 2

2 21

x b a y a b

a b a b

x y

a b

Divide by 2 2a b .

Jordan School District Page 83 Secondary Mathematics 2

Standard Form for the Equation of a Hyperbola Centered at (0, 0)

Equation

Opens Left and Right

2 2

2 21

x y

a b

Opens Up and Down

2 2

2 21

y x

a b

Transverse

Axis

x-axis

Length: 2a

y-axis

Length: 2a

Conjugate

Axis

y-axis

Length:2b

x-axis

Length:2b

Foci ,0 and ,0c c 0, and 0,c c

Vertices ,0 and ,0a a 0, and 0,a a

Pythagorean

Relation 2 2 2c a b

2 2 2c a b

Asymptotes b

y xa

a

y xb

Basic Graph

Example:

Find the vertices, foci and asymptotes of the hyperbola 2 24 9 36x y . Then graph the

hyperbola.

2 24 9 36x y 2 2

2 2

4 9 36

36 36 36

19 4

x y

x y

The standard equation of an ellipse is

equal to 1. Divide each side of the

equation by 36 and simplify.

Jordan School District Page 84 Secondary Mathematics 2

2 2

19 4

9 3

4 2

x y

a

b

Identify a and b.

2

2

9 4

13

13

c

c

c

Use a and b to find c.

Remember2 2 2c a b .

Vertices: 3,0 and 3,0

Foci: 13,0 and 13,0

Asymptotes:2

3y x and

2

3y x

This hyperbola opens left and right so the

vertices are ,0a and ,0a and the foci

are ,0 and ,0c c .

The asymptotes are b

y xa

.

Begin graphing the hyperbola by plotting

the center at (0, 0). Then plot the vertices

at 3,0 and 3,0 .

Use the length of b to plot the endpoints of

the conjugate axis. 2b so the endpoints

are 2 units above and below the center

0,0 . They are at 0, 2 and 0,2 .

Construct a rectangle using the points.

Jordan School District Page 85 Secondary Mathematics 2

Draw the asymptotes by drawing a line

that connects the diagonal corners of the

rectangle and the center.

Use the asymptotes to help you draw the

hyperbola. The hyperbola will open left

and right and pass through each vertex.

Example:

Write an equation in standard form for the hyperbola with foci 0, 3 and 0,3 whose

conjugate axis has length 4.

2 2

2 21

y x

a b

The foci are along the y-axis so the

hyperbola’s branches open up and down.

2 4

2

b

b

The conjugate axis is length 4. Use it to

solve for b.

2 2 2

2

2

3 2

9 4

5

a

a

a

Use 2b and 3c to solve for 2a .

Remember 2 2 2c a b .

2 2

15 4

y x Substitute in known values.

Jordan School District Page 86 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises C Locate the center, vertices, foci and asymptotes of the hyperbola, then graph.

1. 2 2

14 16

x y 2.

2 2

125 36

y x 3.

2 2

11 9

x y

4. 2 220 25 100y x 5. 2 24 16 64y x 6. 2 22 4 16x y

Write an equation in standard form for the hyperbola that satisfies the given conditions.

7. Foci: 0, 2 and 0,2

Vertices: 0, 1 and 0,1

8. Foci: 5,0 and 5,0

Vertices: 3,0 and 3,0

9. Foci: 0, 7 and 0,7

Vertices: 0, 5 and 0,5

10. Foci: 10,0 and 10,0

Vertices: 6,0 and 6,0

11. Vertices: 4,0 and 4,0

Conjugate axis length is 10.

12. Vertices: 0, 3 and 0,3

Conjugate axis length is 6.

Standard Form for the Equation of a Hyperbola Centered at (h, k)

Equation

Opens Left and Right

2 2

2 21

x h y k

a b

Opens Up and Down

2 2

2 21

y k x h

a b

Transverse

Axis

Parallel to x-axis

Length: 2a

Parallel to y-axis

Length: 2a

Conjugate

Axis

y-axis

Length:2b

x-axis

Length:2b

Foci , and ,h c k h c k , and ,h k c h k c

Vertices , and ,h a k h a k , and ,h k a h k a

Pythagorean

Relation 2 2 2c a b

2 2 2c a b

Asymptotes b

y k x ha

a

y k x hb

Jordan School District Page 87 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Find the center, vertices, foci and asymptotes of the hyperbola

2 22 5

19 49

x y .

Then graph the hyperbola.

2 2

2 51

9 49

x y

2 2

2 51

9 49

9 3

49 7

x y

a

b

Identify a and b.

2

2

9 49

58

58

c

c

c

Use a and b to find

2c . Remember that 2 2 2c a b .

Center: 2,5

Vertices:

2 3,5 and 2 3,5

5,5 and 1,5

Foci: 2 58,5 and 2 58,5

Asymptotes: 7

5 23

y x and

7

5 23

y x

The hyperbola’s branches open left and

right so the vertices are ,h a k and

,h a k . The foci are ,h c k and

,h c k .

Begin graphing the hyperbola by plotting

the center at (-2, 5). Then plot the

vertices at 5,5 and 1,5 .

Jordan School District Page 88 Secondary Mathematics 2

Use the length of b to plot the endpoints

of the conjugate axis. 7b so the

endpoints are 7 units above and below the

center 2,5 . They are at 2, 2 and

2,12 .

Construct a rectangle using the points.

Draw the asymptotes by drawing a line

that connects the diagonal corners of the

rectangle and the center.

Use the asymptotes to help you draw the

hyperbola. The hyperbola will open left

and right and pass through each vertex.

Jordan School District Page 89 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Write an equation in standard form for the hyperbola whose vertices are 2, 1 and

8, 1 and whose conjugate axis has length 8.

2 2

2 21

y k x h

a b

The foci are parallel to the x-axis so the

hyperbola’s branches open left and right.

Center: 2 8 1 1

, 3, 12 2

The midpoint of the vertices is the center

of the hyperbola.

2 8 ( 2)

2 10

5

a

a

a

The vertices are at 2, 1 and 8, 1 .

Use the distance between them to find a.

2 8

4

b

b

The conjugate axis is length 8. Use it to

solve for b.

2 2

3 11

25 16

x y Substitute in known values.

Practice Exercises D

Locate the center, vertices, foci and asymptotes of the hyperbola, then graph.

1.

2 25 6

125 16

y x 2.

2 25

14 36

x y 3.

2 2

1 31

49 16

x y

4. 2 2

4 2 6 16y x 5. 2 2

6 5 4 100y x 6. 2 2

7 4 4 2 28x y

Write an equation in standard form for the hyperbola that satisfies the given conditions.

7. Foci: 1,9 and 1,1

Vertices: 1,7 and 1,3

8. Foci: 2, 5 and 8, 5

Vertices: 0, 5 and 6, 5

9. Foci: 8, 4 and 4, 4

Vertices: 7, 4 and 3, 4

10. Foci: 3,5 and 3, 11

Vertices: 3,1 and 3, 7

11. Vertices: 3,6 and 3,2

Minor axis length is 8.

12. Vertices: 7, 2 and 3, 2

Minor axis length is 6.

Jordan School District Page 90 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 2 Cluster 3 (F.BF.1)

Building Functions That Model Relationships Between Two

Quantities

Cluster 3: Building functions that model relationships between two quantities

2.3.1 Focus on quadratics and exponentials to write a function that describes a

relationship between 2 quantities (2nd

difference for quadratics)

2.3.1 Determine an explicit expression or steps for calculation from context.

2.3.1 Combine functions using arithmetic operations.

Vocabulary

A function is a relation for which each input has exactly one output. In an ordered pair the

first number is considered the input and the second number is considered the output. If any

input has more than one output, then the relation is not a function.

For example the set of ordered pairs {(1,2), (3,5),(8,11)} is a function because each input

value has an output value. The set {(1, 2) (1, 3), (6, 7)} does not represent a function because

the input 1 has two different outputs 2 and 3.

Linear Function- a function that can be written in the

form y mx b ,where m and b are constants. The graph

of a linear function is a line.

A linear function can be expressed in two different ways:

Linear notation: y mx b

Function notation: f x mx b

2 1f x x

Linear functions can model arithmetic sequences, where

the domain is the set of positive integers, because there is

a common difference between each successive term. The

common difference can also be called the first difference.

Linear functions can model any pattern where the first

difference is the same number.

+2+2+2

1, 3, 5, 7, ...

1 st difference

Jordan School District Page 91 Secondary Mathematics 2

Exponential Function- a function of the form ( ) xf x ab

where a and b are constants and 0,a 0b , and 1.b

Exponential functions are most easily recognized by the

variable in the exponent. The values of f(x) are either

increasing (exponential growth) if 0a and 1b or

decreasing (exponential decay) if 0a and 0 1b .

2xf x

Exponential functions can model geometric sequences,

where the domain is the set of positive integers, because

each successive term is multiplied by the same number

called the common ratio. Exponential functions can

model any pattern where the next term is obtained by

multiplying each successive term by the same number.

Quadratic Function- a function that can be written in the

form 2( )f x ax bx c where 0a .

Quadratic functions are most easily recognized by the 2x

term. The graph is a parabola. A quadratic function can

be formed by multiplying two linear functions. The

quadratic function to the right can also be written as

( 3)(2 1)f x x x .

22 5 3f x x x

To determine if a pattern or a sequence can be modeled by

a quadratic function, you have to look at the first and

second difference. The second difference is the difference

between the numbers in the first difference. If the first

difference is not the same number but the second

difference is, then the pattern or sequence can be modeled

by a quadratic function.

1, 3, 9, 27, ...

+2+2

+7+5+3

1, 4, 9, 16, ...

3 3 3

1 st difference

2 nd difference

common ratio

Jordan School District Page 92 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Determine if the pattern 1, 3, 9, 19, … would be modeled by a linear function, an

exponential function, or a quadratic function.

Answer:

Check the first difference to see if it is the same

number each time. For this pattern, it is not the

same, so it will not be modeled by a linear

function.

Check to see if each term is being multiplied by

the same factor. For this pattern, it is not the

same, so it will not be modeled by an exponential

function.

Check the second difference to see if it is the

same number each time. For this pattern, it is the

same, so the pattern can be modeled by a

quadratic function.

Conclusion: The pattern can be modeled by a quadratic function.

Practice Exercises A

Determine if the pattern would be modeled by a linear function, an exponential function, or a

quadratic function.

1. 2.

3. 4. 10, 18, 28, …

5. 81, 27, 9, … 6. 8, 16, 24, …

+10+6+2

1, 3, 9, 19, ...

3 3 2.1

1, 3, 9, 19, ...

+4+4

+10+6+2

1, 3, 9, 19, ...

1 2 3 4 1

2

3

1 2 3 4

Jordan School District Page 93 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Using a graphing calculator determine the quadratic function modeled by the given

data

x 1 2 3 4 5 6

f(x) 1 9 23 43 69 101

Input the data into a TI-83 or TI-84 calculator list

Enter the information into your lists by pushing STAT

followed by Edit.

If you have values in your lists already, you can clear the

information by highlighting the name of the list then

pushing CLEAR and ENTER. Do not push DEL or it will

delete the entire list.

Enter the x values into L1 and the f(x) values into L2.

Push 2nd

MODE to get back to the home screen.

Make a scatter plot

Push 2nd

Y= to bring up the STAT PLOT menu.

Select Plot1 by pushing ENTER or 1.

Turn Plot1 on by pushing ENTER when ON is highlighted.

Make sure that the scatter plot option is highlighted. If it

isn’t, select it by pushing ENTER when the scatter plot

graphic is highlighted.

The Xlist should say L1 and the Ylist should say L2. If it

doesn’t, L1 can be entered by pushing 2nd

1 and L2 by 2nd

2.

To view the graph you can push GRAPH. If you want a

nice viewing window, first push ZOOM arrow down to

option 9 ZOOMSTAT and either push ENTER or push 9.

Creating a quadratic regression equation

You do not have to graph a function to create a regression,

but it is recommended that you compare your regression to

the data points to determine visually if it is a good model or

not.

From the home screen push STAT, arrow right to CALC

and either push 5 for QuadReg or arrow down to 5 and push

ENTER. (To do an exponential regression, push 0 for

ExpReg or arrow down to 0 and push ENTER.)

Type 2nd

1, (the comma is located above 7) 2nd

2, VARS

arrow right to Y-VARS select FUNCTION and Y1 then

push ENTER.

The quadratic regression is 23 1f x x x . It has been

pasted into Y1 so that you can push GRAPH again and

compare your regression to the data.

Jordan School District Page 94 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

Find the regression equation. Round to three decimals when necessary.

1. Given the table of values use a graphing calculator to find the quadratic function.

x 0 1 2 3 4 5

f(x) -6 -21 -40 -57 -66 -61

2. Use a graphing calculator to find a quadratic model for the data.

x 1 2 3 4 5 6

f(x) 3 1 1 3 7 13

3. From 1972 to 1998 the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service has kept a list of endangered

species in the United States. The table below shows the number of endangered

species. Find an appropriate exponential equation to model the data.

Year 1972 1975 1978 1981 1984 1987 1990 1993 1996

Number of

species 119.6 157.5 207.3 273 359.4 473.3 623.1 820.5 1080.3

4. The cell phone subscribers of the small town of Herriman are shown below. Find an

exponential equation to model the data.

Year 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010

Subscribers 285 802 2,259 6,360 17,904

Example:

When doctors prescribe medicine, they must consider how much the effectiveness of

the drug will decrease as time passes. The table below provides information on how

much of the drug remains in a person’s system after t hours. Find a model for the

data.

t (hours) 0 2 4 6 8 10

Amount (mg) 250 225.6 203.6 183.8 165.9 149.7

Answer:

Sometimes it is helpful to look at the graph of the points.

For this particular example, it is difficult to determine if this

should be modeled by an exponential or a quadratic function

Jordan School District Page 95 Secondary Mathematics 2

from the graph. Therefore, consider the context of the

example. The amount of the drug will continue to decrease

unless more is given to the patient. If the patient does not

receive more medication, at some point there will only be trace

amounts of the drug left in the patient’s system. This would

suggest a function that continues to decrease until it reaches a

leveling off point. An exponential model would be better suited for this situation.

Use the regression capabilities of your graphing calculator to find an exponential

model for the data. Follow the instructions for the previous example but make sure

that you select option 0: ExpReg. The function that models the data is:

249.977 0.950x

f x .

Practice Exercises C

Determine if the data is best modeled by an exponential or quadratic function. Then find the

appropriate regression equation.

1. The pesticide DDT was widely used in the United States until its ban in 1972. DDT

is toxic to a wide range of animals and aquatic life, and is suspected to cause cancer

in humans. The half-life of DDT can be 15 or more years. Half-life is the amount of

time it takes for half of the amount of a substance to decay. Scientists and

environmentalists worry about such substances because these hazardous materials

continue to be dangerous for many years after their disposal. Write an equation to

model the data below.

Year 1972 1982 1992 2012

Amount of DDT (in grams) 50 9.8 1.9 0.4

2. Use a graphing calculator to find a model for the data.

x 1 2 3 4 5 6

f(x) 0 -7 -4 21 80 185

Jordan School District Page 96 Secondary Mathematics 2

3. The table shows the average movie ticket price in dollars for various years from 1983

to 2003. Find the model for the data.

Years since 1983, t 0 4 8 12 16 20

Movie ticket price, m 4.75 4.07 3.65 4.10 5.08 6.03

4. The table below shows the value of car each year after it was purchased. Find a

model for the data.

Years after purchase 0 1 2 3 4 5

Value of car 24,000 20,160 16,934 14,225 11,949 10,037

Combining functions using arithmetic operations

Let f and g be any two functions. A new function h can be created by performing any of the

four basic operations on f and g.

The domain of h consists of the x-values that are in the domains of both f and g. Additionally,

the domain of a quotient does not include x-values for which g(x) = 0.

Operation Definition Example: 2( ) 5 2f x x x ,

2( ) 3g x x

Addition h x f x g x 2 2 2( ) 5 2 ( 3 ) 2 2h x x x x x x

Subtraction h x f x g x 2 2 2( ) 5 2 ( 3 ) 8 2h x x x x x x

Multiplication h x f x g x 2 2 4 3( ) (5 2 ) ( 3 ) 15 6h x x x x x x

Division ( )( )

( )

f xh x

g x

2

2

5 25 2 5 2( )

3 3 3

x xx x xh x

x x x x

Adding and Subtracting Functions

Example:

Let 2 1f x x and 2 3 4g x x x . Perform the indicated operation and state

the domain of the new function.

a. h x f x g x b. h x g x f x c. 2h x f x g x

Jordan School District Page 97 Secondary Mathematics 2

Answer:

a. h x f x g x

22 1 3 4h x x x x Replace f x with 2 1x and g x

with 2 3 4x x .

22 1 3 4h x x x x Remove the parentheses because we

can add in any order.

2 5 3h x x x Combine the like terms. (2x + 3x),

(1 + – 4)

The domain is , . The domain for both f x and g x

is , . h x a quadratic function

just like g x so it has the same

domain.

b. h x g x f x

2 3 4 2 1h x x x x Replace g x with 2 3 4x x and

f x with 2 1x .

2 3 4 2 1h x x x x Distribute the negative throughout the

second term and remove the

parentheses.

2 5h x x x Combine the like terms.

The domain is , . The domain for both f x and g x

is , . h x a quadratic function,

just like g x , so it has the same

domain.

c. 2h x f x g x

22 2 1 3 4h x x x x Replace f x with 2 1x and g x

with 2 3 4x x .

24 2 3 4h x x x x Distribute the two through the first

term and distribute the negative

through the second term.

2 6h x x x Combine like terms.

The domain is , . The domain for both f x and g x

is , . h x a quadratic function

just like g x so it has the same

domain.

Jordan School District Page 98 Secondary Mathematics 2

Multiplying Functions

Example:

Let 2 1f x x and 2 3 4g x x x . Perform the indicated operation and state

the domain of the new function.

a. h x f x g x b. h x g x g x C. h x f x f x

Answer:

a. h x f x g x

22 1 3 4h x x x x Replace f x with 2 1x and g x

with 2 3 4x x

3 22 7 5 4h x x x x Multiply using your method of choice.

(See Unit 1 Cluster 4 lesson)

The domain is , . The domain for both f x and g x

is , . h x a polynomial

function just like g x so it has the

same domain.

b. h x g x g x

2 23 4 3 4h x x x x x Replace g x with 2 3 4x x

4 3 26 24 16h x x x x x Multiply using your method of

choice. (See Unit 1 Cluster 4 lesson)

The domain is , . The domain for g x is , .

h x a polynomial function just like

g x so it has the same domain.

c. h x f x f x

2 1 2 1h x x x Replace f x with 2 1x .

24 4 1h x x x Multiply using your method of choice.

(See Unit 1 Cluster 4 lesson)

The domain is , . The domain for f x is , .

h x a quadratic function so it has the

same domain.

Jordan School District Page 99 Secondary Mathematics 2

Dividing Functions

VOCABULARY

A rational function is a function of the form

p xr x

q x where p x and q x are

polynomials and 0q x . The domain of a rational function includes all real numbers

except for those that would make 0q x .

A rational expression is in simplified form if the numerator and the denominator have no

common factors other than 1 or -1.

Example:

Let 2 1f x x and 2 3 4g x x x . Perform the indicated operation and state

the domain of the new function.

a.

f xh x

g x b.

g xh x

f x C.

2 f xh x

f x

Answer:

a.

f xh x

g x

2

2 1

3 4

xh x

x x

Replace f x with 2 1x and g x

with 2 3 4x x

2 1

( 1)( 4)

xh x

x x

Factor the numerator and the

denominator to see if the function can

be simplified. (See Unit 2 Cluster 2

(F.IF.8) for help with factoring)

The domain is

, 4 4,1 1, .

The new function h x is a rational

function. The domain cannot include

any numbers for which the denominator

is zero. The denominator is zero when

4 and 1x x .

b.

g xh x

f x

2 3 4

2 1

x xh x

x

Replace f x with 2 1x and g x

with 2 3 4x x

( 1)( 4)

2 1

x xh x

x

Factor the numerator and the

denominator to see if the function can

be simplified. (See Unit 2 Cluster 2

“and”

Jordan School District Page 100 Secondary Mathematics 2

(F.IF.8) for help with factoring)

The domain is

1 1, ,

2 2

.

The new function h x is a rational

function. The domain cannot include

any numbers for which the denominator

is zero. The denominator is zero when

1

2x .

c.

2 f xh x

f x

2 2 1

2 1

xh x

x

Replace f x with 2 1x .

2(2 1)

2 1

xh x

x

Factor the numerator and the

denominator to see if the function can

be simplified. (See Unit 2 Cluster 2

(F.IF.8) for help with factoring)

2h x Divide out the factors and simplify the

expression.

The domain is

1 1, ,

2 2

.

Although the simplified form of h x

is not a rational function, it started out

as a rational function and the same

restrictions apply on the simplified

form. The denominator is zero when

1

2x .

Practice Exercises E

If 4 3f x x , 3 2g x x and 212 6h x x x , find the following. State the

domain of the new function.

1. f x h x

4. 3 5g x f x

7. g x h x

10.

f x

h x

2. 2f x g x

5. g x h x

8. f x h x

11.

g x

h x

3. 3h x g x

6. 4 2h x g x

9. h x h x

12.

f x

g x

Jordan School District Page 101 Secondary Mathematics 2

Evaluating Combined Functions

Example:

Let 5f x x and 22 8 5g x x x . Evaluate each expression.

a. 2 1f g b. 3 0f g c.

1

1

g

f

Answer:

a.

2 1f g

This expression tells you to find the value of f

at x = 2 and the value of g at x = 1 and add the

results.

2 2 5

2 7

f

f

Find the value of f at x = 2.

21 2(1) 8(1) 5

1 2 1 8 5

1 2 8 5

1 15

g

g

g

g

Find the value of g at x = 1.

7 15 22

2 1 22f g

Add the results.

b.

3 0f g

This expression tells you to find the value of f

at 3x and the value of g at x = 0 and

multiply the results.

3 3 5

3 2

f

f

Find the value of f at 3x .

20 2 0 8 0 5

0 2 0 0 5

0 0 0 5

0 5

g

g

g

g

Find the value of g at x = 0.

2 5 10

3 0 10f g

Multiply the results.

Jordan School District Page 102 Secondary Mathematics 2

c.

1

1

g

f

This expression tells you to find the value of g

at 1x and the value of f at 1x and

divide the results.

21 2 1 8 1 5

1 2 1 8 5

1 2 8 5

1 1

g

g

g

g

Find the value of g at 1x .

1 1 5

1 4

f

f

Find the value of f at 1x .

1

4

1 1

1 4

g

f

or -0.25

Divide the results.

Practice Exercises F

If 3 1f x x and 23 5 2g x x x , find the value of each expression.

1. 25 f

2. 1 3g f

3. 3

3

f

f

4. 512 gf

5. 2 4f g

6. 4

1

f

g

7. 2 4f g

8. 1 3 1f g

9.

0

2 0

g

f

Jordan School District Page 103 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises G

1. A company estimates that its cost and revenue can be modeled by the functions

20.75 100 20,000C x x x and 150 100R x x where x is the number of units

produced. The company’s profit, P, is modeled by R x C x . Find the profit equation

and determine the profit when 1,000,000 units are produced.

2. Consider the demand equation 1

30; 0 45015

p x x x where p represents the price

and x the number of units sold. Write an equation for the revenue, R, if the revenue is the

price times the number of units sold. What price should the company charge to have

maximum revenue?

3. The average Cost C of manufacturing x computers per day is obtained by dividing the cost

function by the number of computers produced that day, x. If the cost function is

3 20.5 34 1213C x x x x , find an equation for the average cost of manufacturing. What

is the average cost of producing 100 computers per day?

4. The service committee wants to organize a fund-raising dinner. The cost of renting a facility

is $300 plus $5 per chair or 5 300C x x , where x represents the number of people

attending the fund-raiser. The committee wants to charge attendees $30 each or 30R x x .

How many people need to attend the fund-raiser for the event to raise $1,000?

Jordan School District Page 104 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 2 Cluster 4 (F.BF.3 and F.BF.4): Transformations and Inverses

Cluster 4: Building New Functions from Existing Functions

2.4.1 Transformations, odd and even graphically and algebraically

2.4.2 Find inverse functions (simple) focus on linear and basic restrictions for

quadratics, introduce one-to-one and horizontal line test

VOCABULARY

There are several types of functions (linear, exponential, quadratic, absolute value, etc.). Each of

these could be considered a family. Each family has their own unique characteristics that are

shared among the members. The parent function is the basic function that is used to create

more complicated functions.

The graph of a quadratic function is in the shape of a parabola. This is generally described as

being “u” shaped.

The maximum or minimum point of a quadratic function is the vertex. When a quadratic

function is written in vertex form, 2

( )f x a x h k , then the vertex, ( , )h k , is highlighted.

The axis of symmetry is the vertical line that divides the graph in half, with each half being a

reflection of the other. The equation for the axis of symmetry is x h .

Quadratic parent function 2f x x

x 2f x x

-3 2( 3) 9

-2 2( 2) 4

-1 2( 1) 1

0 2(0) 0

1 2(1) 1

2 2(2) 4

3 2(3) 9

The axis of symmetry is the line 0x . The vertex is the point (0, 0). The domain is the set of

all real numbers , . The range is the set of positive real numbers including zero 0, .

Jordan School District Page 105 Secondary Mathematics 2

Vertical Shift: 2 2f x x

x 2 2f x x

-3 2( 3) 2 7

-2 2( 2) 2 2

-1 2( 1) 2 1

0 2(0) 2 2

1 2(1) 2 1

2 2(2) 2 2

3 2(3) 2 7

Axis of symmetry: 0x

Vertex: (0, -2)

Domain: ,

Range: 2,

Effect on the graph: The parabola has been shifted down 2 units.

Vertical Shift: 2 1f x x

x 2 1f x x

-3 2( 3) 1 10

-2 2( 2) 1 5

-1 2( 1) 1 2

0 2(0) 1 1

1 2(1) 1 2

2 2(2) 1 5

3 2(3) 1 10

Axis of symmetry: 0x

Vertex: (0, 1)

Domain: ,

Range: 1,

Effect on the graph: The parabola has been shifted up 1 unit.

Horizontal Shift: 2

2f x x

x 2

2f x x

-1 2( 1 2) 9

0 2(0 2) 4

1 2(1 2) 1

2 2(2 2) 0

3 2(3 2) 1

4 2(4 2) 4

5 2(5 2) 9

Axis of symmetry: 2x

Vertex: (2, 0)

Domain: ,

Range: 0,

Effect on the graph: the parabola has been shifted 2 units to the right.

Jordan School District Page 106 Secondary Mathematics 2

Horizontal Shift: 2

3f x x

x 2

3f x x

-6 2( 6 3) 9

-5 2( 5 3) 4

-4 2( 4 3) 1

-3 2( 3 3) 0

-2 2( 2 3) 1

-1 2( 1 3) 4

0 2(0 3) 9

Axis of symmetry: 3x

Vertex: (-3, 0)

Domain: ,

Range: 0,

Effect on the graph: the parabola has been shifted three units to the left.

Reflection: 2f x x

x 2f x x

-3 2( 3) 9

-2 2( 2) 4

-1 2( 1) 1

0 2(0) 0

1 2(1) 1

2 2(2) 4

3 2(3) 9

Axis of symmetry: 0x

Vertex: (0, 0)

Domain: ,

Range: ,0

Effect on the graph: the parabola has been reflected over the x-axis.

Vertical Stretch: 22f x x

x 22f x x

-3 22( 3) 18

-2 22( 2) 8

-1 22( 1) 2

0 22(0) 0

1 22(1) 2

2 22(2) 4

3 22(3) 18

Axis of symmetry: 0x

Vertex: (0, 0)

Domain: ,

Range: 0,

Effect on the graph: the y-coordinates of the parabola have been multiplied by 2.

Jordan School District Page 107 Secondary Mathematics 2

Vertical Shrink: 212

f x x

x 212

f x x

-3 2 91

2 2( 3)

-2 21

2( 2) 2

-1 21 1

2 2( 1)

0 21

2(0) 0

1 21 1

2 2(1)

2 21

2(2) 4

3 2 91

2 2( 3)

Axis of symmetry: 0x

Vertex: (0, 0)

Domain: ,

Range: 0,

Effect on the graph: the y-coordinates of the parabola have been divided 2.

2( )f x a x h k

Example:

Describe the transformations performed on 2f x x to make it 2( 1) 5f x x .

Then graph the function and identify the axis of symmetry, the vertex, the domain and the

range.

Transformations:

reflected over the x-axis

shifted one unit to the right

shifted up three units

Axis of symmetry: 1x

Vertex: (1, 5)

Domain: ,

Range: ,5

Vertical Stretch

or Reflection

Horizontal Shift

Vertical Shift

Jordan School District Page 108 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Describe the transformations performed on 2f x x to make it 23( 2) 4

2f x x .

Then graph the function and identify the axis of symmetry, the vertex, the domain and the

range.

Transformations:

y-coordinates multiplied by

3/2

shifted two units to the left

shifted down four units

Axis of symmetry: 2x

Vertex: (-2, -4)

Domain: ,

Range: 4,

Practice Exercises A

Describe the transformations performed on 2f x x to make it the following:

1. 2 6f x x 2. 2

5 7f x x 3. 2

3 4f x x

Graph each function and identify the axis of symmetry, the vertex, the domain and the range.

4. 2

2 6f x x

7. 2

5 6 4f x x

5. 2

2 1 3f x x

8. 23 4f x x

6. 212

2f x x

9. 23

23f x x

VOCABULARY

The absolute value function is actually a piecewise-defined function consisting of two linear

equations.

, if 0

, if 0

x xf x x

x x

Absolute value is often defined as the distance from zero. Therefore, the output is positive.

The point where the two linear equations meet is called the vertex. It is also the minimum or

maximum of the function. The vertex, ,h k , can easily be identified when the absolute value

function is represented in the form f x a x h k .

Jordan School District Page 109 Secondary Mathematics 2

Absolute Value parent function f x x

x f x x

-3 | 3 | 3

-2 | 2 | 2

-1 | 1| 1

0 | 0 | 0

1 |1| 1

2 | 2 | 2

3 | 3 | 3

The vertex is the point (0, 0). The domain is the set of all real numbers , . The range is

the set of positive real numbers including zero 0, .

Vertical Shift: 4f x x

x 4f x x

-3 | 3 | 4 1

-2 | 2 | 4 2

-1 | 1| 4 3

0 | 0 | 4 4

1 |1| 4 3

2 | 2 | 4 2

3 | 3 | 4 1

Vertex: (0, -4)

Domain: ,

Range: 4,

Effect on the graph: The function has been shifted down 4 units.

Jordan School District Page 110 Secondary Mathematics 2

Horizontal Shift: 1f x x

x 1f x x

-2 | 2 1| 3

-1 | 1 1| 2

0 | 0 1| 1

1 |1 1| 0

2 | 2 1| 1

3 | 3 1| 2

4 | 4 1| 3

Vertex: (1, 0)

Domain: ,

Range: 0,

Effect on the graph: The function has been shifted right 1 unit.

Reflection: f x x

x f x x

-3 | 3 | 3

-2 | 2 | 2

-1 | 1| 1

0 | 0 | 0

1 |1| 1

2 | 2 | 2

3 | 3 | 3

Vertex: (0, 0)

Domain: ,

Range: ,0

Effect on the graph: The function has been reflected over the x-axis.

Vertical Stretch: 3f x x

x 3f x x

-3 3| 3 | 9

-2 3| 2 | 6

-1 3| 1| 3

0 3| 0 | 0

1 3|1| 3

2 3| 2 | 6

3 3| 3 | 9

Vertex: (0, 0)

Domain: ,

Range: 0,

Effect on the graph: The y-coordinates of the function have been multiplied by 3.

Jordan School District Page 111 Secondary Mathematics 2

f x a x h k

Example:

Describe the transformations performed on f x x to make it 2 3 5f x x .

Then graph the function and identify the axis of symmetry, the vertex, the domain and the

range.

Transformations:

reflected over the x-axis

y-coordinates multiplied

by 2

shifted three units to the

right

shifted up five units

Vertex: (3, 5)

Domain: ,

Range: ,5

Practice Exercises B

Describe the transformations performed on f x x to make it the following:

1. 2 5f x x 2. 3 4f x x 3. 3 2 5f x x

Graph each function and identify the vertex, the domain and the range.

4. 6f x x

7. 2 5f x x

5. 2 4f x x

8. 3 1f x x

6. 12

1f x x

9. 32

4f x x

Vertical Stretch

or Reflection

Horizontal Shift

Vertical Shift

Jordan School District Page 112 Secondary Mathematics 2

Vocabulary

The words even and odd describe the symmetry that exists for the graph of a function.

A function is considered to be even if, for every number x in its domain, the number –x is also in the

domain and f x f x . Even functions have y-axis symmetry.

A function is considered to be odd if, for every number x in its domain, the number –x is also in the

domain and f x f x . Odd functions have origin symmetry.

Even Function

The function graphed at the left is even because (2, 1) is a

point on the graph and (-2, 1) is also a point on the graph.

Notice that -2 is the opposite of 2, but both inputs give the

same output. Therefore, f x f x , i.e. opposite inputs

generate the same output.

Odd Function

The function graphed at the left is odd because (2, 2) is a point

on the graph and (-2, -2) is also a point on the graph. Notice

that the input -2 is the opposite of 2, and gives the opposite

output from 2. Therefore, f x f x , i.e. opposite

inputs generate outputs that are opposites of each other.

Neither Even nor Odd

The function graphed at the left is neither even nor odd. It is

not even because the point (4, 2) is on the graph, but (-4, 2) is

not. Similarly, it is not odd because the point (-4, -2) is not a

point on the graph.

Jordan School District Page 113 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises C

Determine if the following graphs represent functions that are even, odd or neither.

1. 2. 3.

4. 5. 6.

Determining Even and Odd Algebraically

It is possible to graph functions and visually determine whether the function is even or odd, but

there is also an algebraic test that can be applied. It was previously stated that if a function is

even, then evaluating the function at x and –x should produce the same output or f x f x .

If a function is odd, then evaluating the function at x and –x should produce outputs that are

opposite or f x f x .

Example:

Is the function 3f x x an even function, an odd function, or neither?

Original function. 3f x x

Substitute –x in for each x in the function. 3f x x

Simplify. 3f x x

Compare the output to the original function. 3 3x x

If they are the same, then the function is even.

If they are opposite, then the function is odd.

If they are anything else, then they are neither.

f x f x

f x f x

Conclusion: 3f x x is an odd function.

Jordan School District Page 114 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Is the function 2 4 4g x x x an even function, an odd function or neither?

Original function. 2 4 4g x x x

Substitute –x in for each x in the function. 2

4 4g x x x

Simplify. 2 4 4g x x x

Compare the output to the original function. 2 24 4 4 4x x x x

If they are the same, then the function is even.

If they are opposite, then the function is odd.

If they are anything else, then they are neither.

g x g x

g x g x

Conclusion: 2 4 4g x x x is neither an even nor an odd function.

Example:

Is the function 2 4h x x an even function, an odd function, or neither?

Original function. 2 4h x x

Substitute –x in for each x in the function. 2 4h x x

Simplify. 2 4h x x

Compare the output to the original function. 2 4 2 4x x

If they are the same, then the function is even.

If they are opposite, then the function is odd.

If they are anything else, then they are neither.

h x h x

h x h x

Conclusion: 2 4h x x is an even function.

Practice Exercises D

Determine algebraically if the function is even, odd, or neither.

1. 3 1f x x 2. 1

3f x x 3. 23f x x

4. 4 5f x x 5. 4f x x 6. 25

14

f x x

Jordan School District Page 115 Secondary Mathematics 2

VOCABULARY

The graph of an inverse relation is the reflection of the graph of the original relation. The line

of reflection is y = x.

The original relation is the set of ordered pairs: {(-2, 1), (-1, 2), (0, 0), (1, -2), (2, -4)}. The

inverse relation is the set of ordered pairs: {(1, -2), (2, -1), (0, 0), (-2, 1), (-4, 2)}. Notice that for

the inverse relation the domain (x) and the range (y) reverse positions.

Original Relation

Domain: {-2, -1, 0, 1, 2}

Range: {-4, -2, 0, 1, 2}

The points are reflected over

the line y x . Notice that

each point is the same distance

away from the line, but on the

opposite side of the line.

Inverse Relation

Domain: {-4, -2, 0, 1, 2}

Range: {-2, -1, 0, 1, 2}

Practice Exercises E

Find the inverse relation.

1. {(1, -1), (2, -2), (3, -3), (4, -4), (5, -5)}

2. {(-4, 2), (-2, 1), (0, 0), (2, 1), (4, 2)}

3. {(-10, 6), (3, -9), (-1, 4), (-7, 1), (6, 8)}

4. {(7, 6), (2, 9), (-3, -2), (-7, 1), (8, 10)}

VOCABULARY

If no vertical line intersects the graph of a function f more than once, then f is a function. This is

called the vertical line test.

If no horizontal line intersects the graph of a function f more than once, then the inverse of f is

itself a function. This is called the horizontal line test.

The inverse of a function is formed when the independent variable is exchanged with the

dependent variable in a given relation. (Switch the x and y with each other.) A function takes a

starting value, performs some operation on this value, and creates an output answer. The inverse

of a function takes the output answer, performs some operation on it, and arrives back at the

original function's starting value. Inverses are indicated by the notation 1f .

Jordan School District Page 116 Secondary Mathematics 2

This example is not one-to-one. It is a function

because the vertical line intersects the graph

only once. However, the horizontal line

intersects the graph twice. There is an inverse

to this example, but the inverse will not be a

function.

This example is one-to-one. It is a function

because the vertical and horizontal lines

intersect the graph only once. The inverse will

be a function.

Example:

Find the inverse of 3 1f x x .

Original function 3 1f x x

Replace ( )f x with y. 3 1y x

Replace x with y and y with x. 3 1x y

Isolate y. 1 3

1

3

1 1

3 3

x y

xy

x y

The inverse of 3 1f x x is 1 1 1

3 3f x x .

Example:

Find the inverse of 1

24

f x x .

Original function

12

4f x x

Replace ( )f x with y. 12

4y x

Jordan School District Page 117 Secondary Mathematics 2

Replace x with y and y with x. 12

4x y

Isolate y.

12

4

4 2

4 8

x y

x y

x y

The inverse of 1

24

f x x is 1 4 8f x x .

Example:

Find the inverse of the function 21

4f x x ; Domain ,0 and Range 0,

Original function 21

, 04

f x x x

Replace ( )f x with y. 21

4y x

Replace x with y and y with x. 21

4x y

Isolate y.

Simplify the radical

(Unit 1 Cluster1:N.RN.2)

Determine whether to use the positive or

negative answer by referring back to the

restricted domain. The domain of the

original function is restricted to the

negative real numbers including zero,

therefore, the range of the inverse function

must also be the same. This leads us to

choose the negative square root.

24

4

2

x y

x y

x y

12 ( )x f x

Domain 0, and Range ,0

Notice the domain and range have

switched from the original function’s

domain and range.

Example:

Find the inverse of the function 2

3 1 5f x x ; Domain 0, and Range 5,

Original function 2

3 1 5, 0f x x x

Replace ( )f x with y. 2

3 1 5y x

Jordan School District Page 118 Secondary Mathematics 2

Replace x with y and y with x. 2

3 1 5x y

Isolate y.

Simplify the radical

(Unit 1 Cluster1:N.RN.2)

Determine whether to use the positive or

negative answer by referring back to the

restricted domain. The domain of the

original function is restricted to the

positive real numbers including zero,

therefore, the range of the inverse function

must also be the same. This leads us to

choose the positive square root.

2

2

5 3 1

51

3

51

3

51

3

x y

xy

xy

xy

151 ( )

3

xf x

Domain 5, and Range 0,

Notice the domain and range have

switched from the original function’s

domain and range.

Practice Exercises F

Find the inverse of the following. State the domain and range of the inverse. For problems 7 – 9

restrict the domain before finding the inverse.

1. ( ) 3 2f x x 2. ( ) 4 7f x x 3. ( ) 6 5f x x

4. 4

( ) 15

f x x

5. 2

( ) 43

f x x 6. 1

( ) 32

f x x

7. 2( ) 3 5f x x 8.

2( ) 2f x x 9.

2( ) 7 9f x x

Jordan School District Page 119 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 3

Expressions and

Equations

Jordan School District Page 120 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 3 Cluster 1 (A.SSE.2):

Interpret the Structure of Expressions

Cluster 1: Interpret the structure of expressions

3.1.2 Recognize functions that are quadratic in nature such as

4 2 2 26 3 2x x x x

VOCABULARY

A quadratic pattern can be found in other types of expressions and equations. If this is the case,

we say these expressions, equations, or functions are quadratic in nature. Recall the standard

form of a quadratic expression is 2ax bx c , where a, b, and c are real numbers and 0a .

The following are examples of expressions that are quadratic in nature:

Expression: Notice: Rewritten:

6 33 5 12x x 2

3 6x x 2

3 33 5 12x x

6 3 2 42 5 12x x y y 2

3 6x x and 2

2 4y y 2 2

3 3 2 22 5 12x x y y

1/2 1/49 12 4x x 2

1/4 1/2x x 2

1/4 1/49 12 4x x

4 6 9x x 2

x x 2

4 6 9x x

4 2

1 2 1 15x x 2

2 41 1x x

22 2

1 2 1 15x x

1016 25x 2

5 104 16x x and 2

5 25 2 254 5x

4 6x y 2

2 4x x and 2

3 6y y 2 2

2 3x y

Practice exercise A

Determine if the expression is quadratic in nature.

1. 4 2 12x x

2. 2

2 2 3 2 3 1x x

3. 3 4 4x x

4. 1/2 1/4 72x x

5. 2/3 1/39 12 4x x

6. 2

4 2 1x

Jordan School District Page 121 Secondary Mathematics 2

FACTORING REVIEW

1. COMMON TERM

a) What number will go into all of the

numbers evenly

b) Common variable – use the common

variable with the lowest power

EXAMPLE

3 23 12 6x x x

23 4 2x x x

2. DIFFERENCE OF TWO SQUARES

Looks like:

bababa 22

a) Terms must be perfect squares

b) Must be subtraction

c) Powers must be even

EXAMPLE

24 25x

2 5 2 5x x

3. PERFECT SQUARE TRINOMIALS

Looks like:

22 22a ab b a b or a b a b

or

22 22a ab b a b or a b a b

a) First and last term must be perfect

squares

b) Middle term is equal to 2ab

c) Sign in the parenthesis is the same as the

first

sign

EXAMPLE

29 30 25x x

Does the middle term equal 2ab ?

3 5 2 3 5 30a x and b so x x

Yes it does!

Therefore 29 30 25x x factors to:

2

3 5x or 3 5 3 5x x

4. GROUPING

a) Group terms that have something in

common

b) Factor out common term in each

parenthesis

c) Write down what is in the parenthesis,

they

should be identical

d) Then add the “left-overs”

EXAMPLE

15 21 10 14xy x y

15 21 10 14xy x y

3 5 7 2 5 7x y y

5 7y

5 7 3 2y x

5. FACTOR TRINOMIALS BY

GROUPING

2ax bx c

a) Multiply a and c

b) Find all the factors of the answer

EXAMPLE

156 2 xx

(6)(15) = 90

1 and 90

2 and 45

3 and 30

5 and 18

Jordan School District Page 122 Secondary Mathematics 2

c) Choose the combination that will either

give the

sum or difference needed to result in b. In

this

case the difference

d) Rewrite the equation using the combination

in

place of the middle term

e) Now group in order to factor

f) Factor out the common term in each

parenthesis

g) Write down what is in the parenthesis, they

should be identical

h) Add the “left-overs” to complete the answer

6 and 15

9 and 10

9 and -10

26 9 10 15x x x

26 9 10 15x x x

Notice that when factoring out a -1 it changes

the sign on c

3 2 3 5 2 3x x x

32 x

5332 xx

The same strategies used to factor quadratic expressions can be used to factor anything that is

quadratic in nature. (For more information on factoring, see the factoring lesson in Unit 2.)

Expression: Rewritten: Factor:

6 33 5 12x x 2

3 33 5 12x x 3 33 4 3x x

6 3 2 42 5 12x x y y 2 2

3 3 2 22 5 12x x y y 3 2 3 22 3 4x y x y

1/2 1/49 12 4x x 2

1/4 1/49 12 4x x

1/4 1/43 2 3 2x x

or

2

1/43 2x

4 12 9x x 2

4 12 9x x

2 3 2 3x x

or

2

2 3x

1016 25x 2 254 5x 5 54 5 4 5x x

4 6x y 2 2

2 3x y 2 3 2 3x y x y

Jordan School District Page 123 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice set B

Factor each quadratic in nature expression.

1. 2 4144 49x y

4. 681 4x

7. 10 5 29 6x x y y

2. 6 38 2 15x x

5. 2 1x x

8. 2/5 1/512 17 6x x

3. 8 6100 121x y

6. 4 24 20 25x x

9. 2/3 1/33 10 8x x

Sometimes rewriting an expression makes it easier to recognize the quadratic pattern.

Example:

4 2

1 2 1 15x x

1u x You can use a new variable to replace 1x .

4 22 15u u

Now replace every 1x in the expression

with u. Notice how this is quadratic in nature.

2 25 3u u We can use quadratic factoring techniques to

factor this expression

2 2

1 5 1 3x x

You must remember to replace the u with

1x .

Example:

1/3 1/63 8 4x x

1/6u x You can use a new variable to replace 1/6x .

23 8 4u u Now replace every 1/6x in the expression with

u. Notice how this is quadratic in nature.

3 2 2u u We can use quadratic factoring techniques to

factor this expression

1/6 1/63 2 2x x You must remember to replace the u with 1/6x .

Practice Exercises C

Identify the “u” in each expression, then factor using “u” substitution. Write the factored form in

terms of x.

1. 4 2

2 2 6x x 2. 2

4 3 15 3 9y y 3. 8 4

5 2 5 21 2 5 20x x

4. 6 3

3 33 3 3 2x x 5. 1/2 1/47 10x x 6.

22 11 2 12x x

7. 4 25x 8.

21 1

2x x

9.

424 1 9x

Jordan School District Page 124 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 1 Cluster 3 (N.CN.1 and N.CN.2)

Performing Arithmetic Operations With Complex Numbers

Cluster 3: Performing arithmetic operations with complex numbers

1.3.1 2 1i , complex number form a + bi

1.3.2 Add, subtract, and multiply with complex numbers

VOCABULARY

The imaginary unit, i , is defined to be 1i . Using this definition, it would follow that2 1i because

2 1 1 1i i i .

The number system can be extended to include the set of complex numbers. A complex number

written in standard form is a number a + bi, where a and b are real numbers. If a = 0, then the

number is called imaginary. If b = 0 then the number is called real.

Simplifying Radicals with i

Extending the number system to include the set of complex numbers allows us to take the square

root of negative numbers.

Example:

Simplify 9

9

1 9

1 9

Rewrite the expression using the properties

of radicals.

3

3

i

i

Remember that 1i .

Example:

Simplify 24

24

1 4 6

1 4 6

Rewrite the expression using the properties

of radicals.

2 6

2 6

i

i

Remember that 1i .

Jordan School District Page 125 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises A

Simplify each radical

1. 25 2. 36 3. 144

4. 98 5. 52 6. 22

Performing Arithmetic Operations with Complex Numbers

You can add, subtract, and multiply complex numbers. Similar to the set of real numbers,

addition and multiplication of complex numbers is associative and commutative.

Adding and Subtracting Complex Numbers

Example:

Add 3 2 5 4i i

3 2 5 4i i

3 2 5 4

3 5 2 4

i i

i i

Remove the parentheses.

Group like terms together.

8 2i

Combine like terms.

Example:

Subtract 7 5 2 6i i

7 5 2 6i i

7 5 2 6

7 2 5 6

i i

i i

Distribute the negative and remove the

parentheses.

Group like terms together.

9 11i

Combine like terms.

Jordan School District Page 126 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Simplify 8 4 5 2 5i i

8 4 5 2 5i i

8 4 5 2 5

8 4 2 5 5

i i

i i

Distribute the negative and remove the

parentheses.

Group like terms together.

6 10i

Combine like terms.

Multiplying Complex Numbers

Example:

Multiply 3 7 6i

3 7 6i

21 18i

Distribute the negative three to each term

in the parentheses.

Example:

Multiply 4 2 9i i

4 2 9i i

28 36i i

Distribute the 4i to each term in the

parentheses.

8 36 1

8 36

i

i

By definition 2 1i so substitute -1 in for

2i .

36 8i

Write the complex number in standard

form.

Jordan School District Page 127 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Multiply 2 9 3 10i i

Distributive (FOIL) Method

2 9 3 10i i

2

2

2

2 3 10 9 3 10

6 20 27 90

*combine like terms

6 7 90

*remember that 1

6 7 90 1

6 7 90

96 7

i i i

i i i

i i

i

i

i

i

Box Method

2 9i

3 6 27i

10i 20i 290i

*combine terms on the

diagonals of the unshaded

boxes(top right to lower left)

2

2

6 7 90

*remember that 1

6 7 90 1

6 7 90

96 7

i i

i

i

i

i

Vertical Method

2

2

2 9

3 10

20 90

6 27

6 7 90

i

i

i i

i

i i

2*remember that 1

6 7 90 1

6 7 90

96 7

i

i

i

i

Example:

Multiply 5 2 5 2i i

Distributive (FOIL) Method

5 2 5 2i i

2

2

2

5 5 2 2 5 2

25 10 10 4

*combine like terms

25 4

*remember that 1

25 4 1

25 4

29

i i i

i i i

i

i

Box Method

5 2i

5 25 10i

2i 10i 24i

*combine terms on the

diagonals of the unshaded

boxes(top right to lower left)

2

2

25 4

*remember that 1

25 4 1

25 4

29

i

i

Vertical Method

2

2

5 2

5 2

10 4

25 10

25 0 4

i

i

i i

i

i i

2*remember that 1

25 4 1

25 4

29

i

Jordan School District Page 128 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

Simplify each expression.

1. 10 3 6i i 2. 9 6 4 4i i 3. 4 7 5 10 7i i i

4. 7 4 8 10 2i i 5. 5 8 2i 6. 11 2 9i i

7. 9 15i i 8. 6 7 4 12i i 9. 2 7 5i i

10 1 4 12 11i i 11. 10 4 7 5i i 12. 10 2 10 2i i

Jordan School District Page 129 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 1 Cluster 3 Honors (N.CN.3)

H2.1 Find the conjugate of a complex number; use conjugates to find quotients of

complex numbers.

VOCABULARY

The conjugate of a complex number is a number in the standard complex form a bi , where the

imaginary part bi has the opposite sign of the original, for example a bi has the opposite sign

of a bi . Conjugate pairs are any pair of complex numbers that are conjugates of each other

such as 3 4 and 3 4i i .

The product of conjugate pairs is a positive real number.

2 2 2

2 2

2 2

1

a bi a bi

a abi abi b i

a b

a b

2

3 4 3 4

9 12 12 16

9 16

25

i i

i i i

This property will be used to divide complex numbers.

Example:

Find the conjugate of the following complex numbers.

a. 4i b. 2 5i c. 3 i d. 7 2i

a.

The opposite of 4i is 4i . The

conjugate of 4i is 4i .

b.

The opposite of 5i is 5i . The

conjugate of 2 5i is 2 5i .

c.

The opposite of i is i . The conjugate

of 3 i is 3 i .

d.

The opposite of 2i is 2i . The

conjugate of 7 2i is 7 2i .

Practice Exercises A

Find the conjugate of the following complex numbers.

1. 6 6i 2. 8 9i 3. 2 3i 4. 1 7i

Jordan School District Page 130 Secondary Mathematics 2

Divide by an imaginary number bi

If there is an imaginary number in the denominator of a fraction, then the complex number is not

in standard complex form. In order to write it in standard complex form, you must multiply the

numerator and the denominator by the conjugate of the denominator. This process removes the

imaginary unit from the denominator and replaces it with a real number (the product of conjugate

pairs is a positive real number) without changing the value of the complex number. Once this is

done, you can write the number in standard complex form by simplifying the fraction.

Example:

Write in standard complex form: 2

8i

2

2 8

8 8

16

64

i

i i

i

i

The conjugate of 8i is 8i . Multiply the

numerator and the denominator by the

conjugate.

16

64 1

16

64

i

i

Remember 2 1i .

16 1

16 4 4 4

i ii

Simplify.

Example:

Write in standard complex form: 6 8

9

i

i

2

2

6 8 9

9 9

54 72

81

i i

i i

i i

i

The conjugate of 9i is 9i . Multiply the

numerator and the denominator by the

conjugate.

54 72 1

81 1

i

Remember 2 1i .

72 54

81

i

Rewrite numerator in standard complex

form a bi .

72 54

81 81

8 2

9 3

i

i

Rewrite whole solution in complex form

a bi , reducing as needed.

Jordan School District Page 131 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

Write in standard complex form.

1. 3

5i 2.

6

4i 3.

5

5i

4. 3 10

6

i

i

5.

10 10

5

i

i

6.

2 3

4

i

i

Dividing Complex Numbers in Standard Form a bi

To divide complex numbers, find the complex conjugate of the denominator, multiply the

numerator and denominator by that conjugate, and simplify.

Example:

Divide 10

2 i

10

2 i

10 2

2 2

i

i i

10 2

2 2

i

i i

Multiply the numerator and denominator

by the conjugate of 2+i, which is 2 – i

2

20 10

4 2 2

i

i i i

Distribute

2

20 10

4

i

i

Simplify

20 10

4 1

i

20 10

5

i

Note that 2 1i

20 104 2

5 5i i

Simplify and write in standard complex

form.

Jordan School District Page 132 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Divide 22 7

4 5

i

i

22 7

4 5

i

i

22 7 4 5

4 5 4 5

i i

i i

22 7 4 5

4 5 4 5

i i

i i

Multiply by the conjugate of the

denominator.

2

2

88 110 28 35

16 20 20 25

i i i

i i i

Distribute

2

2

88 82 35

16 25

i i

i

88 82 35 1

16 25 1

i

88 82 35

16 25

i

123 82

41

i

Combine like terms.

Remember that 2 1i .

Combine like terms again.

123 82

41 41

3 2

i

i

Simplify and write in standard complex

form.

Example:

Divide 6 2

1 2

i

i

6 2

1 2

i

i

6 2 1 2

1 2 1 2

i i

i i

6 2 1 2

1 2 1 2

i i

i i

Multiply by the conjugate of the

denominator.

Jordan School District Page 133 Secondary Mathematics 2

2

2

6 12 2 4

1 2 2 4

i i i

i i i

Distribute.

2

2

6 14 4

1 4

i i

i

6 14 4 1

1 4 1

i

6 14 4

1 4

i

2 14

5

i

Combine like terms.

Remember 2 1i

Combine like terms again.

2 14

5 5i Put in standard complex form a bi .

Practice Exercises C

Divide each complex rational expression and write in standard complex form.

1. 5

2 6

i

i 2.

8

1 3

i

i 3.

10

3 i

4. 26 18

3 4

i

i

5.

10 5

6 6

i

i

6.

3 7

7 10

i

i

Jordan School District Page 134 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 3 Cluster 4 (A.REI.4) and Unit 3 Cluster 5 (N.CN.7):

Solve Equations and Inequalities in One Variable

Cluster 4: Solving equations in one variable

3.4.1a Derive the quadratic formula by completing the square.

3.4.1b Solve equations by taking the square root, completing the square, using the

quadratic formula and by factoring (recognize when the quadratic formula gives

complex solutions and write them as a bi )

3.5.1 Solve with complex numbers

VOCABULARY

The square root of a number is a value that, when multiplied by itself, gives the number. For

example if 2r a , then r is the square root of a. There are two possible values for r; one

positive and one negative. For instance, the square root of 9 could be 3 because 23 9 but it

could also be 3 because 2

3 9 .

A perfect square is a number that can be expressed as the product of two equal integers. For

example: 100 is a perfect square because 10 10 100 and 2x is a perfect square because 2.x x x

Solving Equations by Taking the Square Root

When solving a quadratic equation by taking the square root, you want to isolate the squared

term so that you can take the square root of both sides of the equation.

Example:

Solve the quadratic equation 2 4x .

2 4x In this example the squared term is 2x and it is

already isolated.

2 4x Take the square root of each side of the equation.

1/2

2

2/2

4

2

2

2 or 2

x

x

x

x x

Using the properties of rational exponents you can

simplify the left side of the equation to x.

The number 16 is a perfect square because

2 2 4 .

Jordan School District Page 135 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Solve the quadratic equation 224 16

3x .

2

2

2

24 16

3

212

3

18

x

x

x

In this example the squared term is 2x and it needs

to be isolated. Use a reverse order of operations to

isolate 2x .

2 18x Take the square root of each side of the equation.

1/2

2

2/2

9 2

9 2

3 2

3 2 or 3 2

x

x

x

x x

Using the properties of rational exponents you can

simplify the left side of the equation to x.

Using the properties of radical expressions you can

simplify the right side of the equation. (See Unit 1

Cluster 2 for help with simplifying)

Example:

Solve the quadratic equation 2

3 2 4 52x .

2

2

2

3 2 4 52

3 2 48

2 16

x

x

x

In this example the squared term is 2

2x and it

needs to be isolated. Use a reverse order of

operations to isolate 2

2x .

2

2 16x Take the square root of each side of the equation.

1/22

2/2

2 16

2 4

2 4

2 4 or 2 4

x

x

x

x x

Using the properties of rational exponents you can

simplify the left side of the equation to 2x .

The number 16 is a perfect square because

4 4 16 .

2 4 or 2 4

6 or 2

x x

x x

You still need to solve each equation for x.

Jordan School District Page 136 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises A

Solve each quadratic equation.

1. 2 25x 2. 2 8x 3. 24 36x

4. 24 5 1x 5. 29 3 33x 6. 216 9x

7. 2

2 3 4 8x 8. 2

3 3 1 2x 9. 21

31 5x

Solving Quadratic Equations by Completing the Square

Sometimes you have to rewrite a quadratic equation, using the method of completing the square,

so that it can be solved by taking the square root.

Example:

Solve 2 10 23x x .

2 10 23x x

2 2

2

2

2

10 1010 23

2 2

10 25 23 25

10 25 2

x x

x x

x x

Complete the square on the left side of the

equation.

2

5 5 2

5 2

x x

x

Factor the expression on the left side.

2

5 2x Take the square root of each side.

5 2x Simplify.

5 2 or 5 2

5 2 or 5 2

x x

x x

Solve for x.

Jordan School District Page 137 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Solve 2 4 6x x .

2 4 5x x

2 2

2

2

2

4 44 5

2 2

4 4 5 4

4 4 1

x x

x x

x x

Complete the square on the left side of the

equation.

2

2 2 1

2 1

x x

x

Factor the expression on the left side.

2

2 1x Take the square root of each side.

2x i Simplify. Remember that the 1 i

2 or 2

2 or 2

x i x i

x i x i

Solve for x.

Example:

Solve 23 5 2 0x x .

2

2

3 5 2 0

3 5 2

x x

x x

Collect the terms with variables on one

side of the equation and the constant

term on the other side.

2

2 2

2

2

2

2

53 2

3

5 5 53 2 3

3 2 3 2 3

5 25 253 2 3

3 36 36

5 25 753 2

3 36 36

5 25 493

3 36 12

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

Complete the square on the left side of

the equation.

Jordan School District Page 138 Secondary Mathematics 2

2

2

5 5 493

6 6 12

5 493

6 12

5 49

6 36

x x

x

x

Factor the expression on the left side of

the equation.

Isolate the squared term.

25 49

6 36x

Take the square root of each side.

5 7

6 6x Simplify.

5 7 5 7 or

6 6 6 6

5 7 5 7 or

6 6 6 6

12 or

3

x x

x x

x x

Solve for x.

Practice Exercises B

Solve the quadratic equations by completing the square.

1. 2 4 1x x 2. 2 12 32x x 3. 2 16 15 0x x

4. 2 8 3 0x x 5. 2 8 6x x 6. 22 4 5 0x x

VOCABULARY

The quadratic formula, 2 4

2

b b acx

a

, can be used to find the solutions of the quadratic

equation 2 0ax bx c , when 0a . The portion of the quadratic equation that is under the

radical, 2 4b ac , is called the discriminant. It can be used to determine the number and type of

solutions to the quadratic equation 2 0ax bx c .

Jordan School District Page 139 Secondary Mathematics 2

Using the Discriminant to Determine Number and Type of Solutions

If 2 4 0b ac , then there are two real solutions to the quadratic equation.

Example:

Determine the number and type of solutions for the equation 2 6 0x x .

2 6 0x x

1, 1, and 6a b c Identify a, b, and c.

2

2

4

1 4(1)( 6)

b ac

Substitute the values of a, b,

and c into the discriminant

formula.

1 4( 6)

1 ( 24)

1 24

25

Simplify using order of

operations.

25 0

Determine if the result is

greater than zero, equal to

zero, or less than zero.

The quadratic equation 2 6 0x x has two real solutions. You can see from the graph

that the function crosses the x-axis twice.

If 2 4 0b ac , then there is one real solution to the quadratic equation.

Example:

Determine the number and type of solutions for the equation 2 4 4 0x x .

2 4 4 0x x

1, 4, and 4a b c Identify a, b, and c.

2

2

4

4 4(1)(4)

b ac

Substitute the values of a, b,

and c into the discriminant

formula.

16 4(4)

16 16

0

Simplify using order of

operations.

0 0

Determine if the result is

greater than zero, equal to

zero, or less than zero.

The quadratic equation 2 4 4 0x x has one real solution. You can see from the graph

that the function touches the x-axis only once.

Jordan School District Page 140 Secondary Mathematics 2

If 2 4 0b ac , then there no real, but two imaginary solutions to the quadratic

equation.

Example:

Determine the number and type of solutions for the equation 2 1 0x .

2 1 0x

1, 0, and 1a b c Identify a, b, and c.

2

2

4

0 4(1)(1)

b ac

Substitute the values of a, b,

and c into the discriminant

formula.

0 4(1)

0 4

4

Simplify using order of

operations.

4 0

Determine if the result is

greater than zero, equal to

zero, or less than zero.

The quadratic equation 2 1 0x has no real solutions, but it has two imaginary

solutions. You can see from the graph that the function never crosses the x-axis.

Practice Exercises C

Determine the number and type of solutions that each quadratic equation has.

1.

2.

3.

4. 2 2 5 0x x 5. 24 12 9 0x x 6. 22 4 2x x

Jordan School District Page 141 Secondary Mathematics 2

Solving Quadratic Equations by Using the Quadratic Formula

Example:

Solve 23 5 4 0 x x using the quadratic formula.

23 5 4 0 x x

3, 5, and 4a b c

Make sure all the terms are on the same side

and that the equation equals 0.

Identify a, b, and c.

25 5 4(3)( 4)

2(3)

x

Substitute the values for a, b, and c into the

quadratic formula.

5 25 12 4

6

5 25 48

6

5 25 48

6

5 73

6

x

x

x

x

Use order of operations to simplify.

5 73

6x

and

5 73

6x

These are actually two different solutions.

Example:

Solve 22 3 0 x x using the quadratic formula.

22 3 0 x x

2, 1, and 3a b c

Make sure all the terms are on the same side

and that the equation equals 0.

Identify a, b, and c.

21 ( 1) 4(2)( 3)

2(2)

x

Substitute the values for a, b, and c into the

quadratic formula.

Jordan School District Page 142 Secondary Mathematics 2

1 1 8( 3)

4

1 1 ( 24)

4

1 1 24

4

1 25

4

1 5

4

x

x

x

x

x

Use order of operations to simplify.

1 5 6 3

4 4 2

x and

1 5 41

4 4

x

Simplify each answer.

Example:

Solve 225 10 1x x using the quadratic formula.

2

2

25 10 1

25 10 1 0

x x

x x

25, 10, and 1a b c

Make sure all the terms are on the same side

and that the equation equals 0.

Identify a, b, and c.

210 10 4(25)(1)

2(25)

x

Substitute the values for a, b, and c into the

quadratic formula.

10 100 100(1)

50

10 100 100

50

10 0

50

10 0

50

10

50

x

x

x

x

x

Use order of operations to simplify.

1

5x

Simplify the answer. Notice that we only got

one answer this time because the discriminant

was 0.

Jordan School District Page 143 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Solve 22 12 20x x using the quadratic formula.

2

2

2 12 20

2 12 20 0

x x

x x

2, 12, and 20a b c

Make sure all the terms are on the same side

and that the equation equals 0.

Identify a, b, and c.

212 12 4(2)(20)

2(2)x

Substitute the values for a, b, and c into the

quadratic formula.

12 144 8(20)

4

12 144 160

4

12 16

4

12 4

4

3

x

x

x

ix

x i

Use order of operations to simplify.

3 or 3x i x i

Simplify the answer. Notice that we got two

imaginary answers this time because the

discriminant was less than 0.

Practice Exercises D

Solve the quadratic equation using the quadratic formula.

1. 23 5 7 0x x 2. 24 12 9 0x x 3. 26 11 7 0x x

4. 2 8 12 0x x 5. 2 3 6x x 6. 2 2 2x x

7. 2 1 0x x 8. 22 5 4 0x x 9. 23 4 2x x

Jordan School District Page 144 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises E

Solve each of the following equations using the method of your choice.

1. 22 5 4 0x x 2. 2 10 6x x 3. 2 4 6 0x x

4. ( 3) 9x x x 5. ( 1) 2 7x x x 6. 2 10 26 0x x

7. 24 81 0x 8. 2

1 9x 9. 2

1 5 44x

10. 2 4 0x x

11. 2 4 0x 12. 2

2 3 5 23x

Jordan School District Page 145 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 3 Cluster 5 (N.CN.8, N.CN.9-Honors):

Use complex numbers in polynomial identities and equations

3.5.2 Extend polynomial identities to the complex numbers.

3.5.3 Know the Fundamental Theorem of algebra; show that it is true for quadratic

polynomials.

The Fundamental Theorem of Algebra states that every polynomial of degree n with complex

coefficients has exactly n roots in the complex numbers.

Note: Remember that every root can be written as a complex number in the form of a bi . For

instance 3 can be written as 3 0x x i . In addition, all complex numbers come in conjugate

pairs, a bi and a bi .

Example:

2( ) 3f x x x Degree: 2

Complex Roots: 2

3 2( ) 5 2 5 4f x x x x Degree: 3

Complex Roots: 3

Polynomial Identities

1. 2 2 22a b a ab b 2. a b c d ac ad bc bd

3. 2 2a b a b a b 4. 2x a b x AB x a x b

5. If 2 0ax bx c then 2 4

2

b b acx

a

Jordan School District Page 146 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Find the complex roots of 2( ) 64f x x and write in factored form.

2

2

2

0 64

64

64

8

x

x

x

i x

1. Set equal to zero to find the roots of the

function. Solve.

8 8 ( )

8 8 ( )

x i x i f x

x i x i f x

2. Recall factored form is

( )x p x q f x .

Substitute the zeros in for p and q.

Example:

Find the complex roots of 2( ) 16 65f x x x and write in factored form.

216 16 4 1 65

2 1

16 256 260

2

16 4

2

16 2

2

8

x

x

x

ix

x i

1. Use the quadratic formula to find the roots

of the function.

8 8 ( )

8 8 ( )

x i x i f x

x i x i f x

2. Recall factored form is

( )x p x q f x .

Substitute the zeros in for p and q.

Jordan School District Page 147 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Find the complex roots of 4 2( ) 10 24f x x x and write in factored form.

2 2( ) 4 6f x x x 1. Factor the quadratic in nature function.

2 2

2 2

4 0 6 0

4 6

2 6

x x

x x

x i x i

2. Set each factor equal to zero to find the

roots.

( ) ( 2 )( ( 2 )) 6 6

( ) ( 2 )( 2 ) 6 6

f x x i x i x i x i

f x x i x i x i x i

3. Recall factored form is

( )x p x q f x .

Substitute the zeros in for p and q.

Practice Exercises A

Find the complex roots. Write in factored form.

1. 2 9x

2. 2 1x x

3. 2 2 2x x

4. 2 6 10x x

5. 2 4 5x x

6. 2 2 5x x

7. 4 25 4x x

8. 4 213 36x x

9. 4 1x

Jordan School District Page 148 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 3 Cluster 3 (A.CED.1, A.CED.4)

Writing and Solving Equations and Inequalities

Cluster 3: Creating equations that describe numbers or relationships

3.3.1 Write and solve equations and inequalities in one variable (including linear,

simple exponential, and quadratic functions)

3.3.3 Solve formulas for a variable including those involving squared variables

Writing and Solving Quadratic Equations in One Variable

When solving contextual type problems it is important to:

Identify what you know.

Determine what you are trying to find.

Draw a picture to help you visualize the situation when possible. Remember to label all

parts of your drawing.

Use familiar formulas to help you write equations.

Check your answer for reasonableness and accuracy.

Make sure you answered the entire question.

Use appropriate units.

Example:

Find three consecutive integers such that the product of the first two plus the square of

the third is equal to 137.

First term: x

Second term: x + 1

Third term: x + 2

The first number is x. Since they are

consecutive numbers, the second term is

one more than the first or x + 1. The third

term is one more than the second term or

1 1 2x x .

2( 1) ( 2) 137x x x

Multiply the first two together and add the

result to the third term squared. This is

equal to 137.

2 2

2

( 1) ( 2)( 2) 137

4 4 137

2 5 4 137

x x x x

x x x x

x x

Multiply and combine like terms.

22 5 133 0x x Make sure the equation is equal to 0.

2

2

2 14 19 133 0

2 14 19 133 0

2 7 19 7 0

7 2 19 0

x x x

x x x

x x x

x x

Factor.

Jordan School District Page 149 Secondary Mathematics 2

7 0

7

x

x

2 19 0

2 19

19

2

x

x

x

Use the Zero Product Property to solve for

x.

First term: 7

Second term: 8

Third term: 9

The numbers are integers so x has to be 7.

Example:

A photo is 6 in longer than it is wide. Find the length and width if the area is 187 2in .

width

length 6

6

187 6

x

x

A x wl x x

x x

The width is the basic unit, so let it equal

x. The length is 6 inches longer than width

or 6x . A photo is rectangular so the

area is equal to the width times the length.

The area is 187 square inches.

2187 6x x Multiply the right side.

20 6 187x x Make sure the equation equals 0.

0 11 17x x Factor the expression on the right side of

the equation.

11 0

11

x

x

17 0

17

x

x

Use the Zero Product Property to solve for

x.

The width is 11 inches and the length is

17 inches.

The length of a photo cannot be negative.

Therefore, x must be 11. The length is

6 11 6 17x .

Note: Often problems will require information from more than one equation to solve. For

example, you might need the perimeter equation to help you write the area equation or vice

versa. The primary equation is the equation you solve to find the answer you are looking for.

The secondary equation is the equation you use to help set up your primary equation.

Example:

Find two numbers that add to 150 and have a maximum product. What is the maximum

product?

Secondary equation:

150x y

One number is x. The other

number is y.

The sum is 150. Write an

equation for this.

Jordan School District Page 150 Secondary Mathematics 2

150y x Use the sum equation to solve for

y.

Primary Equation:

150P x x x Write an equation for the product

in terms of x.

2150P x x x Simplify the right side of the

equation.

2

2

2

2

150

( 150 )

( 150 5625) 5625

( 75) 5625

P x x x

P x x x

P x x x

P x x

Find the maximum. Remember

the maximum is the vertex. Using

the method of your choice from

Unit 2 Lesson F.IF.8. 150

2( 1)

75

x

x

2

2

150

75 150 75 75

75 11250 5625

75 5625

P x x x

P

P

P

75

75

x

y

The two numbers are 75 and 75

The second number is 150 x or

75.

75 75 5625

The maximum product is 5625. Find the maximum product.

Example:

Jason wants to fence in a rectangular garden in his backyard. If one side of the garden is

against the house and Jason has 48 feet of fencing, what dimensions will maximize the

garden area while utilizing all of the fencing?

First draw a picture of the house

and garden. Label the sides of

your garden. The amount of fence

used is the distance around the

garden excluding the side next to

the house. This is the same as the

perimeter.

y

xx Garden

Jordan School District Page 151 Secondary Mathematics 2

2 48x y

The length of the garden is x and

the width is y.

The perimeter is 48. Write an

equation for this.

48 2y x Use the sum equation to solve for

y.

48 2

A x lw

A x x x

Write an equation for the product

in terms of x.

248 2P x x x Simplify the right side of the

equation.

2

2

2

2

2 48

2( 24 )

2( 24 144) 288

2( 12) 288

A x x x

A x x x

A x x x

A x x

Find the maximum area.

Remember the maximum is the

vertex. Using the method of your

choice from Unit 2 Lesson F.IF.8. 48

2( 2)

12

x

x

2

2

48 2

12 48 12 2 12

12 576 288

12 288

A x x x

P

P

P

12

24

x

y

The length is 12 feet and the width is 24 feet.

The second number is 48 2 12

or 24.

12 24 288

The maximum area is 288 2ft . Find the maximum area.

Practice Problems A

Solve

1. The maximum size envelope that can

be mailed with a large envelope rate is

3 inches longer than it is wide. The

area is 2180 in . Find the length and the

width.

2. A rectangular garden is 30 ft. by 40 ft.

Part of the garden is removed in order

to install a walkway of uniform width

around it. The area of the new garden

is one-half the area of the old garden.

How wide is the walkway?

3. The base of a triangular tabletop is 20

inches longer than the height. The area

is 2750 in . Find the height and the

base.

4. Find two numbers that differ by 8 and

have a minimum product.

Jordan School District Page 152 Secondary Mathematics 2

5. Alec has written an award winning

short story. His mother wants to frame

it with a uniform border. She wants the

finished product to have an area of2315 in . The writing portion occupies

an area that is 11 inches wide and 17

inches long. How wide is the border?

6. Britton wants to build a pen for his

teacup pig. He has 36 feet of fencing

and he wants to use all of it. What

should the dimensions of the pen be to

maximize the area for his pig? What is

the maximum area?

7. The product of 2 numbers is 476. One

number is 6 more than twice the first

number. Find the two numbers.

8. Find three consecutive integers such

that the square of the second number

plus the product of the first and third

numbers is a minimum.

VOCABULARY

Objects that are shot, thrown, or dropped into the air are called projectiles. Their height,

measured from the ground, can be modeled by a projectile motion equation. The object is

always affected by gravity. The gravitational constant is different depending on the units of

measurement. For example, the gravitational constant in feet is 232 ft/sec and in meters it is 29.8 m/sec . Similarly, the projectile motion equation for an object shot or thrown straight up or

down is different depending on the units of measurement.

Feet: 2

0 0( ) 16h t t v t h

Meters: 2

0 0( ) 4.9h t t v t h

( )h t represents the height at any time t. The time is measured in seconds. The initial velocity,

0v , is the speed at which the object is thrown or shot. It is measured in ft/sec or m/sec. The

initial height, 0h , is the height that the object is shot or thrown from. It is measured in feet or

meters.

Example:

The Willis Tower (formerly Sears Tower) in Chicago, Illinois is the tallest building in the

United States. It is 108 stories or about 1,451 feet high. (Assume that each floor is 13

feet high.)

a. A window washer is 28 floors from the top and he drops a piece of equipment,

how long will it take for the equipment to reach the ground?

b. How far from the ground is the piece of equipment after 5 seconds?

c. When does the equipment pass the 16th

floor?

Jordan School District Page 153 Secondary Mathematics 2

a. 2

0 0( ) 16h t t v t h The building is measured in feet so use

the projectile motion equation for feet.

2

2

2

( ) 16 (0) 108 28 13

( ) 16 80 13

( ) 16 1040

h t t t

h t t

h t t

The equipment was dropped making the

initial velocity 0 ft./sec. The building has

108 floors, but he stopped 28 short of the

top floor. Each floor is 13 feet high;

multiply the number of floors by the

height of each floor to get the initial

height.

20 16 1040t

We want to know when the equipment

hits the ground making the final height

zero. 2

2

2

0 16 1040

16 1040

65

65

t

t

t

t

Solve for t.

65 sec. or 8.062 sec.t

Negative time means you are going back

in time. Therefore, time is positive.

b.

2

2

16 1040

5 16 5 1040

5 400 1040

5 640

h t t

h

h

h

We want to know when the height of the

equipment at 5 seconds.

The equipment is 640 feet from the ground after 5 seconds.

c.

216 1040h t t

We want to know when the equipment

passes the 16th

floor. The equation is the

same equation written in part a. 2

2

16 13 16 1040

208 16 1040

t

t

The 16th

floor is 208 feet above the

ground.

2

2

2

2

0 16 832

832 16

52

52

2 13

t

t

t

t

t

Solve for t.

2 13 sec. or 7.211 sec.t

Negative time means you are going back

in time. Therefore, time is positive.

Jordan School District Page 154 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

The Salt Lake Bees are planning to have a fireworks display after their game with the

Tacoma Rainiers. Their launch platform is 5 feet off the ground and the fireworks will be

launched with an initial of 32 feet per second. How long will it take each firework to

reach their maximum height?

a. 2

0 0( ) 16h t t v t h

The height of the fireworks is measured in

feet so use the projectile motion equation

for feet. 2

2

( ) 16 (32) 5

( ) 16 32 5

h t t t

h t t t

The fireworks were launched with an

initial velocity 32 ft./sec. The launch

platform is 5 feet off the ground.

2

2

2

2

( ) 16 32 5

16 2 5

16 2 1 5 16

16 1 21

h t t t

h t t t

h t t t

h t t

Using the method of your choice from

Unit 2 Lesson F.IF.8. Find the amount of

time it will take to reach the maximum

height. The t coordinate of the vertex

indicates WHEN the firework will reach

its maximum height.

2

321

2 16

bt

a

t

The firework will reach its maximum height after 1 second.

Practice Exercises B

Solve.

1. A bolt falls off an airplane at an altitude of

500 m. How long will it take the bolt to

reach the ground?

2. A ball is thrown upward at a speed of 30

m/sec from an altitude of 20 m. What is

the maximum height of the ball?

3. How far will an object fall in 5 seconds if

it is thrown downward at an initial

velocity of 30 m/sec from a height of 200

m?

4. A ring is dropped from a helicopter at an

altitude of 246 feet. How long does it take

the ring to reach the ground?

5. A coin is tossed upward with an initial

velocity of 30 ft/sec from an altitude of 8

feet. What is the maximum height of the

coin?

6. What is the height of an object after two

seconds, if thrown downward at an initial

velocity of 20 ft/sec from a height of 175

feet?

7. A water balloon is dropped from a height

of 26 feet. How long before it lands on

someone who is 6 feet tall?

8. A potato is launched from the ground with

an initial velocity of 15 m/sec. What is its

maximum height?

Jordan School District Page 155 Secondary Mathematics 2

Solving Quadratic Inequalities in One Variable

Example:

Solve 2 2 3 0x x .

Find where the expression on the left side of the inequality equals zero. 2 2 3 0x x

3 1 0x x

3 0 or 1 0

3 or 1

x x

x x

We are asked to find where the expression is greater than zero, in other words, where the

expression is positive. Determine if the expression is positive or negative around each

zero. Select a value in the interval and evaluate the expression at that value, then decide

if the result is positive or negative.

1x 1 3x 3x

2x

22 2 2 3

4 4 3

4 4 3

5

Positive

0x

2

0 2 0 3

0 0 3

0 3

3

Negative

4x

2

4 2 4 3

16 8 3

8 3

5

Positive

There are two intervals where the expression is positive: when 1x and when 3x .

Therefore, the answer to the inequality is , 1 3, . The answer could be

represented on a number line as follows:

Look at the graph of the function 2 2 3f x x x . Determine the intervals where the

function is positive.

Jordan School District Page 156 Secondary Mathematics 2

The function is positive , 1 3, . Notice that this interval is the same interval

we obtained when we tested values around the zeros of the expression.

Example:

Solve 23 5 2 0x x .

Find where the expression on the left side of the inequality equals zero.

2

2

3 5 2 0

3 5 2 0

3 1 2 0

x x

x x

x x

3 1 0 or 2 0

3 1 or 2

1 or 2

3

x x

x x

x x

We are asked to find where the expression is less than or equal to zero, in other words,

where the expression is negative or zero. Determine if the expression is positive or

negative around each zero. Select a value in the interval and evaluate the expression at

that value, then decide if the result is positive or negative.

13

x 13

2x 2x

1x

23 1 5 1 2

3 1 5 2

3 5 2

6

Negative

0x

2

3 0 5 0 2

3 0 0 2

0 0 2

2

Positive

3x

2

3 3 5 3 2

3 9 15 2

27 15 2

10

Negative

Jordan School District Page 157 Secondary Mathematics 2

There are two intervals where the expression is negative: when 13

x and when 2x .

It equals zero at 13

x and 2x . Therefore, the answer to the inequality is

13

, 2, . The answer could be represented on a number line as follows:

Example:

Solve 2

04x

.

Find where the denominator is equal to zero.

4 0

4

x

x

We are asked to find where the expression is less than zero, in other words, where the

expression is negative. Determine if the expression is positive or negative around where

the denominator is equal to zero. Select a value in the interval and evaluate the

expression at that value, then decide if the result is positive or negative.

4x 4x

5x

2

5 4

2

1

2

Negative

3x

2

3 4

2

1

2

Positive

The function is negative when 4x . Therefore, the answer to the inequality is

, 4 . The answer could be represented on a number line as follows:

Jordan School District Page 158 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Solve 3

02 5

x

x

.

Find where both the numerator and the denominator are equal to zero.

3 0

3

x

x

2 5 0

5

2

x

x

We are asked to find where the expression is greater than or equal to zero, in other words,

where the expression is positive. Determine if the expression is positive or negative

around where the numerator and denominator are equal to zero. Select a value in the

interval and evaluate the expression at that value, then decide if the result is positive or

negative.

3x 5

32

x 5

2x

4x

3

2 5

4 3

2 4 5

1

13

1

13

x

x

Positive

0x

3

2 5

0 3

2 0 5

3

5

3

5

x

x

Negative

3x

3

2 5

3 3

2 3 5

6

1

6

x

x

Positive

There are two intervals where the expression is positive: when 3x and when 52

x .

The function is only equal to zero when 3x because the denominator cannot equal

zero. Therefore, the answer to the inequality is 5

, 3 ,2

. The answer could be

represented on a number line as follows:

Jordan School District Page 159 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

A rocket is launched with an initial velocity of 160 ft/sec from a 4 foot high platform.

How long is the rocket at least 260 feet?

Write an inequality to represent the situation. The initial velocity, 0v , is 160 ft/sec and

the initial height, 0h , is 4 feet. The height will be at least (greater than or equal to) 260 ft. 2

0 016t v t h h 216 160 4 260t t

You need to determine the real world domain for this situation. Time is the independent

variable. It starts at 0 seconds and ends when the rocket hits the ground at 10 seconds.

Move all the terms to one side of the inequality so the expression is compared to zero. 216 160 256 0t t

Find where the expression is equal to zero.

2

2

16 160 256 0

16 10 16 0

16 2 8 0

t t

t t

t t

2 0 or 8 0

2 or 8

t t

t t

Determine if the expression is positive or negative around each zero. Select a value in

the interval and evaluate the expression at that value, then decide if the result is positive

or negative.

0 2t 2 8t 8 10t

1t

2

2

16 160 256

16 1 160 1 256

16 1 160 1 256

16 160 256

112

t t

negative

3t

2

2

16 160 256

16 3 160 3 256

16 9 480 256

144 480 256

80

t t

Positive

9t

2

2

16 160 256

16 9 160 9 256

16 81 1440 256

1296 1440 256

112

t t

negative

The rocket is at or above 260 feet from 2t seconds to 8t seconds. The difference is

6, so the rocket is at least 260 feet for 6 seconds.

Jordan School District Page 160 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises C

Solve.

1. 2 18 80 0x x 2. 2 11 30 0x x 3. 2 6 8x x

4. 2 4 3x x 5. 23 6 0x x 6. 23 17 10 0x x

7. 1

05x

8.

20

4

x

x

9.

2 10

3

x

x

10. A bottle of water is thrown upward with an initial velocity of 32 ft/sec from a cliff that is

1920 feet high. For what time does the height exceed 1920 feet?

11. A company determines that its total profit function can be modeled by

22 480 16,000.P x x x Find all values of x for which it makes a profit.

12. A rocket is launched with an initial velocity of 24 m/sec from a platform that is 3 meters

high. The rocket will burst into flames unless it stays below 25 meters. Find the interval of

time before the rocket bursts into flames.

Jordan School District Page 161 Secondary Mathematics 2

Solving for a Specified Variable

Sometimes it is necessary to use algebraic rules to manipulate formulas in order to work with a

variable imbedded within the formula.

Given the area of a circle, solve for the radius.

Given: 2A r Solve for r:

2Ar

Ar

Surface area of a right cylindrical solid with

radius r and height h

22 2A r rh

You may have to use the quadratic formula.

Solve for r:

2

2

2

2 2

2 2

2 2

2 2

0 2 2

2 2

2 2 4 2

2 2

2 4 8

4

2 2 2

4

2

2

A r rh

r rh A

a b h c A

h h Ar

h h Ar

h h Ar

h h Ar

Practice Exercises D

Solve for the indicated variable.

1. 2 2 2; solve for a b c b 2. 2 2 2 ;solve for S hl hw lw h

3. 26 ; solve for A s s

4. 2

0 1 ; solve for A A r r

5. 2 3

; solve for 2

k kN k

6. 1 2

2; solve for

Gm mF r

r

7. 21; solve for

2N n n n 8.

2 2 21 3 ; solve for x y r y

Jordan School District Page 162 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 3 Cluster 3 Honors: Polynomial and Rational Inequalities

Cluster 3: Creating equations that describe numbers or relationships

H.1.2 Solve polynomial and rational inequalities in one variable.

Example:

Solve 4 213 30 0x x .

4 213 30 0x x Find where 4 213 30 0x x .

4 2

2 2

13 30 0

10 3 0

x x

x x

2

2

10 0

10

10

x

x

x

or

2

2

3 0

3

3

x

x

x

This expression is quadratic in nature.

Factor the expression using that technique

and use the zero product property to solve

for each factor.

Test around each zero to determine if the expression is positive or negative on the interval.

Interval Test

Point

Expression evaluated

at point Positive/Negative

10x 4x

4 24 13 4 30

78

Positive

10 3x 2x

4 22 13 2 30

6

Negative

3 3x 0x

4 20 13 0 30

30

Positive

3 10x 2x

242 13 2 30

6

Negative

10x 4x

4 24 13 4 30

78

Positive

The expression is less than zero when it is negative.

The expression is negative on the intervals 10 3x and 3 10x .

The answer can also be written as 10, 3 10, 3 .

Jordan School District Page 163 Secondary Mathematics 2

The answer could also be represented on a number line.

Looking at the graph, the intervals that satisfy this inequality are the parts of the function

below the x-axis. Notice the intervals are the same.

Example:

Solve 3 26 0x x

3 26 0x x Find where 3 26 0x x

3 2

2

6 0

6 0

x x

x x

2 0

0

x

x

or

6 0

6

x

x

Factor the expression and use the zero product

property to solve for each factor.

Test around each zero to determine if the expression is positive or negative on the interval.

Interval Test

Point

Expression evaluated

at point Positive/Negative

6x 10x

3 210 6 10

400

Negative

6 0x 1x

3 21 6 1

5

Positive

0x 5x

3 25 6 5

275

Positive

Jordan School District Page 164 Secondary Mathematics 2

The expression is greater than zero when it is positive.

The expression is positive on the intervals 6 0x and 0x . Keep in mind it is also

equal to zero so the endpoints are also included. The intervals that satisfy the inequality

are 6 0x and 0.x The interval would be written 6x .

The answer can also be written as 6, .

The answer could also be represented on a number line.

Looking at the graph, the intervals that satisfy this inequality are the parts of the function

above the x-axis, including the values on the x-axis. Notice the intervals are the same.

Example:

1 2 4 0x x x

1 2 4 0x x x Find where 1 2 4 0x x x

1 2 4 0x x x

1 0

1

x

x

or

2 0

2

x

x

or

4 0

4

x

x

Use the zero product property to solve for each

factor.

Jordan School District Page 165 Secondary Mathematics 2

Test around each zero to determine if the expression is positive or negative on the interval.

Interval Test Point Expression evaluated at

point Positive/Negative

2x 5x 5 1 5 2 5 4

162

Negative

2 1x 0x 0 1 0 2 0 4

8

Positive

1 4x 2x 2 1 2 2 2 4

8

Negative

4x 6x 6 1 6 2 6 4

80

Positive

The expression is less than zero when it is negative.

The expression is negative on the intervals 2x and1 4x . Keep in mind it is also

equal to zero so the endpoints are also included. The intervals that satisfy the inequality

are 2x and 1 4.x

The answer can also be written , 2 1,4 .

The answer could also be represented on a number line.

Looking at the graph, the intervals that satisfy this inequality are the parts of the function

below the x-axis, including the values on the x-axis. Notice the intervals are the same.

Jordan School District Page 166 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

2 5 1

1 1

x x

x x

2 5 1

1 1

2 5 10

1 1

2 5 10

1

2 5 10

1

60

1

x x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x

x x

x

x

x

Compare the inequality to zero.

Make sure the denominators (the bottoms) are

the same.

Combine the numerators (the tops).

6 0

6

x

x

or

1 0

1

x

x

Set all of the factors in the numerator and

denominator equal to zero, and then solve.

Test around each zero to determine if the expression is positive or negative on the interval.

Interval Test Point Expression

evaluated at point Positive/Negative

6x 10x

10 6 4

10 1 9

4

9

Positive

6 1x 3x

3 6 3

3 1 2

3

2

Negative

1x 0x

0 6 6

0 1 1

6

Positive

The expression is greater than zero when it is positive.

The expression is positive on the intervals 6x and 1x . Keep in mind it is also equal

to zero so the endpoints are also included except for the denominator which cannot be

equal to zero. The intervals that satisfy the inequality are 6x and 1.x

The answer can also be written as , 6 1, .

The answer could also be represented on a number line.

Jordan School District Page 167 Secondary Mathematics 2

Looking at the graph, the intervals that satisfy this inequality are the parts of the function

above the x-axis, including the values on the x-axis. Notice the intervals are the same.

Example:

3

13

x

x

31

3

31 0

3

3 31 0

3 3

3 30

3 3

20

3

x

x

x

x

x x

x x

x x

x x

x

x

Compare the inequality to zero.

Make sure the denominators (the bottoms) are

the same.

Combine the numerators (the tops).

2 0

0

x

x

or

3 0

3

x

x

Set all of the factors in the numerator and

denominator equal to zero, and then solve.

Jordan School District Page 168 Secondary Mathematics 2

Test around each zero to determine if the expression is positive or negative on the interval.

Interval Test Point Expression

evaluated at point Positive/Negative

0x 5x

2 5 10

5 3 8

5

4

Positive

0 3x 1x

2 1 2

1 3 2

1

Negative

3x 5x

2 5 10

5 3 2

5

Positive

The expression is greater than zero when it is positive.

The expression is positive on the intervals 0x and 3x . Keep in mind the denominator

cannot be equal to zero.

The answer can also be written as ,0 3, .

The answer could also be represented on a number line.

Looking at the graph, the intervals that satisfy this inequality are the parts of the function

above the x-axis, including the values on the x-axis. Notice the intervals are the same.

Jordan School District Page 169 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

4 3

2 1x x

4 3

2 1

4 30

2 1

4 1 3 20

2 1 1 2

4 1 3 20

2 1 2 1

4 4 3 60

2 1

100

2 1

x x

x x

x x

x x x x

x x

x x x x

x x

x x

x

x x

Compare the inequality to zero.

Make sure the denominators (the bottoms)

are the same.

Combine the numerators (the tops).

10 0

10

x

x

or

2 0

2

x

x

or

1 0

1

x

x

Set all of the factors in the numerator and

denominator equal to zero, and then solve.

Test around each zero to determine if the expression is positive or negative on the interval.

Interval Test Point Expression

evaluated at point Positive/Negative

10x 15x

15 10

15 2 15 1

5

238

Negative

10 1x 5x

5 10

5 2 5 1

5

28

Positive

1 2x 0x 0 10 10

0 2 0 1 2

5

Negative

2x 5x

5 10 15

5 2 5 1 18

5

6

Positive

Jordan School District Page 170 Secondary Mathematics 2

The expression is less than zero when it is negative.

The expression is negative on the intervals 10x and 1 2x . Keep in mind the

denominator cannot be equal to zero.

The answer can also be written as , 10 1,2 .

The answer could also be represented on a number line.

Looking at the graph, the intervals that satisfy this inequality are the parts of the function

below the x-axis. Notice the intervals are the same.

Practice Exercises A Solve.

1.

3 4 1 0x x x

2.

5 1 2 0x x x

3. 3 25 0x x

4. 4 2 2x x 5. 3 2x x 6. 4 24x x

7. 6

2 2

x

x x

8. 4 5

32

x

x

9.

2

3 20

1

x x

x

10. 5 7 8

2 2

x

x x

11.

1 1

2 3x x

12.

5 3

5 2 1x x

Jordan School District Page 171 Secondary Mathematics 2

You Decide

Carter’s spaceship is trapped in a gravitational field of a newly discovered Class M planet. Carter

will be in danger if his spaceship’s acceleration exceeds 500 m/h/h. If his acceleration can be

modeled by the equation

2

2500( ) m/h/h

5A t

t

, for what range of time is Carter’s spaceship

below the danger zone?

Jordan School District Page 172 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 3 Cluster 3 (A.CED.2)

Writing and Graphing Equations in Two Variables

Cluster 3: Creating equations that describe numbers or relationships

3.3.2 Write and graph equations in 2 or more variables with labels and scales

Writing Quadratic Functions Given Key Features

A quadratic function can be expressed in several ways to highlight key features.

Vertex form: 2

f x a x h k highlights the vertex ,h k .

Factored from: f x a x p x q highlights the x-intercepts ,0p and ,0 .q

It is possible to write a quadratic function when given key features such as the vertex or the

x-intercepts and another point on the graph of the parabola.

Example:

Write a quadratic equation for a parabola that has its vertex at 2,4 and passes through

the point 1,6 .

Answer:

2

f x a x h k

You are given the vertex which is a key feature

that is highlighted by the vertex form of a

quadratic function. Use this form to help you

write the equation for the parabola graphed.

2

2 4f x a x

The vertex is 2,4 . 2h and 4k . Substitute

these values into the equation and simplify if

necessary.

2

6 1 2 4a

Use the point 1,6 to help you find the value of

a. The value of the function is 6 when x = 1 so

substitute 1 in for x and 6 in for f(x).

2

2

6 1 2 4

6 1 4

6 1 4

6 4

2

a

a

a

a

a

Use order of operations to simplify the expression

on the right side of the equation then solve for a.

2

2 2 4f x x Rewrite the expression substituting in the value

for a.

Jordan School District Page 173 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example: Write an equation for the parabola graphed below.

Answer:

2

f x a x h k

You are given the vertex which is a key feature

that is highlighted by the vertex form of a

quadratic function. Use this form to help you

write the equation for the parabola graphed.

2

( 3) ( 1)f x a x

2

3 1f x a x

The vertex is 3, 1 . 3h and 1k .

Substitute these values into the equation and

simplify if necessary.

2

5 5 3 1a

Use the point 5, 5 to help you find the value

of a. The value of the function is -5 when x = -5

so substitute -5 in for x and -5 in for f(x).

2

5 2 1

5 4 1

5 4 1

4 4

1

a

a

a

a

a

Use order of operations to simplify the expression

on the right side of the equation then solve for a.

2

3 1f x x Rewrite the expression substituting in the value

for a.

5, 5

vertex

3, 1

Jordan School District Page 174 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Write an equation for a parabola with x-intercepts 3,0 and 5,0 and passes through

the point 3, 3 .

Answer:

f x a x p x q

You are given the x-intercepts which are a key

feature that is highlighted by the factored form of

a quadratic function. Use this form to help you

write the equation for the parabola graphed.

( 3) 5f x a x x

3 5f x a x x

One x-intercept is 3,0 so 3p . The other

x-intercept is 5,0 5q . Substitute these

values into the equation and simplify if

necessary.

3 3 3 3 5a

Use the point 3, 3 to help you find the value

of a. The value of the function is -3 when x = 3

so substitute 3 in for each x and -3 in for f(x).

3 3 3 3 5

3 6 2

3 12

3

12

1

4

a

a

a

a

a

Use order of operations to simplify the

expression on the right side of the equation then

solve for a.

1

3 54

f x x x Rewrite the expression substituting in the value

for a.

Jordan School District Page 175 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Write an equation for the parabola graphed below.

Answer:

f x a x p x q

You are given the x-intercepts which are a key

feature that is highlighted by the factored form of

a quadratic function. Use this form to help you

write the equation for the parabola graphed.

( 2) 2f x a x x

2 2f x a x x

One x-intercept is 2,0 so 2p . The other

x-intercept is 2,0 2q . Substitute these

values into the equation and simplify if

necessary.

6 0 2 0 2a

Use the point 0,6 to help you find the value of

a. The value of the function is 6 when x = 0 so

substitute 0 in for each x and 6 in for f(x).

6 0 2 0 2

6 2 2

6 4

6

4

3

2

a

a

a

a

a

Use order of operations to simplify the

expression on the right side of the equation then

solve for a.

3

2 22

f x x x Rewrite the expression substituting in the value

for a.

Jordan School District Page 176 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises A

Write a quadratic equation for the parabola described.

1. Vertex: 2,3

Point: 0,7

2. Vertex: 1,4

Point: 1,8

3. Vertex: 3, 1

Point: 2,0

4. Intercepts: 2,0 4,0

Point: 1,3

5. Intercepts: 1,0 7,0

Point: 5, 12

6. Intercepts: 5,0 4,0

Point: 3,8

Write a quadratic equation for the parabola graphed.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

Jordan School District Page 177 Secondary Mathematics 2

Graphing Quadratic Equations

Graphing from Standard Form 2f x ax bx c

Example:

2 2 2f x x x

2

21

2 1

bx

a

x

2

2

2 2

1 1 2 1 2

3

f x x x

f

f x

Find the vertex.

The vertex is (1, -3)

Plot the vertex.

2

0 0 2 0 2

(0) 2

f

f

Find the y-intercept.

The y-intercept is (0, -2)

Plot the y-intercept.

Use the axis of symmetry to find another point

that is the reflection of the y-intercept.

Connect the points, drawing a smooth curve.

Remember quadratic functions are “U”

shaped.

Jordan School District Page 178 Secondary Mathematics 2

Graphing from Vertex Form 2( )f x a x h k

Example:

21

5 25

f x x

2( )f x a x h k

21

5 25

f x x

The vertex is (h, k).

Find the vertex.

The vertex is (-5, -2)

Plot the vertex.

21

0 0 5 25

(0) 3

f

f

Find the y-intercept.

The y-intercept is (0, 3)

Plot the y-intercept.

Use the axis of symmetry to find another point

that is the reflection of the y-intercept.

Connect the points, drawing a smooth curve.

Remember quadratic functions are “U”

shaped.

Jordan School District Page 179 Secondary Mathematics 2

Graphing from Factored Form ( )f x a x p x q

Example:

1

4 32

f x x x

1

4 32

4 0 3 0

4 3

f x x x

x x

x x

Find the x-intercepts.

The x-intercepts are

(-4, 0) and (3, 0)

Plot the x-intercepts.

4 3 1

2 2

Find the x-coordinate between the two

intercepts.

1 1 1 14 3

2 2 2 2

1 1 7 7

2 2 2 2

1 496.125

2 8

f

f

f

Use the x-coordinate

to find the y-

coordinate.

The vertex is

1 49,

2 8

Plot the vertex.

Connect the points, drawing a smooth curve.

Remember quadratic functions are “U”

shaped.

Jordan School District Page 180 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B Graph the following equations.

1. 2( ) 6 6f x x x

2. 2( ) 2 4 1f x x x

3. 21( ) 2

3f x x x

4. 21

( ) 1 32

f x x

5. 2

( ) 2 5f x x

6. 2

( ) 3 8f x x

7. 1

( ) 2 52

f x x x

8. ( ) 1 5f x x x

9. ( ) 2 1 3f x x x

Jordan School District Page 181 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 3 Cluster 6 (A.REI.7): Solve Systems of Equations

3.6.1 Solve simple systems containing linear and quadratic functions algebraically and

graphically.

Recall solving systems of equations in Secondary 1. We are looking for the intersection of the

two lines. There were three methods used. Below are examples of each method.

Solve: 2 4

2 3 1

x y

x y

Graphing

Graph the two equations and find the

intersection.

The intersection is (-10, -7).

Substitution

2 4x y 1. Solve for x in the first equation.

2(2 4) 3 1y y 2. Substitute the solution for x in the second

equation

4 8 3 1

8 1

7

y y

y

y

3. Solve for y

2 4

2 7 4

14 4

10

x y

x

x

x

4. Substitute y back into the first equation to

solve for x.

The solution is (-10, -7) 5. The solution is the intersection.

Jordan School District Page 182 Secondary Mathematics 2

Elimination

2 4

2 3 1

x y

x y

2 2 4

2 3 1

2 4 8

2 3 1

x y

x y

x y

x y

1. In order to eliminate the x’s, multiply the top

equation by -2.

7y 2. Combine the two equations.

2 4

2 7 4

14 4

10

x y

x

x

x

3. Substitute 7y into either original

equation in order to solve for x

The intersection is (-10, -7) 4. The solution is the intersection.

We will use these methods to help solve systems involving quadratic equations.

Example:

Find the intersection of the following two equations:

2 4

2

y x

x y

Graphing

Graph the two equations and find the

intersection(s).

The intersections are (-2, 0) and (3, 5).

Substitution

2 4 2x x

1. The first equation is already solved for y;

substitute 2 4x for y in the second

equation.

Jordan School District Page 183 Secondary Mathematics 2

2

2

2

4 2

4 2

6 0

6 0

x

x x

x x

x x

2. Simplify and write in standard polynomial

form.

2 6 0

3 2 0

3 or 2

x x

x x

x x

3. Solve for x using the method of your choice

2 2

2 2

4 4

3 4 2 4

9 4 4 4

5 0

y x y x

y y

y y

y y

4. Substitute the x values back into the first

equation to solve for y.

The solutions are (3, 5) and (-2, 0) 5. The solutions are the intersections.

Elimination

2 0 4

2

x x y

x y

1. Line up like variables.

2

2

2

0 4

1( 2 )

0 4

2

6 0

x x y

x y

x x y

x y

x x

2. Multiply the second equation by -1 then

combine the two equations.

2 6 0

3 2 0

3 or 2

x x

x x

x x

3. Solve using the method of your choice.

2 2

2 2

4 4

3 4 2 4

9 4 4 4

5 0

y x y x

y y

y y

y y

4. Substitute the x values back into the first

equation to solve for y.

The solutions are (3, 5) and (-2, 0) 5. The solutions are the intersections.

Jordan School District Page 184 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Using the method of your choice, find the intersection between the following equations: 2 2 4

2 1

x y

x y

Substitution

2 1y x

1. Solve for x in the second equation.

22 2 1 4x x

2. Substitute 2 1x for y in the first

equation.

2 2

2

2

4 4 1 4

5 4 3 0

4 4 4 5 3

2 5

4 16 60

10

4 76

10

4 2 19

10

2 19

5

2 19 2 19 or

5 5

0.472 or 1.272

x x x

x x

x

x

x

x

x

x x

x x

3. Simplify and solve for x.

2 1 2 1

2 19 2 192 1 2 1

5 5

1 2 19 1 2 19

5 5

1.944 1.544

y x y x

y y

y y

y y

4. Substitute the x values back into the

first equation to solve for y.

Jordan School District Page 185 Secondary Mathematics 2

The solutions are 2 19 1 2 19

,5 5

and

2 19 1 2 19,

5 5

Or approximately (0.472, -1.944) or (-1.272, 1.544)

5. The solutions are the intersections.

Practice Exercises A

Solve each of the systems of equations.

1. 2

6

3

x y

y x

2.

2 2 41

1

x y

y x

3. 2

3 7

4 5 24

x y

x y

4.

2

3 2

y x

x y

5.

2 3

2 4

y x

y x

6.

2 24 9 36

3 2 6

x y

y x

7.

2

2

y x

x y

8. 2

2 1

4

x y

y x

9.

2 2 89

3

x y

x y

10.

2 2 45

3

x y

y x

11.

2 2

2 2

14

4

x y

x y

12. 2 2

1 3 4x y

y x

Jordan School District Page 186 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 3 Cluster 6 Honors (A.REI.8 and A.REI.9)

Solving Systems of Equations with Vectors and Matrices

H.3.1 Represent a system of linear equations as a single matrix equation in a vector

variable.

H.3.2 Find the inverse of a matrix if it exists and use it to solve systems of linear

equations (using technology for matrices of dimension 3 × 3 or greater).

In Secondary Mathematics 1 Honors you learned to solve a system of two equations by writing

the corresponding augmented matrix and using row operations to simplify the matrix so that it

had ones down the diagonal from upper left to lower right, and zeros above and below the ones.

1 0

0 1

g

h

When a matrix is in this form it is said to be in reduced row-echelon form. The process for

simplifying a matrix to reduced row-echelon form is called Gauss-Jordan elimination after the

two mathematicians, Carl Friedrich Gauss and Wilhelm Jordan. This process, using row

operations, can be used for systems of two or more variables.

Row operations are listed below using the original matrix

0 2 6 3

1 4 7 10

2 6 9 1

.

Note: R indicates row and the number following indicates which row. For instance, R1 indicated

row one.

Interchange Rows

We want to have ones

along the diagonal. We

can switch rows so that

the one ends up in the

correct position.

Symbol: 1 2R R

All of the elements of

Row 1 will switch

positions with all the

elements of Row 2.

1 4 7 10

0 2 6 3

2 6 9 1

Multiply a row by a scalar

We want positive ones

down the diagonal.

Multiplying each

element by a scalar k,

0 ,k allows us to

change values in one

row while preserving

the overall equality.

Symbol: 1k R

11

2R

=3

0 1 32

The matrix is now: 32

0 1 3

1 4 7 10

2 6 9 1

Jordan School District Page 187 Secondary Mathematics 2

Combine Two Rows

You can add or subtract

two rows to replace a

single row. This enables

you to get ones along

the diagonal and zeros

elsewhere.

2: 1 2R R R

2 : 0 2 6 3 1 4 7 10

2 : 1 6 1 13

R

R

The matrix is now:

0 2 6 3

1 6 1 13

2 6 9 1

Multiply by a scalar, then combine rows

Sometimes it is

necessary to multiply a

row by a scalar before

combining with another

row to get a one or a

zero where needed.

3: 2 2 3R R R

3: 2 1 4 7 10 2 6 9 1

3: 2 8 14 20 2 6 9 1

3: 0 2 23 19

R

R

R

The matrix is now:

0 2 6 3

1 4 7 10

0 2 23 19

Practice Exercises A

Perform the row operations on the given matrix.

3 3 1 6

8 5 5 1

0 6 9 3

1. 2 3R R 2. 13

1R 3. 2: 1 3 2R R R

Using the matrix below, write appropriate row operation(s) to get the desired results.

(Recall that mna indicates the element of the matrix is located in row m and column n.)

3 8 3 10

2 5 10 9

7 5 5 5

4. 11 1a 5. 21 0a 6. 32 0a

Jordan School District Page 188 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example: Solve the following systems of equations using the Gauss-Jordan elimination method.

2 7

3 5 14

2 2 3

x y z

x y z

x y z

1 2 1 7

3 5 1 14

2 2 1 3

Rewrite the equations in matrix form.

1 2 1 7

0 1 2 7

2 2 1 3

2 : 3 1 2

2 : 3 6 3 21 3 5 1 14

2 : 0 1 2 7

R R R

R

R

1 2 1 7

0 1 2 7

0 2 3 11

3: 2 1 3

3: 2 4 2 14 2 2 1 3

3: 0 2 3 11

R R R

R

R

1 0 3 7

0 1 2 7

0 2 3 11

1: 2 2 1

1: 0 2 4 14 1 2 1 7

1: 1 0 3 7

R R R

R

R

1 0 3 7

0 1 2 7

0 0 1 3

3: 2 2 2

3: 0 2 4 14 0 2 3 11

3: 0 0 1 3

R R R

R

R

1 0 0 2

0 1 2 7

0 0 1 3

1:3 3 1

1: 0 0 3 9 1 0 3 7

1: 1 0 0 2

R R R

R

R

1 0 0 2

0 1 0 1

0 0 1 3

2 : 2 3 2

2 : 0 0 2 6 0 1 2 7

2 : 0 1 0 1

R R R

R

R

The solution is 2, 1,3

Rewriting the answer in equation form you end

up with:

2

1

3

x

y

z

Jordan School District Page 189 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

Using Gauss-Jordan Elimination solve the following systems of equations.

1. 3 2 19

2 1

x y

x y

2.

2 3 13

2 2 3

3 4

x y z

x y z

x y z

Technology can be used to help solve systems of equations. The following system of equations

can be solved using your graphing calculator.

2 11

2 2 11

3 24

x y z

x y z

x y z

2 1 1 11

1 2 2 11

1 1 3 24

Write the augmented matrix.

Enter the matrix into your calculator.

Note: [A] is the default matrix

Push 2nd

1x

Arrow over to choose EDIT

Push ENTER

Type the dimensions. After each number push

ENTER.

For this example: 3 ENTER 4 ENTER

Type each element in the first row. Push

ENTER after each number. Continue until

every row has been entered.

Push 2nd

MODE to return to the home screen

Push 2nd

1x Then ENTER ENTER

This will give you a chance to check your

matrix for accuracy.

Push 2nd

1x arrow over to MATH.

Either arrow down to option B or push

ALPHA APPS to get to rref(

This is row reduced echelon form.

Jordan School District Page 190 Secondary Mathematics 2

Push 2nd

1x ENTER )

Or select the matrix in which your equations

are stored.

Push ENTER to obtain the answer.

The answer is (-1, 2, 7)

Rewriting the answer in equation form you end

up with:

1

2

7

x

y

z

Practice Exercises C

Solve each of the following systems using technology.

1.

3 2 31

2 19

3 2 25

x y z

x y z

x y z

2.

5 2 3 0

5

2 3 4

x y z

x y

x z

3.

2 2 2

3 5 4

2 3 6

x y z

x y z

x y z

Not every system has a single point as the solution. The following situations may also occur.

Consistent and

Independent

5

4 2 1

9 3 13

x y z

x y z

x y z

A single point solution

1 0 0 4

0 1 0 6

0 0 1 5

4, 6, 5

Jordan School District Page 191 Secondary Mathematics 2

Consistent and

Dependent

6 4

12 2 2 8

5 3

x y z

x y z

x y z

A line solution defined by one

variable

72

11 11

1 211 11

1 0

0 1

0 0 0 0

Rewriting the answer in

equation form you end up with: 72

11 11

1 211 11

0 0 this is always true

x z

y z

Note: z is an independent

variable and can take on

any real value

The solution is written as:

7 2 2 111 11 11 11

, ,z z z

Consistent and

Dependent

3 1

2

2 4 3

x y z

x z w

x y z w

A plane solution defined by

two variables

1 0 1 1 2

0 1 2 1 1

0 0 0 0 0

Rewriting the answer in

equation form you end up with:

2

2 1

0 0 this is always true

x z w

y z w

Note: z and w are independent

variables and can take on any

real value

The solution is written as:

2 , 1 2 , ,w z w z z w

All three planes coincide.

Jordan School District Page 192 Secondary Mathematics 2

Inconsistent

6

2 3

2 2 0

x y z

x y z

x y z

No solution

There are no intersections

common to all three planes or

the three planes are parallel

1 0 0 0

0 1 1 0

0 0 0 1

The equations would be:

0

0

0 1 this is not true

x

y z

No Solution

or

Practice Exercises D

Solve the following systems. Indicate if the system is consistent or inconsistent.

1.

2 0

2 2 3 3

1

4 2 13

x y z

x y z

y z

x y z

2.

5 8 6 14

3 4 2 8

2 2 3

x y z

x y z

x y z

3.

5 12 10

2 5 2 1

2 3 5

x y z

x y z

x y z

4.

2 2

2 3 6 5

3 4 4 12

x y z

x y z

x y z

5.

2 3

3 2 4

3 3 1

2 4 2

x y w

x y w

x y z w

x y z w

6.

2 3 7

2 3 4

4 3

x y z w

x y z

x y w

Jordan School District Page 193 Secondary Mathematics 2

Find the Inverse of a Matrix

Two n n matrices are inverses of one another if their product is the n n identity matrix. Not

all matrices have an inverse. An n n matrix has an inverse if and only if the determinant is not

zero. The inverse of A is denoted by 1A . There are two ways to find the inverse both can be

done using technology.

1 1 0

1 3 4

0 4 3

A

1 1 0

1 3 4 4

0 4 3

The determinant is not zero therefore the matrix has an inverse.

Method 1:

Rewrite the matrix with the 3 3 identity

matrix.

1 1 0 1 0 0

1 3 4 0 1 0

0 4 3 0 0 1

Enter the matrix in your calculator and find

reduced row echelon form.

To convert to fractions push MATH Frac

The inverse matrix is:

7 34 4

1 3 34 4

1

1

1 1 1

A

Method 2:

Enter the matrix in your calculator as

matrix A.

From the home screen push 2nd

1x to select

your matrix.

Then push 1x

Then push ENTER

To convert to fractions push MATH Frac

The inverse matrix is:

7 34 4

1 3 34 4

1

1

1 1 1

A

Jordan School District Page 194 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises E

Find the inverse of the following matrices.

1.

1 1 1

4 5 0

0 1 3

2.

1 1 1

0 2 1

2 3 0

3.

2 1 3

1 2 2

0 1 1

4.

1 2 1

2 1 3

1 0 1

5.

2 3 1

1 0 4

0 1 1

6.

5 0 2

2 2 1

3 1 1

Using the Inverse to Solve a System of Linear Equations

If AX B has a unique solution, then 1X A B . Where A is the coefficient matrix, X is the

column variable matrix, and B is the column solution matrix.

Given:

ax by cz d

ex fy gz h

kx my nz p

then,

a b c

A e f g

k m n

,

x

X y

z

, and

d

B h

p

Example:

3

3 4 3

4 3 2

x y

x y z

y z

1 1 0 3

1 3 4 , , 3

0 4 3 2

x

A X y B

z

Identify the A, X, and B matrices

7 34 4

1 3 34 4

1

1

1 1 1

A

Find the inverse of A

X

7 34 4

3 34 4

1

1

1 1 1

3

3

2

Use 1X A B to find the solution.

The solution is:

1

2

2

Written as: (1, 2, -2)

1

2

2

x

y

z

Jordan School District Page 195 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises F

Solve using the inverse matrix.

1.

2 6 6 8

2 7 6 10

2 7 7 9

x y z

x y z

x y z

2.

2 5 2

2 3 8 3

2 3

x y z

x y z

x y z

3.

8

2 7

2 3 1

x y z

y z

x y

4.

6 3 11

2 7 3 14

4 12 5 25

x y z

x y z

x y z

5.

6

4 2 9

4 2 3

x y z

x y z

x y z

6.

2 0

1

2 1

y z

x y

x y z

7.

3 2 2

4 5 3 9

2 5 5

x y z

x y z

x y z

8.

1

6 20 14

3 1

x y

x y z

y z

9.

3 4 3

2 3 2

4 3 6

x y z

x y z

x y z

Jordan School District Page 196 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 2 Cluster 2b (F.IF.8b), Unit 3 Cluster 1b (A.SSE.1b), Unit 3

Cluster 2c (A.SSE.3c)

Forms and Uses of Exponential Functions

Cluster 2: Analyzing functions using different representations

2.2.2b Use properties of exponents to interpret expressions for exponential functions

Cluster 1: Interpreting the structure of expressions

3.1.1b Interpret complicated expressions by looking at one or more of their parts

separately (focus on exponential functions with rational exponents using mainly

square roots and cube roots)

Cluster 2: Writing expressions in equivalent forms to solve problems

3.2.1c Use properties of exponents to rewrite exponential functions

VOCABULARY

An exponential function is a function of the form xf x ab where a and b are constants and

0a , 0b , and 1b .

Exponential functions can also be of the form 1t

A P r . This is the simplified interest

formula. Each part of the formula has a specific meaning. The principal, P, is the original

amount of money that is deposited. The interest rate, r, is expressed as a decimal and represents

the growth rate of the investment. Time, t, is the number of years that the money remains in the

account. The amount, A, after t years can be calculated by using the formula.

Example:

Austin deposits $450 into a savings account with a 2.5% interest rate. How much money

will be in the account after 5 years?

1t

A P r

$450

2.5% 0.025

5 years

P

r

t

5

450 1 0.025A

Substitute the known values into the

equation

5

450 1.025

509.1336958

A

A

Evaluate.

Austin will have $509.13 in his account after 5 years.

Jordan School District Page 197 Secondary Mathematics 2

VOCABULARY

Interest is commonly assessed multiple times throughout the year. This is referred to as

compound interest because the interest is compounded or applied more than once during the

year. The formula is 1

ntr

A Pn

where n is the number of times that the interest is

compounded during the year.

1

ntr

A Pn

Example:

Cyndi received a lot of money for her high school graduation and she plans to invest

$1000 in a Dream CD. A CD is a certified account that pays a fixed interest rate for a

specified length of time. Cyndi chose to do a 3 year CD with a 0.896% interest rate

compounded monthly. How much money will she have in 3 years?

1

ntr

A Pn

$1000

0.896% 0.00896

12 times

3 years

P

r

n

t

12 30.00896

1000 112

A

Substitute the known values into the

equation

360.00896

1000 112

1027.234223

A

A

Simplify the exponent and evaluate.

Cyndi will have $1027.23 after 3 years.

Final

Amount Principal Number of times

compounded per year

Interest

Rate

Time

(in years)

Jordan School District Page 198 Secondary Mathematics 2

VOCABULARY

There is another interest formula where the interest is assessed continuously. It is called

continuous interest. The formula is rtA Pe . It uses the same P, r, and t from the other

interest formulas but it also utilizes the Euler constant e. Similar to pi, e is an irrational number.

It is defined to be 1

lim 1 2.718281828

n

ne

n

. It is also called the natural base.

Example:

Eva invested $750 in a savings account with an interest rate of 1.2% that is compounded

continuously. How much money will be in the account after 7 years?

rtA Pe

$750

1.2% 0.012

7 years

P

r

t

0.012 7750A e Substitute the known values into the

equation 0.084750

815.7216704

A e

A

Simplify the exponent and evaluate.

Eva will have $815.72 after 7 years.

VOCABULARY

There are times when the value of an item decreases by a fixed percent each year. This can be

modeled by the formula 1t

A P r where P is the initial value of the item, r is the rate at

which its value decreases, and A is the value of the item after t years.

Example:

Jeff bought a new car for $27,500. The car’s value decreases by 8% each year. How

much will the car be worth in 15 years?

1t

A P r

$27,500

8% 0.08

15 years

P

r

t

15

27,500 1 0.08A Substitute the known values into the

equation

15

27,500 0.92

7873.178612

A

A

Evaluate.

Jeff should sell the car for at least $7873.18.

Jordan School District Page 199 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises A Use the compound and continuous interest formulas to solve the following. Round to the nearest

cent.

1. Bobbi is investing $10,000 in a money market account that pays 5.5% interest quarterly.

How much money will she have after 5 years?

2. Joshua put $5,000 in a special savings account for 10 years. The account had an interest

rate of 6.5% compounded continuously. How much money does he have?

3. Analeigh is given the option of investing $12,000 for 3 years at 7% compounded monthly

or at 6.85% compounded continuously. Which option should she choose and why?

4. Mallory purchased a new Road Glide Ultra motorcycle for $22,879. Its value depreciates

15% each year. How much could she sell it for 8 years later?

Example:

Emily invested $1250 after 2 years she had $1281.45. What was the interest rate, if the

interested was assessed once a year?

1t

A P r The interest is assessed only once a year;

use the simplified interest formula.

1t

A P r

$1281.45

$1250

2 years

A

P

t

2

1281.45 1250 1 r Substitute the known values into the

equation

21281.45

11250

r

Isolate the squared term.

21281.45

11250

r

Find the square root of each side.

1281.451

1250

1281.451

1250

r

r

1 1.0125

0.0125

r

r

or

1 1.0125

2.0125

r

r

Solve for r.

The interest rate is positive; therefore it is 0.0125 or 1.25%.

Jordan School District Page 200 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Sam invested some money in a CD with an interest rate of 1.15% that was compounded

quarterly. How much money did Sam invest if he had $1500 after 10 years?

1

ntr

A Pn

The interest is compounded quarterly; use

the compound interest formula.

1

ntr

A Pn

$1500

1.15% 0.015

4 times

10 years

A

r

n

t

4 100.015

1500 14

P

Substitute the known values into the

equation

40

40

40

1500 1 0.00375

1500 1.00375

1500

1.00375

P

P

P

Isolate P.

1291.424221 P Evaluate.

Ten years ago Sam invested $1291.42.

Example:

Suzie received $500 for her birthday. She put the money in a savings account with 4%

interest compounded monthly. When will she have $750?

1

ntr

A Pn

$500

4% 0.04

12 times

P

r

n

120.04

500 112

t

A

Substitute the known values into the

equation

$750A

Put the interest formula in Y1 and $750 in

Y2. Graph the two equations and use 2nd

,

Trace, intersect to find their intersection.

Suzie will have $750 in 10.154 years.

Jordan School District Page 201 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B Solve.

1. Jace invested $12,000 in a 3-year Dream CD with interest compounded annually. At the

end of the 3 years, his CD is worth $12,450. What was the interest rate for the CD?

2. Jaron has a savings account containing $5,000 with interest compounded annually. Two

years ago, it held $4,500. What was the interest rate?

3. Lindsey needs to have $10,000 for the first semester of college. How much does she have

to invest in an account that carries an 8.5% interest rate compounded monthly in order to

reach her goal in 4 years?

4. If Nick has $20,000 now, how long will it take him to save $50,000 in an account that

carries an interest of 5.83% compounded continuously?

VOCABULARY

When interest is assessed more than once in the year, the effective interest rate is actually higher

than the interest rate. The effective interest rate is equivalent to the annual simple rate of

interest that would yield the same amount as compounding after 1 year.

Annual Rate Effective Rate

Annual compounding 10% 10%

Semiannual compounding 10% 10.25%

Quarterly compounding 10% 10.381%

Monthly compounding 10% 10.471%

Daily compounding 10% 10.516%

Continuous compounding 10% 10.517%

Example:

$1000 is put into a savings account with 5% interest compounded quarterly. What is the

effective interest rate?

1

ntr

A Pn

$1000

5% 0.05

4 times

P

r

n

40.05

1000 14

t

A

Substitute the known values into the

equation

Jordan School District Page 202 Secondary Mathematics 2

4

4

1000 1 0.0125

1000 1.0125

t

t

A

A

Simplify what is inside the parentheses.

41000 1.0125

1000 1.050945337

t

t

A

A

Use properties of exponents to rewrite the

function so that is to the power of t.

1000 1 0.050945337t

A

Rewrite it so that it is 1 plus the interest

rate. This is the simplified interest

formula.

In the new simplified interest formula 0.0509 5.09%r

Example:

If $1000 were put into a savings account that paid 5% interest compounded continuously,

what would the monthly interest rate be?

rtA Pe $1000

5% 0.05

P

r

0.051000 tA e Substitute the known values into the

equation.

0.051000

1000 1.051271096

t

t

A e

A

Use properties of exponents to rewrite the

function so that is to the power of t.

121/12

12

12

1000 1.051271096

1000 1.004175359

1000 1 0.004175359

t

t

t

A

A

A

Remember that t is the number of years

the money is being invested. It is

necessary to multiply t by 12 to convert it

to months.

Using algebra rules, we must also divide

by 12 so that the equation does not change

since 12

112

. Perform the division inside

the parenthesis so the interest rate is

affected.

Rewrite the information in the parenthesis

so that it is 1 plus the interest rate. This is

the simplified interest formula.

In the monthly interest rate is 0.00418 0.418%r

Jordan School District Page 203 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises C

Find the monthly rate or effective interest rate.

1. If $2,500 is invested in an account with an interest rate of 7.23% compounded semi-

annually, what is the effective rate?

2. If $7,700 is invested in an account with an interest rate of 9% compounded quarterly,

what is the monthly interest rate?

3. If $235,000 is invested in an account with an interest rate of 22.351% compounded

monthly, what is the effective rate?

4. If $550 is invested in an account with an interest rate of 45.9% compounded annually,

what is the monthly interest rate?

Exponential Growth and Decay

VOCABULARY

Money is not the only real world phenomenon that can be modeled with an exponential function.

Other phenomena such as populations, bacteria, radioactive substances, electricity, and

temperatures can be modeled by exponential functions.

A quantity that grows by a fixed percent at regular intervals is said to have exponential growth.

The formula for uninhibited growth is 0 , 0ktA t A e k , where 0A is the original amount, t is

the time and k is the growth constant. This formula is similar to the continuous interest formula rtA Pe . Both formulas are continuously growing or growing without any constraints.

0

ktA t A e

Final

amount

Initial

Amount

Time

Growth

Constant

Jordan School District Page 204 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

A colony of bacteria that grows according to the law of uninhibited growth is modeled by

the function 0.045100 tA t e , where A is measured in grams and t is measured in days.

(a) Determine the initial amount of bacteria.

(b) What is the growth constant of the bacteria?

(c) What is the population after 7 days?

(d) How long will it take for the population to reach 140 grams?

a.

0.045100 tA t e

0A is the initial amount and in the

equation 0 100A , therefore the initial

amount is 100 grams.

b.

0.045100 tA t e

k is the growth constant and in the

equation 0.045k , therefore the growth

rate is 0.045/day.

c.

0.045

0.045(7)

100

(7) 100

(7) 137.026

tA t e

A e

A

Substitute 7 in for time, t, then evaluate.

After 7 days, there will be 137.026 grams

of bacteria.

d.

140A t

Put the exponential growth equation in

Y1 and 140 in Y2. Graph the two

equations and use 2nd

, Trace, intersect to

find their intersection.

It will take 7.477 days for the bacteria to grow to 140 grams.

VOCABULARY

A quantity that decreases by a fixed percent at regular intervals is said to have exponential

decay. The formula for uninhibited decay is 0 , 0ktA t A e k where 0A is the original

amount, t is the time and k is the constant rate of decay.

The decay formula is the same as the growth formula. The only difference is that when k > 0 the

amount increases over time making the function have exponential growth and when k < 0 the

amount decreases over time making the function have exponential decay.

Jordan School District Page 205 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

A dinosaur skeleton was found in Vernal, Utah. Scientists can use the equation 0.000124( ) 1100 tA t e , where A is measured in kilograms and t is measured in years, to

determine the amount of carbon remaining in the dinosaur. This in turn helps to

determine the age of the dinosaur bones.

(a) Determine the initial amount of carbon in the dinosaur bones.

(b) What is the growth constant of the carbon?

(c) How much carbon is left after 5,600 years?

(d) How long will it take for the carbon to reach 900 kilograms?

a.

0.000124( ) 1100 tA t e

0A is the initial amount and in the

equation 0 1,100A , therefore the initial

amount is 1,100 kilograms.

b.

0.000124( ) 1100 tA t e

k is the growth constant and in the

equation 0.000124k . Since k is

negative, therefore the carbon is

decaying at a rate 0.000124/year.

c.

0.000124

0.000124 5600

( ) 1100

(5600) 1100

(5600) 549.311

tA t e

A e

A

Substitute 5600 in for time, t, then

evaluate.

After 5600 years, there will be 549.311

kilograms of carbon remaining.

d.

900A t

Put the exponential growth equation in

Y1 and 900 in Y2. Graph the two

equations and use 2nd

, Trace, intersect to

find their intersection.

It will take 1,618.312 years for the carbon to decrease to 900 kilograms.

Jordan School District Page 206 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Problems D Solve.

1. India is one of the fastest growing countries in the world. 0.026574 tA t e describes the

population of India in millions t years after 1974.

a. What was the population in 1974?

b. Find the growth constant.

c. What will the population be in 2030?

d. When will India’s population be 1,624 million?

2. The amount of carbon-14 in an artifact can be modeled by 0.00012116 tA t e , where A is

measured in grams and t is measured in years.

a. How many grams of carbon-14 were present initially?

b. Find the growth constant.

c. How many grams of carbon-14 will be present after 5,715 years?

d. When will there be 4 grams of carbon-14 remaining?

VOCABULARY

An exponential function is a function of the form 0 0( ) 1ttA t A b A r where 0A is the initial

amount, 1b r is the growth factor, and 0 0A , 0b , and 1b .

Growth factor = 1 + r

If r < 0, is exponential decay If r > 0, is exponential growth

Jordan School District Page 207 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

A culture of bacteria obeys the law of uninhibited growth. Initially there were 500

bacteria present. After 1 hour there are 800 bacteria.

a. Identify the growth rate.

b. Write an equation to model the growth of the bacteria

c. How many bacteria will be present after 5 hours?

d. How long is it until there are 20,000 bacteria?

a.

8001.6

500

1.6 1 0.6

0.6

b

r

Find the common ratio. 1n

n

a

a

Rewrite b in the form of 1 r .

Identify the growth rate.

0.6 60%r

The bacterial is increasing at a rate of 60%

each hour.

b.

0( ) tA t A b

( ) 500(1.6)tA t

0 500

1.6

A

b

Substitute known values into the equation.

c.

5

( ) 500(1.6)

(5) 500(1.6)

(5) 5242.88

tA t

A

A

Substitute 5t into the equation and

evaluate.

Round down to the nearest whole number.

There are 5,242 bacteria present after 5

hours.

d.

20,000A t

Graph this equation and your equation in

Y1 and Y2.

Use 2nd

, Trace, intersect to find the

intersection.

There will be 20,000 bacteria after 7.849

hours.

Jordan School District Page 208 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

Michael bought a new laptop for $1,800 last year. A month after he purchased it, the

price dropped to $1,665.

a. Identify the growth rate.

b. Write an equation to model the value of the computer.

c. What will the value of the computer be after 9 months?

d. When will the value of the computer be $500?

a.

1665

0.9251800

0.925 1 0.075b

0.075r

Find the common ratio. 1n

n

a

a

Rewrite b in the form of 1 r .

Identify the growth rate.

0.075 7.5%r

The value of the computer is decreasing at

a rate of 7.5% each month.

b.

0( ) tA t A b

( ) 1800 0.925

tA t

0 1800

0.925

A

b

Substitute known values into the equation.

c.

9

( ) 1800 0.925

(9) 1800 0.925

(9) 892.38

tA t

A

A

Substitute 9t into the equation and

evaluate.

Round to the nearest cent.

After 9 months, the computer is worth

$892.38.

d.

500A t

Graph this equation and your equation in

Y1 and Y2.

Use 2nd

, Trace, intersect to find the

intersection.

It will take 16.430 months for the

computer’s value to decrease to $500.

Jordan School District Page 209 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

The population of West Jordan was 106,863 in 2011. The population is growing at a rate

of 5% each year.

a. Write an equation to model the population growth.

b. If this trend continues, what will the population be in 2020?

c. How long before the population grows to 125,000 people?

a.

0( ) 1

( ) 106863 1.05

t

t

A t A r

A t

0 106863

5% 0.05

1 1 0.05 1.05

A

r

r

Substitute known values into the equation.

b.

9(9) 106863 1.05

9 165779.587

A

A

2020 2011 9t

Substitute 9t into the equation and

evaluate.

Round down to the nearest whole person.

After 9 years, the population of West

Jordan is 165,779 people.

c.

125000A t

Graph this equation and your equation in

Y1 and Y2.

Use 2nd

, Trace, intersect to find the

intersection.

It will take 16.430 months for the

computer’s value to decrease to $500.

Jordan School District Page 210 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example:

A culture of 200 bacteria is put in a petri dish and the culture doubles every hour.

a. Write an equation to model the bacteria growth.

b. If this trend continues, how many bacteria will there be in 5 hours?

c. How long before the bacteria population reaches 7000,000?

a.

0( ) tA t A b

( ) 200 2

tA t

0 200

100% 1.00

1 1 1 2

A

r

b r

Substitute known values into the equation.

b.

5

( ) 200 2

(5) 200 2

(5) 6,400

tA t

A

A

Substitute 5t into the equation and

evaluate.

After 5 hours, there are 6,400 bacteria.

c.

700,000A t

Graph this equation and your equation in

Y1 and Y2.

Use 2nd

, Trace, intersect to find the

intersection.

It will take 11.773 hours for the bacteria to

reach 700,000.

Jordan School District Page 211 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises E Solve

1. A bird species is in danger of extinction. Last year there were 1,400 birds and today only

1,308 of the birds are alive.

a. Identify the growth rate.

b. Write an equation to model the population.

c. If this trend continues, what will the population be in 10 years?

d. If the population drops below 100 then the situation will be irreversible. When

will this happen?

2. There is a fruit fly in your house. Fruit fly populations triple every day until the food

source runs out.

a. Write an equation to model the fruit fly growth.

b. If this trend continues, how many fruit flies will there be at the end of 1 week?

c. How long before the fruit fly population reaches 50,000?

3. In 2003 the population of Nigeria was 124,009,000. It has a growth rate of 3.1%.

a. Write an equation to model the population growth since 2003.

b. If this trend continues, what will the population be in 2050?

c. How long before the population grows to 200,000,000 people?

YOU DECIDE

Utah’s population was 2,763,885 in 2010 and 2,817,222 in 2011, find the growth rate. Can the

population in Utah continue to grow at this rate indefinitely? Why or why not? Justify your

answer.

Jordan School District Page 212 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 4

Applications of

Probability

Jordan School District Page 213 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 4 Cluster 1 (S.CP.1)

Applications of Probability

Cluster 1: Understand independence and conditional probability and use them to interpret data

4.1.1 Describe events as subsets of a sample space (the set of outcomes) using

characteristics (or categories) of the outcomes, or as unions, intersections, or

complements of other events (“or,” “and,” “not”).

VOCABULARY An event is an activity or experiment which is usually represented by a capital letter. A sample

space is a set of all possible outcomes for an activity or experiment. A smaller set of outcomes

from the sample space is called a subset. The complement of a subset is all outcomes in the

sample space that are not part of the subset. A subset and its complement make up the entire

sample space. If a subset is represented by A, the complement can be represented by any of the

following: not A, ~A, or Ac .

Example 1:

Event Sample Space Possible Subset Complement

Flip a coin S={heads, tails} B={heads} B tailsc

Roll a die S={1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6} even

E={2, 4, 6} ~E ={1, 3, 5}

Pick a digit 0-9 S={0,1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9} N={2, 5, 7, 9} not N= {0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 8}

VOCABULARY

Definition Example Venn Diagram

The union of two events

includes all outcomes from

each event. The union can

be indicated by the word

“or” or the symbol .

A= 0,2,4,6,8,10

B= 0,5,10,15,20

A B= 0,2,4,5,6,8,10,15,20

The intersection of two

events includes only those

outcomes that are in both

events. The intersection

can be indicated by the

word “and” or the symbol . If the two events do

NOT have anything in

common, the intersection

is the “empty set”,

indicated by { } or .

A= 0,2,4,6,8,10

B= 0,5,10,15,20

A B 0,10

Jordan School District Page 214 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 2:

The sample space is S={Green, Violet,

Turquoise, Yellow, Blue, Red, White,

Brown, Peach, Black, Magenta, Orange}

The subset of primary colors is P={Yellow,

Blue, Red}

The subset of American Flag colors is:

A={Blue, Red, White}

P A= {Yellow, Blue, Red, White}

P A= {Blue, Red}

Pc {Green, Violet, Turquoise, White,

Brown, Peach, Black, Magenta, Orange}

~ P A ={Green, Violet, Turquoise,

Brown, Peach, Black, Magenta, Orange}

Practice Exercises A

1. Choosing a letter from the alphabet.

A. List the sample space.

B. List a subset of the letters in your first name.

C. List a subset of the letters in your last name.

D. Find the union of the subsets of your first name and last name.

E. Find the intersection of the subsets of your first name and last name.

2. Given the sample space S = {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9} with event A = {3, 4, 5, 6, 7} and

event B = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}.

A. Draw a Venn diagram representing the sample space with events A and B.

B. List all the outcomes for AB.

C. List all the outcomes for AB.

D. List all the outcomes for Ac .

3. Given a standard deck of 52 cards, event A is defined as a red card and event B is defined

as the card is a diamond.

A. List all the outcomes for AB.

B. List all the outcomes for AB.

C. What is ~A?

D. What is A Ac ?

Jordan School District Page 215 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 4 Clusters 1–2 (S.CP.2, S.CP.3, S.CP.4, S.CP.5, S.CP.6, S.CP.7)

Conditional Probability

Cluster 1: Understanding and using independence and conditional probability

4.1.2 Independence of 2 events (use the product of their probabilities to determine if

they are independent) 4.1.3 Understand conditional probability and interpret the independence of A and B

using conditional probability 4.1.4 Construct and interpret two-way frequency tables; Use two-way frequency tables

to determine independence and to find conditional probabilities 4.1.5 Explain conditional probability and independence

Cluster 2: Computing probabilities of compound events 4.2.1 Find conditional probabilities 4.2.2 Apply the Addition Rule

VOCABULARY

Probability is a value that represents the likelihood that an event will occur. It can be

represented as a fraction, decimal 0 1probabiltiy , or percent. A probability of zero (0)

means that the event is impossible and a probability of one (1) means that the event must occur.

Events are independent if the occurrence of one event does not change the probability of

another event occurring. Events are dependent if the occurrence of one changes the probability

of another event occurring. For example, drawing marbles from a bag with replacement is

independent, while drawing marbles from a bag without replacement is dependent.

Joint probability is the likelihood of two or more events occurring at the same time.

Formula Description Example

number of favorable outcomes

P Atotal number of outcomes

Probability of the

individual event A

occurring.

Flipping a coin

P(heads)=1

2

P(AB)=P(A) P(B)

Joint probability

of independent

events.

Flipping a coin AND rolling a die P(heads and 5)=P(heads) P(5)

1 1=

2 6

1

12

Jordan School District Page 216 Secondary Mathematics 2

The Addition Rule

(A B) (A) (B) (A B)P P P P The addition rule finds the probability of event

A occurring or event B occurring.

A letter in the word Algebra or a letter in the

word Geometry. Where event A is Algebra and

event B is Geometry.

(A B)= (A) (B) (A B)

6 7 3

26 26 26

10 5

26 13

P P P P

Practice Exercises A

1. You have an equally likely chance of choosing an integer from 1 to 50. Find the

probability of each of the following events.

A. An even number

B. A perfect square

C. A factor of 150 is chosen

D. A two digit number is chosen

E. A multiple of 4 is chosen

F. A number less than 35 is chosen

G. A prime number is chosen

H. A perfect cube is chosen

2. You randomly chose two marbles, replacing the first marble before drawing again, from a

bag containing 10 black, 8 red, 4 white, and 6 blue marbles. Find the probability of each

of the following events.

A. A white marble, then a red marble is selected.

B. A red marble is not selected, then a blue marble is selected.

C. A green marble, then a green marble is selected.

D. A blue or black marble is selected, then a white marble is selected.

3.

Drawing a card from the cards on the left, determine

the probability of each of the following.

A. P(Even or shaded)

B. P(White or odd)

C. P(Less than four or shaded)

D. P(Greater than five or shaded)

E. P(Factor of ten or white)

Jordan School District Page 217 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 1:

P(peach)=1

12

P(color in American flag)=3 1

12 4

P(primary color and American flag)=2 1

12 6

P(pink)=0

012

Practice Exercises B Using the Venn diagram, answer the following questions.

1. P(girls)

3. P(not sports)

5. P(girls and sports)

2. P(sports, not girls)

4. P(not sports, not girls)

6. P(Mr. P class)

Example 2:

Curfew:

Yes

Curfew:

No Total

Chores:

Yes 13 5 18

Chores:

No 12 3 15

Total 25 8 33

P(has chores)=18

33

P(doesn’t have a curfew)=8

33

P(has a curfew and chores)=13

33

P(has chores doesn’t have a curfew)=5

33

P(has a curfew)=25

33

Jordan School District Page 218 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises C

Find the marginal totals. Then use the table to find the probabilities below.

Brown hair Blonde hair Red hair Black hair Other hair Total

Male 42 11 3 17 27

Female 47 16 13 9 15

Total

1. P(male) 2. P(red hair) 3. P(other hair)

4. P(blonde hair male) 5. P(black hair and female) 6. P(brown hair not male)

7. P(female not other hair) 8. P(not female not male) 9. P(red hair and black hair)

VOCABULARY Two events are independent if P(A) P(B)=P(AB)

Example 3:

10th

11th

12th

Total

Male 320 297 215 832

Female 285 238 216 739

Total 605 535 431 1571

1. Are being a male and being in 10th

independent?

2. Are being a female and being in 12th

grade independent?

1.

P(male)=832

1571

P(10th

grade)=605

1571

P(male 10th

grade)=320

1571

832

1571

605

1571

?

320

1571

0.204 0.204

The product of the probabilities of the

individual events is equal to the probability of

the intersection of the events; therefore the

events are independent.

2.

P(female)=739

1571

P(12th

grade)=431

1571

P(female 12th

grade)=216

1571

739

1571

431

1571

?

216

1571

0.129 0.137

The product of the probabilities of the

individual events is not equal to the probability

of the intersection of the events; therefore the

events are not independent.

Jordan School District Page 219 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises D

Determine whether or not the following events are independent.

1. If P(A)=0.7, P(B)=0.3, and P(AB)=0.21, are events A and B independent? Why or why

not?

2. Jaron has a dozen cupcakes. Three are chocolate with white frosting, three are chocolate with

yellow frosting, four are vanilla with white frosting, and two are vanilla with yellow frosting.

Are cake flavor and frosting color independent?

3.

Dance Sports TV Total

Men 2 10 8 20

Women 16 6 8 30

Total 18 16 16 50

The above table represents the favorite leisure activities for 50 adults. Use it to answer the

following:

A. Find the probability of your gender.

B. Find the probability of your favorite leisure activity.

C. Find the probability of P(your gender your favorite leisure activity).

D. Are your gender and your favorite leisure activity independent?

VOCABULARY

A probability that takes into account a given condition is called a conditional probability. A

given condition is when we already know the outcome of one of the events. For example, when

flipping a coin and rolling a die, the probability of “rolling a 6 given heads”, means we already

know the coin has resulted in heads. This is written P(6 | heads).

The conditional probability formula is ( )

|( )

P A BP A B

P B

.

Jordan School District Page 220 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 4:

A bakery sells vanilla and chocolate cupcakes

with white or blue icing.

White Blue Total

Vanilla 3 5 8

Chocolate 6 7 13

Total 9 12 21

(Vanilla Blue)(Vanilla Blue)

(Blue)

5

12

PP

P

(White Chocolate)(White Chocolate)

(Chocolate)

6

13

PP

P

Alex’s favorite cupcake is chocolate with blue

icing. What is the probability he will get his

favorite cupcake if all the vanilla cupcakes

have already been sold?

(Blue Chocolate)(Blue Chocolate)

(Chocolate)

7

13

PP

P

Example 5:

(iPod CellPhone)(iPod CellPhone)

(CellPhone)

10 2

25 5

PP

P

(CellPhone NoiPod)(CellPhone NoiPod)

(NoiPod)

15 15 5

15 6 21 7

PP

P

Miss K finds an iPod after class. What is the

probability the owner has an iPod and no cell

phone?

(iPod NoCellPhone)(iPod NoCellPhone)

(NoCellPhone)

4 4 2

4 6 10 5

PP

P

Jordan School District Page 221 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises E

Bus Private Car Walk Total

Male 146 166 82 394

Female 154 185 64 403

Total 300 351 146 797

Use the table above to answer the following questions.

1. P(Walk | Female) 2. P(Male | Private Car)

3. P(Bus | Male) 4. P(Female | Doesn’t Walk)

5. What is the probability that Melissa

rides the bus? Write the conditional

probability equation and then find

the probability.

6. Jordan walks to school. What is the

probability Jordan is male? Write the

conditional probability equation and

then find the probability.

Use the Venn diagram above to answer the following questions.

7. P(After School Job | Male)

8. P(Female | No After School Job)

9. P(No After School Job | Male) 10. P(Male | After School Job)

11. Is the probability of having an after

school job given you are male the

same as the probability of being

male given that you have an after

school job? Use the probabilities in

#7 and #10 to justify your answer.

12. A student works at McTaco Chimes

what is the probability the student is

female?

Jordan School District Page 222 Secondary Mathematics 2

VOCABULARY Events A and B are independent if and only if they satisfy the probability A given B equals the

probability of A OR the probability of B given A equals the probability of B.

( ) ( )P A B P A or ( ) ( )P B A P B

Example 6:

A bakery sells vanilla and chocolate cupcakes

with white or blue icing.

White Blue Total

Vanilla 3 5 8

Chocolate 6 7 13

Total 9 12 21

Are color of icing and cupcake flavor

independent?

?

?

?

( ) ( )

( )( )

( )

5 12

8 21

0.625 0.571

P Blue Vanilla P Blue

P Blue VanillaP Blue

P Vanilla

Therefore the color of icing and cupcake flavor

are not independent.

Note: Keep in mind the above can also be tested using any of the following options.

1. ?

(Blue Chocolate) (Blue)P P 2. ?

(Vanilla Blue) (Vanilla)P P

3. ?

(Chocolate Blue) (Chocolate)P P 4. ?

(White Chocolate) (White)P P

5. ?

(White Vanilla) (White)P P 6. ?

(Vanilla White) (Vanilla)P P

7. ?

(Chocolate White) (Chocolate)P P

Jordan School District Page 223 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 7:

Are having an iPod and having a cell phone

independent?

?

?

?

(iPod Cell Phone) (iPod)

(iPod Cell Phone)(iPod)

(Cell Phone)

10 14

25 35

2 2

5 5

P P

PP

P

Therefore, having an iPod and having a cell

phone are independent.

Practice Exercises F

Students were asked what their main goal for their high school years was. The reported goals

were getting good grades, being popular, or excelling at sports.

Goals

Grades Popular Sports Total

Boy 117 50 60 227

Girl 130 91 30 251

Total 247 141 90 478

Use the table above to answer the following questions.

1. Is the probability of having good grades as a goal independent of gender?

2. Is gender independent of having popularity as a goal?

3. Workers at Cal Q Lus Copies were polled to see if Vitmain C was a way to reduce the

likelihood of getting a cold. According to the diagram, are you less likely to catch a cold

if you are taking vitamin C? Justify your answer using conditional probability.

4. Real estate ads suggest that 64% of homes for sale have garages, 21% have swimming

pools, and 17% have both features. Are having a garage and having a pool independent

events? Justify your answer using conditional probability.

Jordan School District Page 224 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 4 Cluster 2 & 3 Honors (S.CP.8, S.CP.9, S.MD.6, S.MD.7)

Applications of Probability

Cluster 2: Computing probabilities of compound events

4.2.3 Apply the general Multiplication Rule

4.2.4 Use permutations and combinations to compute probabilities of compound events

Cluster 3: Using probability to evaluate outcomes of decisions

4.3.1 Use probability to make fair decisions

4.3.2 Analyze decisions and strategies

VOCABULARY A compound event consists of two or more simple events. Tossing a coin is a simple event.

Tossing two or more coins is a compound event. A compound event is shown as

P(A ) ( ) ( )B P A P B

A tree diagram is a way of illustrating compound events. Each simple event adds new branches

to the tree diagram. The end result shows all possible outcomes.

When events are independent, the probability of a compound event is the product of the

probability of the desired outcome for each simple event. This is the general Multiplication Rule.

Example 1:

This is a tree diagram

representing the possible

outcomes when tossing three

different coins.

There are eight possible

outcomes.

This would be the same

representation if looking at the

outcomes of tossing one coin

three separate times.

1 1 1 1P(HHH)

2 2 2 8

1 1 1 1P(THH)

2 2 2 8

Start

H

H H HHH

T HHT

T H HTH

T HTT

T

H H THH

T THT

T H TTH

T TTT

Penny Nickel Result

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

Dime

1(H)

2

1(T)

2

P

P

Jordan School District Page 225 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 2:

This is a tree diagram

representing the possible

outcomes when tossing

one coin and rolling one

die.

1 1 1P(H 1)

2 6 12

1 5 5P(T 1)

2 6 12not

Practice Exercises A

Using a tree diagram find the following probabilities.

1. Sophomores are required to either take English 10 or English 10H. They need Secondary

Math 2, Secondary Math 2H, or Pre-Calculus. Sophomores also need either Biology or

Chemistry.

A. Draw a tree diagram representing all

sophomore choices.

B. P(Eng10, Sec2H, Chem.)

C. P(Eng10H, Sec2, Bio.)

D. P(Eng10H, Sec2H, PreCalc)

2. You have the following objects: a spinner with five choices, a six-sided die, and a coin.

P(spinner, die, coin)

A. Draw a tree diagram satisfying the following: a choice on the spinner, a one or two

vs. anything else on the die (Hint: (1 2)P vs ( 1 2)P not ), and heads or tails.

B. P(5, 1 or 2, H) C. P(even, not 1 or 2, T)

D. P(1, 1 or 2, H) E. P(6, not 1 or 2, T)

F. P(number < 6, not 1 or 2, H) G. P(odd, 1 or 2, T)

Start

H "1" H 1

not "1" H not 1

T "1" T1

not "1" T not 1

COIN DIE RESULT

12

12

16

16

56

56

112

112

512

512

1( )

2P H

1( )

2P T

1(1)

6P

5( 1)

6P not

Jordan School District Page 226 Secondary Mathematics 2

VOCABULARY

Probability of Two Dependent Events: If two events, A and B, are dependent, then the

probability of both events occurring is .P A B P A P B A In other words, the

probability of both events occurring is the probability of event A times the probability of event B

given that A has already occurred. Likewise, ( )P B A P B P A B . These formulas can be

extended to any number of independent events.

Example 3:

There are 7 dimes and 9 pennies in a wallet. Suppose two coins are to be selected at random,

without replacing the first one. Find the probability of picking a penny and then a dime.

(penny, then dime) penny dime|first coin was penny

number of pennies number of dimes after a penny has been drawn

number of coins number of coins after a penny has been drawn

9 7

16 15

21

80

P P P

Example 4:

A basket contains 4 plums, 6 peaches, and 5 oranges. What is the probability of picking 2

oranges, then a peach if 3 pieces of fruit are selected at random?

Example 5:

A cereal company conducts a blind taste test. 55% of those surveyed are women and 45% are

men. 75% of the women surveyed like the cereal, and 85% of the men like the cereal. What is the

probability that a person selected at random is:

A. A woman who likes the cereal?

B. A man who likes the cereal?

C. A woman who doesn’t like the

cereal?

D. A man who doesn’t like the

cereal?

A. woman like woman like womanP P P

0.55 0.75 0.4125

B. man like man like manP P P

0.45 0.85 0.3825

C. woman dislike woman dislike womanP P P

0.55 0.25 0.1375

D. man dislike man dislike manP P P

0.45 0.15 0.0675

2 oranges, then peach orange orange after orange peach after 2 oranges

5 4 6 120 4

15 14 13 2730 91

P P P P

Jordan School District Page 227 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

1. A photographer has taken 8 black and white photographs and 10 color photographs for a

brochure. If 4 photographs are selected at random, what is the probability of picking first 2

black and white photographs, then 2 color photographs?

2. There are 7 blue pens, 3 black pens, and 2 red pens in a drawer. If you select three pens at

random with no replacement, what is the probability that you will select a blue pen, then a

black pen, then another blue pen?

3. Tammy’s mom is baking cookies for a bake sale. When Tammy comes home, there are 22

chocolate chip cookies, 18 sugar cookies, and 15 oatmeal cookies on the counter. Tammy

sneaks into the kitchen, grabs a cookie at random, and eats it. Five minutes later, she does

the same thing with another cookie. What is the probability that neither of the cookies was a

chocolate chip cookie?

4. There are 2 Root Beers, 2 Sprites, 3 Mountain Dews, and 1 Gatorade left in the vending

machine at school. The machines buttons are broken and will randomly give you a random

drink no matter what button you push. Find the probability of each outcome?

A. root beer, root beerP

C. sprite, gatoradeP

B. root beer, mountain dewP

D. mountain dew, mountain dew, mountain dewP

5. A department store employs high school students, all juniors and seniors. 60% of the

employees are juniors. 50% of the seniors are females and 75% of the juniors are males.

One student employee is chosen at random. What is the probability of choosing:

A. A female junior

C. A male junior

B. A female senior

D. A male senior

6. There are 400 fans at a baseball game that get popcorn and hotdogs. 75% of the fans getting

food are adults and the rest are children. 80% of the children getting food are eating hotdogs

and 40% of the adults getting food are getting popcorn. One fan is chosen at random to

receive free food. What is the probability of choosing:

A. An adult with popcorn

C. An adult with a hotdog

B. A child with popcorn

D. A child with a hotdog

Jordan School District Page 228 Secondary Mathematics 2

VOCABULARY

The factorial function (symbol: !) is a way to multiply a series of descending natural numbers.

! 1 2 3 2 1n n n n is the general formula representing a factorial function. For

instance, 5! 5 4 3 2 1 120 . By definition 0! 1 and 1! 1 .

A permutation is a combination, or an arrangement of a group of objects, where order matters.

For instance a lock combination or batting orders are examples where the order matters. If we

look at the letters A, B, and C there are six ways to arrange the letters, ie: ABC, ACB, BAC,

BCA, CBA, CAB.

The number of ways to arrange n distinct objects is indicated by !n

For example, in how many orders can a person read 5 different magazines?

This is found by finding 5! or 5 4 3 2 1 120 . So, there are 120 different orders in which are

person can read 5 different magazines.

The number of ways to arrange n distinct objects taking them r at a time is indicated by

n r

!P

!

n

n r

, where n and r are whole numbers and n r . If n r then nPr !n .

For example, in how many orders can a person read 5 magazines selected from a list of 9

possibilities?

This is found by finding 9 5

9! 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1P 9 8 7 6 5 15,120

9 5 ! 4 3 2 1

. So, there

are 15,120 different orders in which a person can ready 5 magazines selected from a list of 9

possibilities.

Permutations with n objects where one or more objects repeats, requires taking into consideration

each item that is repeated. Use the formula 1 2

!

! ! !k

n

s s s where 1s represents the number of times

the first object is repeated.

For example, how many way can you arrange the letters in ? KNICKKNACK

There are 10 letters with 4 K’s, 2 C’s, and 2 N’s. The total number of arrangements is

1 2

! 10!37,800

! ! ! 4! 2! 2!k

n

s s s

Note: All of the probability functions on your graphing calculator can be found by selecting

MATH then arrow over to PRB.

Jordan School District Page 229 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 6: You have just purchased 15 new CDs and want to add them to your iPod. You don’t want to

remove any music already on your iPod and there is only room for 5 more CDs. How many ways

can you add 5 different CDs to your iPod?

15 5

15!

15 5 !

15!360,360

10!

P

There are 360,360 ways you can add 5

different CDs from your15 choices to your

iPod.

n =15

r = 5

Use

!nPr

!

n

n r

Example 7:

Find the number of distinguishable permutations for the word MISSISSIPPI.

11!34,650

4! 4! 2!

There are 34, 650 distinguishable permutations

for the word MISSISSIPPI

n = 11

1s = I = 4

2s = S = 4

3s = P = 2

Use 1 2

!nPr

! ! !k

n

s s s

Practice Exercises C

Compute.

1. 8 3P 2. 6 6P 3. 7 0P 4. 10 1P

Find the number of distinguishable permutations for the following words.

5. MATHEMATICS 6. SALT LAKE CITY 7. CHEMISTRY

Solve the following.

8. It is time to elect sophomore class officers. There are 12 people running for four positions:

president, vice president, secretary, and historian. How many distinct ways can those

positions be filled?

9. You just received 7 new movies in the mail. You only have time to watch 3 this weekend.

How many distinct ways can you watch the movies this weekend?

10. The Discriminants are giving a short evening performance. Their latest CD has 14 songs on

it; however they only have enough time to perform 8 songs. How many distinct

performances can they give?

Jordan School District Page 230 Secondary Mathematics 2

VOCABULARY When we are considering combinations we are only considering the number of groupings. For

instance selecting people to a committee or choosing pizza toppings are examples where the order

does not matter.

The number of ways to group n distinct objects taking them r at a time is indicated by

n r

!C

! !

n

r n r

, where n and r are whole numbers and n r .

Example 8: Honors English students are required to read 8 books from a list of 25. How many combinations

could a student select?

25 8

25!C

8! 25 8 !

25!

8! 17 !

1,081,575

A student has 1,081,575 different groupings of

books they could read.

n =25

r = 8

Use n r

!C

! !

n

r n r

Practice Exercises D

Compute

1. 11 6C 2. 32 0C 3. 65 62C 4. 100 96C

Solve the following.

5. Four members from a group of 18 on the board of directors at the Fa La La School of Arts

will be selected to go to a convention (all expenses paid) in Hawaii. How many different

groups of 4 are there?

6. You have just purchased a new video game console. With the purchase you are given the

option of obtaining three free games from a selection of ten. How many combinations of

games can you choose?

7. You are the manager of a new clothing store. You need 5 new employees and have 20

qualified applicants. How many ways can you staff the store?

Jordan School District Page 231 Secondary Mathematics 2

You Decide You are registering for your junior year in school. Your school is on a block schedule, four

periods each day. You must take the following courses: English, history, math, and science. You

can fill the other four periods with classes of your choice.

English Math Science History Elective

English 11

English 11H

Concurrent

AP

Sec Math 3

Sec Math 3H

PreCalculus

Calculus

Concurrent

Intro. to Stats

AP Stats

Personal Finance

Biology

Chemistry

Physics

AP Biology

AP Chem

AP Physics

Anatomy

Wild Life Bio

Bio Ag.

Genetics

Astronomy

Geology

Zoology

U.S.

U.S. Honors

AP U.S

Law Enforcement

World Religions

European Hist. Craft

Psychology

AP Psychology

Sociology

Language

Band

Orchestra

Choir

Dance

Drama

Photo

Ceramics

Painting

Drawing

PE

Sports Medicine

Interior Design

Business

Marketing

Web Page Design

Woods

Drafting

Auto

Sewing

Foods

Child Development

Pre-School

Financial Lit

Green House

Release Time

A. If you are not focusing on the order of your classes, how many different schedules could

you construct?

B. Now that you have chosen your classes, how many ways could you set up your schedule?

C. Now that you have chosen your classes, if your Math class must be the first period of the

day, how many different schedules can you now have?

Jordan School District Page 232 Secondary Mathematics 2

Using Permutations and Combinations to Determine Probabilities of Events

Recall

Probability is number of favorable outcomes ( )

total number of outcomes ( )

P EP

P S .

Example 9:

A standard deck of face cards consists of 52 cards, 4 suits (red diamonds, red hearts, black

spades, black clubs), and 13 cards in each suit, (numbers 2 through 10, jack, queen, king, ace).

What is the probability that the hand consists of 5 red cards?

26 5

52 5

5 red cards

65,780

2,598,960

0.025

CP

C

The total number of outcomes is 52 5C .

There are 26 red cards, so 26 5C is the number

of ways to choose 5 red cards.

Example 10:

Using a standard deck of face cards, what is the probability that the hand consists of 1 diamond?

39 4 13 1

52 5

one diamond

82,251 13

2,598,960

1,069,2630.411

2,598,960

C CP

C

The total number of outcomes is 52 5C .

There are 39 cards that are not diamonds, so

39 4C is the number of ways to choose 4 cards

that are not diamonds. There are 13

diamonds so 13 1C is the way to choose 1

diamond.

Practice Exercises E

1. There are 14 black pens and 8 blue pens in a drawer. If 3 pens are chosen at random, what is

the probability that they are all blue?

2. Sam has 9 pairs of socks in a drawer: 5 white pairs and 4 gray pairs. If he chooses three

pairs at random to pack for a trip, find the probability that he chooses exactly two white

pairs.

3. A bag contains 14 cherry, 15 lime, and 10 grape suckers. Find the probability of picking 3

cherry suckers and 2 grape suckers if 5 suckers are chosen at random.

4. Barbara has a collection of 28 movies, including 12 comedies and 16 dramas. She selects 3

movies at random to lend to a friend. What is the probability of her selecting 3 comedies?

5. Five books are chosen at random from a best-seller list that includes 12 novels and 6

biographies. Find the probability of selecting 3 novels, and 2 biographies.

Jordan School District Page 233 Secondary Mathematics 2

Using Probability Models to Analyze Situations and Make Decisions

Example 11: The addition game is played by rolling two dice. Player 1 gets a point if the sum of the two dice

is even. Player 2 gets a point if the sum of the two dice is odd. Use probability to determine if

this game is fair.

VOCABULARY

A game in which all participants have an equal chance of winning is a fair game. Similarly, a

fair decision is based on choices that have the same likelihood of being chosen.

Fair Decisions and Random Numbers

In order for a decision to be fair each possible outcome must be equally likely. For example if

you are hosting a party that includes 20 people and want to randomly choose 5 people to bring

treats there are multiple ways in which to make a fair and unfair decision.

A fair decision would be to assign each person a number. Write each of these numbers on a

separate piece of paper and drop them into a hat. Shuffle the numbers in the hat and choose five

papers to match five party members. These five people would be assigned to bring treats. This is

often referred to as “drawing lots”.

An unfair decision would be to write each person’s name on a piece of paper. Then arrange the

papers in alphabetical order. Starting with the first paper, flip a coin and record the result: heads

or tails. The first five friends that have a tail flipped for them must bring treats. This is unfair

because you will probably never flip a coin for your friends that have names that begin with

letters at the end of the alphabet.

Often Random Numbers are used to help you make fair decisions. For an event to be random

there is no pre-determined bias towards any particular outcome. Often people use random

number tables, random number generators on a calculator, or simply shuffle pieces of papers that

have numbers printed on them.

There are six possible outcomes for each

dice.

Using the general multiplication rule

6 6 36 .

Start by determining how many different

outcomes can occur when rolling two dice.

Rolling Sums that are Even

1, 1 2, 2 3, 1 4, 2 5, 1 6, 2

1, 3 2, 4 3, 3 4, 4 5, 3 6, 4

1, 5 2, 6 3, 5 4, 6 5, 5 6, 6

Determine the number of ways that you can roll

an even number and an odd number by listing all

possible outcomes

Jordan School District Page 234 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 12: The multiplication game is played by rolling two dice. Player 1 gets a point if the product of the

two dice is even and player 2 gets a point if the product of the two dice is odd. Use probability

to determine if this game is fair.

Rolling Sums that are Odd

1, 2 2, 1 3, 2 4, 1 5, 2 6, 1

1, 4 2, 3 3, 4 4, 3 5, 4 6, 3

1, 6 2, 5 3, 6 4, 5 5, 6 6, 5

There are 18 ways to roll an even sum and 18

ways to roll an odd sum.

18(even) 0.50

36

18(odd) 0.50

36

P

P

Calculate the probability of rolling an even sum.

Calculate the probability of rolling an odd sum.

This game is fair because each player has the same probability of rolling and even or odd

number.

There are six possible outcomes for each dice.

Using the general multiplication rule 6 6 36 .

Start by determining how many different

outcomes can occur when rolling two dice.

Rolling a Product that is Even

1, 2 2, 1 3, 2 4, 1 5, 2 6, 1

1, 4 2, 2 3, 4 4, 2 5, 4 6, 2

1, 6 2, 3 3, 6 4, 3 5, 6 6, 3

2, 4 4, 4 6, 4

2, 5 4, 5 6, 5

2, 6 4, 6 6, 6

Rolling a Product that is Even

1, 1 3, 1 5, 1

1, 3 3, 3 5, 3

1, 5 3, 5 5, 5

There are 27 ways to roll a product that is even and

9 ways to roll a product that is odd.

Determine the number of ways that you

can roll and even number and an odd

number by listing all possible outcomes

27(even) 0.75

36

9(odd) 0.25

36

P

P

Calculate the probability of rolling an even

product.

Calculate the probability of rolling an odd

product.

This game is not fair because the probability of rolling an even product is higher than rolling an

odd product.

Jordan School District Page 235 Secondary Mathematics 2

Spinner BSpinner A

43

85

91

Example 13:

Suppose each player spins the spinner once. Player A using spinner A, and Player B using

spinner B. The one with the larger number wins.

To determine how many possible outcomes there

are, list all the outcomes or use the general

multiplication rule.

1, 4 1, 3 1, 8

5, 4 5, 3 5, 8

9, 4 9, 3 9, 8

3 3 9

There are 9 possible outcomes.

Start by determining how many possible

outcomes there are.

List the number of ways in which player A wins

5, 4 5, 3 9, 4 9, 3 9, 8

List the number of ways in which play B wins

1, 4 1, 3 1, 8 5, 8

Count the number of ways in which player A

wins and the number of ways in which player

B wins.

number of ways player A wins 5( ) .5

total number of outcomes 9P A

number of ways player B wins 4( ) .4

total number of outcomes 9P B

Find the probability that player A will win or

P(A) and the probability that player B will

win or P(B).

This game is not fair because player A has a higher probability of winning.

Jordan School District Page 236 Secondary Mathematics 2

Using Probability to Analyze Decisions

Understanding the probability or expected outcomes from probability models and experiments

can help us make good decisions.

Example 14:

Mr. Green created a frequency table to collect data about his students and how their study habits

related to performance in his class. The table is shown below.

Studied Did not Study Totals

Passed 16 6 22

Failed 2 12 14

Totals 18 18 36

What is the probability that a student who studies will pass the class?

What is the probability that a student that does not study will pass his class?

Based off of these probabilities, if you want to pass the class should you study or not?

Find (studied | passed)P and (didnot study | passed)P .

number of students that studiedand passed 16(studied | passed) 0.8

totalnumber of students that studied 18P

number of students that did not studyand passed 6(did not study | passed) .3

totalnumber of students that studied 18P

There is a higher probability that a student will pass the class if they study

Example 15:

A teacher is conducting an action research project to determine the effectiveness of an

instructional strategy. The new instructional strategy was used with two class periods of 45

students each, and the traditional teaching method was used with 2 class periods of 45 students

each. Students were given a pre- and a post-exam to determine whether or not they improved

after the instruction. The results are shown in the table below.

Improved

Did not

Improve Total

Received the new

strategy

78 12 90

Received the traditional

method

35 55 90

Totals 123 67 180

Jordan School District Page 237 Secondary Mathematics 2

What is the probability that a student improved given that he was instructed with the new

strategy?

What is the probability that a student received the traditional method of instruction given that he

did not improve?

If the teacher decided that the new instructional strategy was more effective than the traditional

method of teaching, did she make a good decision?

Find (improved | new)P and (traditional | no improvement)P .

number of students that improved with the new stratgy 78(improved | new) 0.86

totalnumber of students with new strategy 90P

number of students that did not improve with traditional(traditional | no improvement)

totalnumber of students that did not improve

55(traditional | no improvement) .821

67

P

P

There is a higher probability that a student will improve from the pre- to the post-exam if the

new instructional strategy is used.

Practice Exercises F

The table below shows the number of students at a certain high school who took an ACT

preparatory class before taking the ACT exam and the number of students whose scores were at

or above the minimum requirement for college entrance.

Prep Class

No Prep

Class Totals

At or above minimum

requirement 268 210 478

Below minimum

requirement 57 115 172

Totals 325 325 650

1. What is the probability that a student scored at or above the minimum requirement for

college entrance given that he or she took the ACT preparatory class?

2. What is the probability that a student scored below the minimum requirement given that he

or she did not take the ACT preparatory class?

3. A student decides not to take the preparatory class before taking the ACT exam. Is this a

good decision? Explain your answer.

Jordan School District Page 238 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 5

Similarity, Right

Triangle Trigonometry,

and Proof

Jordan School District Page 239 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 5 Cluster 1 (G.SRT.1, G.SRT.2, G.SRT.3)

Understand Similarity in terms of similarity transformations

Cluster 1: Understanding similarity in terms of transformations

5.1.1: Dilation with a center and scale factor, with a parallel line and a line segment

5.1.2: Transformations with similarity using equality of corresponding angles and

proportionality of corresponding sides

5.1.3: Establish criterion of AA using similarity transformations

VOCABULARY

A dilation is a transformation that produces an image that is the same shape as the original

figure but the image is a different size. The dilation uses a center and a scale factor to create a

proportional figure.

The center of dilation is a fixed point in the plane about which all points are expanded or

contracted.

The scale factor is the ratio of the new image to the original image (i.e. if the original figure has

a length of 2 and the new figure has a length of 4, the scale factor is 4

22 .)

' ' 'A B C (the image) is a dilation of ABC

(the pre-image) with a scale factor of 3.

The origin, point O, is the center of dilation.

1,0

1, 2

5, 2

A

B

C

' 3,0

' 3,6

' 15,6

A

B

C

The ratio of the lengths from the center of

dilation to each coordinate is equal to the scale

factor.

' ' '

3OA OB OC

OA OB OC

Jordan School District Page 240 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 1: Center at the origin

Dilate the triangle with vertices (0,0)A , (4,0)B and (4,3)C by a scale factor of 2 and center at

(0,0) .

Draw the triangle and label its vertices.

' ' will be twice as long as .A B AB Since the center of the

dilation is at (0,0) , 'A is mapped to (0,0) while 'B is

mapped to (8,0) . This makes ' ' 8A B which is twice the

length of AB . Similarly, ' 'A C will be twice as long as

AC , mapping 'C to (8,6) . ' 'B C will be twice as long as

BC .

Example 2: Center at the origin

Dilate the triangle with vertices (1,1)A , (4,1)B and (4,4)C by a scale factor of 3 and center at

(0,0) .

Draw the triangle and label its vertices.

A B

C

A B

C

'C

'B

A B

C

Jordan School District Page 241 Secondary Mathematics 2

' 'A B will be three times as long as AB . Since the center of

the dilation is at (0,0) , 'A is mapped to (3,3) while 'B is

mapped to (12,3) . This makes ' ' 9A B which is three

times the length of AB . Similarly, ' 'A C will be three

times as long as AC , mapping 'C to (12,12) . ' 'B C will

be three times as long as BC .

Dilations can be performed on other shapes besides triangles. The shapes can be in any of the

four quadrants or even in more than one quadrant. The dilation can also shrink the original shape

instead of enlarging it.

Example 3: Center at the origin

Dilate a parallelogram with vertices ( 4,4)A , (6,6)B , (6, 2)C and ( 4, 4)D by a scale factor

of 1

2 and center at (0,0) .

Draw the parallelogram and label its vertices.

Coordinates of Vertices

4,4 ' 2,2A A

6,6 ' 3,3B B

6, 2 ' 3, 1C C

4, 4 ' 2, 2D D

Measure of Side Lengths

2 26, ' ' 26AB A B

2 26, ' ' 26CD C D

8, ' ' 4AD A D

8, ' ' 4BC B C

AB

C

'C

'B'A

AB

C

'C

'B'A

'D

D

A

B

C

D

Jordan School District Page 242 Secondary Mathematics 2

If the center of the dilation is not at the origin, then you will want to use graph paper and rulers

or dynamic geometry software such as: Geogebra or Geometer’s Sketchpad. Geogebra is a free

download and can be found at http://www.geogebra.org/cms/.

Example 4: Center not at the origin

Dilate the triangle with vertices ( 1,1)A , ( 4,4)B and ( 5,1)C by a scale factor of 2 and center

at ( 1,1) .

Coordinates of Vertices

1,1 ' 1,1A A

4,4 ' 7,7B B

5,1 ' 9,1C C

Measure of Side Lengths

3 2, ' ' 6 2AB A B

4, ' ' 8AC A C

10, ' ' 2 10CB C B

Example 5: Center not at the origin

Dilate the square with vertices ( 1,1)A , ( 4,1)B , ( 4,4)C and ( 1,4)D by a scale factor of 2

and center at ( 4,4) .

Coordinates of Vertices

1,1 ' 2, 2A A

4,1 ' 4, 2B B

4,4 ' 4,4C C

1,4 ' 2,4C C

Measure of Side Lengths

3, ' ' 6AB A B

3 ' ' 6AD A D

3, ' ' 6BC B C

3, ' ' 6CD C D

'C

'B

'A

B

C

B

C D

A

'B 'A

'D

Jordan School District Page 243 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises A

Draw the dilation image of each figure with given center and scale factor.

1. Center 0,0 ; scale factor 3

2. Center 0,0 ; scale factor 2

3. Center 0,0 ; scale factor 12

4. Center 4, 1 ; scale factor

2

5. Center 3,4 ; scale factor 3

6. Center 2, 5 ; scale factor

2

7. Graph the pre-image with given vertices.

2,4J , 4,4K , and 3,2P . Then

graph the image with center of dilation at

the origin and a scale factor of 2.

8. Graph the pre-image with given vertices.

2,4J , 4,4K , and 3,2P . Then

graph the image with center of dilation at

the origin and a scale factor of 12.

Determine whether each statement is true or false.

9. A dilation with a scale factor greater than

1 will shrink the image.

10. For a dilation, corresponding angles of

the image and pre-image are congruent.

11. A dilation image cannot have any points

in common with its pre-image.

12. A dilation preserves length.

Jordan School District Page 244 Secondary Mathematics 2

Similarity

VOCABULARY

Two figures are similar if and only if there is a dilation that maps one figure onto the other. In

the new figure, corresponding angles are congruent and corresponding sides are proportional to

the original figure. You can denote that two figures are similar by using the symbol . For

example, ABC DEF .

Optional Exploration Activity

Is it sufficient to know that two angles are congruent to two corresponding angles in another

triangle in order to conclude that the two triangles are similar?

Step 1: Using graph paper, dynamic geometry software or patty paper, have students construct

any triangle and label its vertices.

Step 2: Construct a second triangle with two angles that measure the same as two angles in the

first triangle.

Step 3: Measure the lengths of the sides of both triangles and compare the ratios of the

corresponding sides.

Step 4: Compare your results to those of other students.

Example 1: State if the triangles in each pair are similar. If so, state how you know they are

similar and create the similarity statement.

Since VUT LKJ , VTU LJK , and

the angles of a triangle add to 180 , the third

set of angles must also be congruent. The

angles are congruent which forces the

corresponding sides to be proportional.

TUV JKL because the corresponding angles are congruent.

LK

J

T

V

U

55

45

55 45

Jordan School District Page 245 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 2: State if the triangles in each pair are similar. If so, state how you know they are

similar and create the similarity statement.

Find the sets of corresponding sides and show

that they have the same ratio of proportionality.

AC looks similar to HF , 84

614

AC

HF

BC looks similar to GF , 48

68

BC

GF

AB looks similar to HG , 72

612

AB

HG

ABC HGF because the sets of corresponding sides are proportional which will force the

angles to be congruent. This is SSS similarity.

Example 3: State if the triangles in each pair are similar. If so, state how you know they are

similar and create the similarity statement.

DE ST , therefore D T because

alternate interior angles are congruent.

EUD SUT because they are vertical

angles.

By AA similarity SUT EUD .

You can also show that the corresponding sides

are proportional.

SU looks similar to EU , 32

216

SU

EU

TU looks similar to DU , 24

212

TU

EU

SUT EUD because the sets of corresponding sides are proportional and the included

angle is congruent. This is called SAS similarity.

C B

A

H

G F

14

8

12

72

84

48

Jordan School District Page 246 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

Are the following triangles similar? If so, write a similarity statement.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

Jordan School District Page 247 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises C

Identify the similar triangles and write a similarity statement. Then find the value for x and the

measure of the indicated sides.

1. ML and LK

2. MN and MJ

3. KM and OP

4. JK and JL

Jordan School District Page 248 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 5 Cluster 2 (G.CO.9)

Prove Theorems about Lines and Angles

Cluster 2: Prove Geometric Theorems

5.2.1 Prove theorems about lines and angles: vertical angles, alternate interior

angles, corresponding angles, points on a perpendicular bisector of a segment

VOCABULARY

Two nonadjacent angles formed by two intersecting lines

are called vertical angles or opposite angles. For example,

AEB and DEC are vertical angles.

A line that intersects two or more lines in a plane at

different points is called a transversal. Transversal p

intersects lines q and r.

When two parallel lines are intersected by a transversal,

angles that are in the same position at each intersection are

called corresponding angles. For example, 1 and 5 ,

2 and 6 , 3 and 7 , 4 and 8 are all corresponding

angles.

When two parallel lines are intersected by a transversal,

angles that are inside of the two parallel lines, but on

opposite sides of the transversal are called alternate

interior angles. For example, 3 and 5 , and 4 and

6 are both alternate interior angles.

A segment, line, or ray perpendicular to a given segment

that cuts the segment into two congruent parts is called a

perpendicular bisector. For example, CD is the

perpendicular bisector of AB .

Jordan School District Page 249 Secondary Mathematics 2

Theorems and Postulates

This unit of the core requires students to create proofs, formal or informal, to prove the following

theorems and postulates. Example proofs will be provided; however, teachers will probably do

tasks with students to complete these proofs in class.

Vertical Angle Theorem: If two angles are vertical angles, then they are congruent.

Corresponding Angle Postulate: If two parallel lines are cut by a transversal, then each pair of

corresponding angles is congruent.

Alternate Interior Angle Theorem: If two parallel lines are cut by a transversal, then each pair

of alternate interior angles is congruent.

Perpendicular Bisector Theorem: Any point on the perpendicular bisector of a segment is

equidistant from the endpoints of the segment.

Example 1: Proof of the Vertical Angle Theorem

Given: ABC and EBD are vertical angles.

Prove: ABC EBD

ABC and CBD are vertical angles. Given.

ABC is supplementary to CBD and

EBD is supplementary to CBD .

ABC and CBD form a straight angle.

EBD and CBD form a straight angle.

180m ABC m CBD

180m EBD m CBD Definition of supplementary angles.

180m ABC m CBD 180m EBD m CBD

Subtraction property of equality.

m ABC m EBD Transitive property.

Jordan School District Page 250 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 2: Proof of Corresponding Angle Postulate

Given: ||q r , 1 and 5 are corresponding angles

Prove: 1 5

We know that angle 4 is supplementary to angle 1 from the straight angle theorem. 5 and

4 are also supplementary, because they are interior angles on the same side of transversal p

(same side interior angles theorem).

Therefore, since 4 180 1 180 5m m m , we know that 1 5m m which means that

1 5 . This can be proven for every pair of corresponding angles in the same way.

Example 3: Proof of Alternate Interior Angle Theorem

Given: q r

Prove: 3 7

1 3 and 5 7 because they are vertical angles.

If q r then 1 5 and 3 7 because they are

corresponding angles.

Therefore, using the transitive property, 3 7 .

A similar argument can be given to show 4 6 .

Jordan School District Page 251 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises A

Use the figure below for problems 1–2.

1. Identify the pairs of angles that are vertical angles, corresponding angles, and alternate

interior angles.

Vertical Angles Corresponding Angles Alternate Interior Angles

2. Given 1 72 ,m find the measure of the remaining angles.

2m 3m 4m 5m

6m 7m 8m

Use the figure below for problems 3–4.

3. Identify the pairs of angles that are vertical angles, corresponding angles, and alternate

interior angles.

Vertical Angles Corresponding Angles Alternate Interior Angles

Jordan School District Page 252 Secondary Mathematics 2

4. Given 5 110m and 17 95 ,m find the measure of the remaining angles.

1m 2m 3m 4m 6m

7m 8m 9m 10m 11m

12m 13m 14m 15m 16m

Use the figure at the right for questions 5–7.

5. Given: ||l m prove that 2 7 .

6. Given: ||l m prove that 3 5 180m m .

7. Given: ||l m prove that 2 8 180m m .

Example: Proof of the Perpendicular Bisector Theorem

Given: CD is the perpendicular bisector of AB

Prove: AC BC

Because CD is the perpendicular bisector of AB , AE BE . CEA CEB because they are

both right angles. CE is congruent to itself because of the reflexive property. This means that

CEA CEB using SAS. Since the triangles are congruent, all of their corresponding parts

must be congruent. Therefore, AC BC .

Jordan School District Page 253 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

1. CD is the perpendicular bisector of AB . Solve for x.

2. Lines l, m, and n are perpendicular bisectors of

PQR and meet at T. If 2TQ x ,

3 1PT y , and 8TR , find x, y, and z.

3. Given that PA PB and PM AB at M, prove that

PM is the perpendicular bisector of AB .

4. Given that BD is the perpendicular bisector of ,AC

prove that ABD CBD .

Jordan School District Page 254 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 5 Cluster 2 (G.CO.10)

Prove Theorems about Triangles

Cluster 2: Prove Geometric Theorems

5.2.2 Prove theorems about triangles: sum of interior angles, base angles of

isosceles triangles, segment joining midpoints of two sides is parallel to third

side and half the length, and medians meet at a point

VOCABULARY

The angles inside of a triangle are called interior angles.

A triangle with at least two congruent sides is called an

isosceles triangle. In an isosceles triangle, the angles that

are opposite the congruent sides are called base angles.

A point that is halfway between the endpoints of a segment

is called the midpoint. Point C is the midpoint of AB .

A segment whose endpoints are the midpoints of two sides

of a triangle is called the midsegement of a tiangle.

The line connecting midpoints to the opposite vertex of a

triangle is called the median. Point S is the midpoint of

AC . Point Q is the midpoint of BC . Point R is the

midpoint of AB .

The point where all three medians of a triangle intersect is

called a centroid. Point T is the centroid of ABC .

Jordan School District Page 255 Secondary Mathematics 2

Theorems

This unit of the core requires students to create proofs, formal or informal, to prove the following

theorems. Example proofs will be provided; however, teachers will probably do tasks with

students to complete these proofs in class.

Angle Sum Theorem: The sum of the measures of the angles of a triangle is 180 .

Isosceles Triangle Theorem: If two sides of a triangle are congruent, then the angles opposite

those sides are congruent.

Triangle Midsegment Theorem: A midsegment of a triangle is parallel to one side of the

triangle, and its length is one-half the length of that side.

Theorem: The medians of a triangle meet at a point.

Example 1: Proof of the Angle Sum Theorem

Given: ABC

Prove: 2 180m C m m B

Draw XY through A so it is parallel to CB . Because 1 and CAY form a linear pair they are

supplementary, so 1 180m m CAY . 2 and 3 form CAY , so 2 3 .m m m CAY

Using substitution, 1 2 3 180m m m . Because you drew XY parallel to CB , we know

1 C and 3 B since they are alternate interior angles. Because the angles are

congruent, their measures are equal. Therefore, using substitution again, we know

2 180m C m m B .

Jordan School District Page 256 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 2: Proof of the Isosceles Triangle Theorem

Given: ,PQR PQ RQ

Prove: P R

Let S be the midpoint of PR . Draw SQ . Since S is the midpoint, PS RS . QS is congruent

to itself. Since were were given that PQ RQ , we know that all 3 corresponding pairs of sides

are congruent and we can say PQS RQS because of SSS congruency. Therefore, P R

since they are corresponding angles of congruent triangles.

Example 3: Proof of the Triangle Midsegment Theorem

Given: Points D, E, and F are the midpoints of the sides

of the triangle.

Prove: ||DE AC and 2

ACDE

Statement

1. D and E are midpoints

2. 1

2DB AB ,

1

2BE BC

3. ~BDE BAC

4. ||DE AC

5. 2

ACDE

Reason

1. Given

2. By definition of a midpoints

3. B is the center of dilation and scale

factor is ½

4. Dilations take lines to parallel lines

5. Scale factor is ½

Jordan School District Page 257 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 4:

ABC has vertices A(-4, 1), B(8, -1), and C(-2, 9). DE is a midsegment of ABC .

A. Find the coordinates of D and E.

B. Verify that AC is parallel to DE .

C. Verify that 1

2DE AC .

Answers:

A.

2 8 9 ( 1) 6 8, , 3,4

2 2 2 2D D D

4 8 1 ( 1) 4 0, , 2,0

2 2 2 2E E E

Use the Midpoint Formula to find the

midpoints of AB and CB .

B.

slope of AC = 9 1 8

42 ( 4) 2

slope of DE = 4 0 4

43 2 1

If the slopes of AC and DE are equal,

||AC DE .

Because the slopes of AC and DE are equal, ||AC DE .

C. 2 2 2 2( 2 ( 4)) (9 1) (2) (8) 4 64 68AC

2 2 2 2

3 2 4 0 1 4 1 16 17DE

First, use the distance formula

to find AC and DE.

17 17 1 1

68 4 268

DE

AC

Now show 1

2DE AC

Because 1

2

DE

AC ,

1

2DE AC .

Jordan School District Page 258 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 5: The medians of a triangle meet at a point.

Given a triangle with vertices at 0,1A , 6,1B , and 4,5C , prove that the medians meet at a

single point.

Draw the triangle and label its vertices.

0 6 1 1 6 2

, , 3,12 2 2 2

D

0 4 1 5 4 6

, , 2,32 2 2 2

E

6 4 1 5 10 6

, , 5,32 2 2 2

F

Find the midpoint of AB and label it D.

Find the midpoint of AC and label it E.

Find the midpoint of CB and label it F.

3 1 2 1

2 6 4 2EBm

12

3 2y x

1 5 44

3 4 1DCm

1 4 3y x

3 1 2

5 0 5FAm

25

3 5y x

Write an equation for EB , DC , and FA .

0,1A 6,1B

4,5C

4,5C

6,1B 0,1A

5,3F

3,1D

2,3E

Jordan School District Page 259 Secondary Mathematics 2

12

12

3 2

4

y x

y x

and

1 4 3

4 11

y x

y x

12

4 4 11

4.5 15

10

3

x x

x

x

1 104

2 3

54

3

7

3

y

y

y

Using two of the equations, try to solve the

system.

25

3 5

7 2 103 5

3 5 3

2 2 5

3 5 3

2 2

3 3

y x

See if the solution10 7

,3 3

works in the third

equation.

All three medians of a triangle intersect in a single point.

Jordan School District Page 260 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises A

1. A base angle in an isosceles triangle measures 37°. Draw and label the triangle. What is the

measure of the vertex angle?

Find the missing angle measures.

2.

3.

4.

Find the value of x.

5.

6.

Jordan School District Page 261 Secondary Mathematics 2

7. Find the values of both x and y

8. Can the given measurements be accurate? Why or why not?

9. Find the length of DE given that D and E are midpoints.

10. Find the length of FG given that IJ is a midsegment of the triangle.

Jordan School District Page 262 Secondary Mathematics 2

11. Solve for x given NO is a midsegment of the triangle.

12. ABC has vertices 2,6A , 4,0B , and 10,0C . DE is a midsegment with D being

the midpoint of of AB and E being the midpoint of AC .

a. Find the coordinates of D and E.

b. Verify that BC is parallel to DE .

c. Verify that 1

2DE BC .

13. ABC has vertices at 5, 4A , 0,4B , and 13, 4C .

a. Find the coordinates of D, E, and F, the midpoints of AB , AC , and BC .

b. Find the equations for two of the medians. Use a system of equations to find the location

of the centroid (the point where the medians intersect).

A

B

C

D E

F

Jordan School District Page 263 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 5 Cluster 2 (G.CO.11)

Prove Geometric Theorems about Parallelograms

Cluster 2: Prove Geometric Theorems

5.2.3 Prove theorems about parallelograms: opposite sides are congruent, opposite

angles are congruent, the diagonals bisect each other, and rectangles are

parallelograms with congruent diagonals.

VOCABULARY

A polygon with four sides is called a quadrilateral.

A quadrilateral with two pairs of parallel sides is called a

parallelogram.

A segment that connects two nonconsecutive vertices is

called a diagonal.

A parallelogram with four right angles is called a

rectangle.

Jordan School District Page 264 Secondary Mathematics 2

Theorems

This unit of the core requires students to create proofs, formal or informal, to prove the following

theorems. Example proofs will be provided; however, teachers will probably do tasks with

students to complete these proofs in class.

If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then its opposite sides are congruent.

If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then its opposite angles are congruent.

If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then its diagonals bisect each other.

If the diagonals of a quadrilateral bisect each other, then the quadrilateral is a

parallelogram.

If the diagonals of a parallelogram are congruent, then the parallelogram is a rectangle.

Exmaple 1: If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then its opposite sides are congruent.

Given: QUAD is a parallelogram

Prove: QU AD and DQ UA

Statements Reasons

1. QUAD is a parallelogram. 1. Given.

2. ||QU AD and ||DQ UA 2. Definition of parallelogram.

3. 1 3 and 2 4 3. Alternate interior angles are congruent.

4. QA QA 4. Reflexive property.

5. QUA ADQ 5. ASA congruence.

6. QU AD and DQ UA 6. Corresponding parts of congruent

triangles are congruent (CPCTC).

Jordan School District Page 265 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 2: If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then its opposite angles are congruent.

Given: ABCD is a parallelogram

Prove: A C and B D

Since ABCD is a parallelogram, the opposite sides must be parallel.

Draw BD as a diagonal of the parallelogram. We know AD BC and AB CD because

opposite sides of a parallelogram are congruent. BD is congruent to itself. This creates two

congruent triangles by SSS: ABD CDB . Because the triangles are congruent, the

corresponding parts will be congruent. Therefore, A C . The same logic can be used using

AC as the diagonal to show B D .

Example 3: If a quadrilateral is a parallelogram, then its diagonals bisect each other.

Given: ACDE is a parallelogram

Prove: AB BD and EB BC

It is given that ACDE is a parallelogram. Since opposite sides of a parallelogram are congruent,

EA DC . By definition of a parallelogram, ||EA DC . AEB DCB and EAB CDB

because alternate interior angles are congruent. EBA CBD by ASA. Since the triangles are

congruent, their corresponding parts are also congruent. Therefore, AB BD and EB BC .

The diagonals of a parallelogram bisect each other.

Jordan School District Page 266 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 4: If the diagonals of a quadrilateral bisect each other, then the quadrilateral is a

parallelogram.

Given: AC and BD bisect each other at E.

Prove: ABCD is a parallelogram

AC and BD bisect each other at E.

Given

ABCD is a parallelogram.

Definition of parallelogram.

AE EC

BE ED Definition of a segment bisector

AEB CED

Vertical Angles

BEC DEA

Vertical Angles

BEA DEC

SAS AED CEB

SAS

BAE DCE

Corresponding parts of congruent

triangles are congruent (CPCTC).

ECB EAD

Corresponding parts of congruent

triangles are congruent (CPCTC).

AB CD

If alternate interior angles are

congruent, then lines are

BC AD

If alternate interior angles are

congruent, then lines are

Jordan School District Page 267 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 5: If the diagonals of a parallelogram are congruent, then the parallelogram is a

rectangle.

Given: WXYZ is a parallelogram with WY XZ

Prove: WXYZ is a rectangle

Statements Reasons

1. WY XZ 1. Given.

2. XY ZW 2. Definition of a parallelogram.

3. WX XW 3. Segment congruent to itself (reflexive

property).

4. WZX XYW 4. SSS congruence.

5. ZWX YXW 5. Corresponding parts of congruent

triangles are congruent.

6. m ZWX m YXW 6. Definition of congruent.

7. 180m ZWX m WXZ m XZW 7. Triangle sum theorem.

8. XZW ZXY 8. Alternate interior angles are congruent.

9. m XZW m ZXY 9. Definition of congruent.

10. 180m ZWX m WXZ m ZXY 10. Substitution.

11. m WXZ m ZXY m YXW 11. Angle addition postulate.

12. 180m ZWX m YXW 12. Substitution.

13. ZWX and YXW are right angles 13. If two angles are congruent and

supplementary, each angle is a right

angle.

14. WZY and XYZ are right angles 14. Opposite angles of a parallelogram are

congruent.

15. WXYZ is a rectangle 15. Definition of a rectangle.

Jordan School District Page 268 Secondary Mathematics 2

M

L

J

K

Practice Exercises A

1. Complete the flow proof by filling in the blanks for the theorem: If a quadrilateral is a

parallelogram, then its opposite angles are congruent.

Given: JKLM is a parallelogram

Prove: and J L K M

is a parallelogramJKLM

a._____________

and K are consecutive s.

Def. of consecutive s

J

and are consecutive s.

.________________________

K L

b

.___________________

Def. of consecutive s

c

.______________________

Consecutive s are supplementary

d

and are supplementary

Consecutive s are supplementary

K L

and are supplementary

Consecutive s are supplementary

L M

._______________

Supplements of the

same are

e

.___________________

__________________

K M

f

2. Complete the two column proof by filling in the blanks for the theorem: If a parallelogram is a

rectangle, then its diagonals are congruent.

Given: ABCD is a rectangle

Prove: AC BD

Statements Reasons

1. ABCD is a rectangle 1. a. ______________________

2. is a ABCD 2. b. ______________________

3. BC CB 3. c.______________________

4. and DCB are right s.ABC 4. d.______________________

5. ABC DCB 5. e.________________________

6. f. _______________________ 6. Opposite sides of a parallelogram are

congruent.

7. g.________________________ 7. SAS

8. AC BD 8. h._________________________

Jordan School District Page 269 Secondary Mathematics 2

3. Find the values(s) of the variables(s) in each parallelogram.

a.

b.

c.

4. For what values of a and b must EFGH be a parallelogram?

a.

b.

c.

5. QRST is a rectangle. Find the value of x and the length of each diagonal.

a. and 2 - 4QS x RT x b. 7 2 and 4 3QS x RT x c. 5 8 and 2 1QS x RT x

6. Is the given information enough to prove that the quadrilateral is a parallelogram? Explain

why or why not.

a.

b.

c.

Jordan School District Page 270 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 5 Cluster 3 (G.SRT.4, G.SRT.5)

Prove Theorems Involving Similarity

Cluster 3: Prove theorems involving similarity

5.3.1 Prove theorems about triangles: a line parallel to one side divides the other 2

proportionally, the Pythagorean Theorem

5.3.2 Use congruence and similarity criteria to solve problems and prove relationships

Theorems

This unit of the core requires students to create proofs, formal or informal, to prove the following

theorems. Example proofs will be provided; however, teachers will probably do tasks with

students to complete these proofs in class.

Triangle Proportionality Theorem: If a line is parallel to one side of a triangle, then it divides

the other two sides proportionally.

Converse of the Triangle Proportionality Theorem: If a line intersects two sides of a triangle

proportionally, then that line is parallel to one side of the triangle.

Pythagorean Theorem: If a triangle is a right triangle with hypotenuse c, then 2 2 2a b c .

Proof of the Triangle Proportionality Theorem: A line parallel to one side of a triangle

divides the other two sides proportionally.

Given: BD || AE

Prove: BA DE

=CB CD

Since , 3 1 and 4 2BD AE because they are corresponding angles. Then by AA

Similarity, ACE BCD . By definition of similar polygons, CA CE

CB CD . From the Segment

Addition Postulate, and CA BA CB CE DE CD . Substituting for CA and CE in the ratio,

we get the following proportion.

Jordan School District Page 271 Secondary Mathematics 2

1 1

BA CB DE CD

CB CD

CB BA CD DE

CB CB CD CD

BA DE

CB CD

BA DE

CB CD

Proof of the Converse of the Triangle Proportionality Theorem: If a line intersects two sides

of a triangle proportionally, then that line is parallel to one side of the triangle.

Given: BA DE

= CB CD

Prove: BD || AE

Statements Reasons

1. BA DE

= CB CD

1. Given.

2.

BA DE1 + = 1 +

CB CD 2. Addition property of equality.

3. CB BA CD DE

+ = + CB CB CD CD

3. Substitution for 1.

4. CB + BA CD + DE

= CB CD

4. Common denominator.

5. CA = CB + BA and CE = CD + DE 5. Segment addition postulate.

6. CA CE

= CB CD

6. Substitution; sides are proportional.

7. C C 7. Reflexive property of congruence.

8. ACE ~ BCD 8. SAS Similarity.

9. CBD CAB 9. By definition of similar triangles.

10. BD || AE 10. CBD and CAB are corresponding

angles. Since they are congruent, the

segments BD and AE are parallel.

Rewrite as a sum.

1 and 1CB CD

CB CD

Subtract 1 from each side

Jordan School District Page 272 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises A

Solve for x and y given ~ABC AED .

1.

2.

Solve for x.

3.

4.

5. In HKM , HM = 15, HN = 10, and HJ is twice the

length of JK . Determine whether ||NJ MK .

Explain.

6. Find TO, SP, OR, and RP.

Jordan School District Page 273 Secondary Mathematics 2

Proof of the Pythagorean Theorem: If a triangle is a right triangle with hypotenuse c, then 2 2 2a b c .

Given: ABC is a right triangle with hypotenuse c

Prove: 2 2 2a b c

Draw CD so it is perpendicular to AB . This creates three right triangles, ABC , ACD , and

CBD . All three of these triangles are similar by AA similarity. ~ABC CBD because they

both have a right angle and they have B in common. ~ABC ACD because they both have

a right angle and they have A in common. ~ACD CBD because they are both similar to

ABC .

Since we know the triangles are similar, we also know the ratios of the sides are all the same.

Start with ABC and CBD .

2BC BD a da cd

AB CB c a

Now use the same logic with ABC and ACD .

2AC AD b eb ce

AB AC c b

Next, add the two equations together and factor out c.

2 2a b cd ce

2 2 ( )a b c d e

Looking at the original picture we see d e c , so we can substitute.

2 2

2 2 2

( )a b c c

a b c

Therefore, given a right triangle with hypotenuse c, 2 2 2a b c .

Jordan School District Page 274 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

Solve for x.

1. 2.

3. 4.

5. 6.

3 3

x

x

915

x

25

65 x

4

9

5

9

x16

33

x

11

28

Jordan School District Page 275 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 5 Cluster 4 (G.GPE.6)

Coordinte Proofs

Cluster 4: Use coordinates to prove simple geometric theorems algebraically.

5.4.1 Find the point on a directed line segment between two given points that partitions

that segment in a given ratio

Concept For any segment with endpoints A and B, a point C between A and B will partition the segment

into a given ratio.

Example 1: Horizontal Line Segment

Find the coordinates of C so that the ratio 4AC

CB .

Answer:

, ,2C x y C x Because AB is a horizontal line, the y-coordinate of C

must be 2.

3 ( 7) 10 10 Find the horizontal distance from point A to point B.

AC AB CB

Use the segment addition postulate AC CB AB and

solve for AC.

4AB CB

CB

Substitute AC AB CB into 4.

AC

CB

4

5

AB CB CB

AB CB

Multiply each side by CB.

Add CB to each side.

10 5

2

CB

CB

Since 10AB , substitute 10 in for AB and solve for CB.

, 1,2C x y C Since 2CB , the x-coordinate of the point C must be

3 2 1 .

Jordan School District Page 276 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 2: Vertical Line Segment

Find the coordinates of C so that the ratio 2

5

AC

CB .

Answer:

, 3,C x y C y Because AB is a vertical line, the x-coordinate of C must

be 3.

5 2 7 7 Find the vertical distance from point A to point B.

AC AB CB

Use the segment addition postulate AC CB AB and

solve for AC.

2

5

AB CB

CB

Substitute AC AB CB into

2.

5

AC

CB

2

5

5 2

5 5 2

5 7

AB CB CB

AB CB CB

AB CB CB

AB CB

Multiply each side by CB.

Multiply each side by 5 and simplify.

Add 5CB to each side.

5 7 7

35 7

5

CB

CB

CB

Since 7AB , substitute 7 in for AB and solve for CB.

, 3,0C x y C Since 5CB , the y-coordinate of the point C must be

5 5 0 .

Jordan School District Page 277 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 3: Positive Slope Line Segment

Find the coordinates of C such that 2

3

AC

CB

Answer:

2 2

2 2

4 2 7 1

6 8

36 64

100

10

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

Find the length of AB using the distance formula.

AC AB CB Use the segment addition postulate AC CB AB and

solve for AC.

2

3

AB CB

CB

Substitute AC AB CB into

2.

3

AC

CB

2

3

3 2

3 3 2

AB CB CB

AB CB CB

AB CB CB

Multiply each side by CB.

Multiply each side by 3 then simplify.

3 5

3(10) 5

30 5

6

AB CB

CB

CB

CB

Add 3CB to each side.

Since 10AB , substitute 10 in for AB and solve for CB.

6 10

4

AC CB AB

AC

AC

We can find AC by using the segment addition postulate

and substituting in the known values.

Jordan School District Page 278 Secondary Mathematics 2

To find the coordinates of point C, you will

need to draw a right triangle with AB as the

hypotenuse. Then draw a line from point C

perpendicular to each leg of the right triangle.

The two small triangles created within the

larger triangle are similar to each other and the

larger triangle by AA similarity. Therefore the

ratio of their sides is equal.

4

10 6

10 24

2.4

AC AF

AB AD

AF

AF

AF

You need the coordinates of point F to find the x-coordinate

of point C. Use the ratios to find AF.

2 2.4, 1 (0.4, 1)F Point F will have the same y-coordinate as point A. The x-

coordinate will be the same as A plus 2.4 because AF is 2.4.

4

10 8

10 32

3.2

AC DE

AB BD

DE

DE

DE

You need the coordinates of point E to find the y-coordinate

of point C. Use the ratios to find DE.

4, 1 3.2 (4,2.2)E

Point E will have the same x-coordinate as point D. The y-

coordinate will be the same as D plus 3.2 because DE is 3.2.

0.4,2.2C The x-coordinate of F is 0.4 and the y-coordinate of E is 2.2.

Jordan School District Page 279 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 4: Negative Slope Line Segment

Find the coordinates of C such that 7

6

AC

CB

Answer:

22

2 2

7 5 4 1

12 5

144 25

169

13

AB

AB

AB

AB

AB

Find the length of AB using the distance formula.

AC AB CB Use the segment addition postulate AC CB AB and

solve for AC.

7

6

AB CB

CB

Substitute AC AB CB into

7.

6

AC

CB

7

6

6 7

6 6 7

AB CB CB

AB CB CB

AB CB CB

Multiply by each side by CB.

Multiply each side by 6 then simplify.

6 13

6(13) 13

78 13

6

AB CB

CB

CB

CB

Add 6CB to each side.

Since 13AB , substitute 13 in for AB and solve for CB.

6 13

7

AC CB AB

AC

AC

We can find AC by using the segment addition postulate

and substituting in the known values.

Jordan School District Page 280 Secondary Mathematics 2

To find the coordinates of point C,

you will need to draw a right

triangle with AB as the

hypotenuse. Then draw a line from

point C perpendicular to each leg of

the right triangle. The two small

triangles created within the larger

triangle are similar to each other

and the larger triangle by AA

similarity. Therefore the ratio of

their sides is equal.

7

13 5

13 35

352.69

13

AC AF

AB AD

AF

AF

AF

You need the coordinates of point F to find the y-

coordinate of point C. Use the ratios to find AF.

35 17

7,4 7, 7,1.3113 13

F

Point F will have the same x-coordinate as point

A. The y-coordinate will be the same as A minus 3513

because AF is 3513

.

7

13 12

13 84

846.46

13

AC DE

AB BD

DE

DE

DE

You need the coordinates of point E to find the x-

coordinate of point C. Use the ratios to find DE.

84 7

7 , 1 , 1 0.54, 113 13

E

Point E will have the same y-coordinate as point

D. The x-coordinate will be the same as D plus 8413

because DE is 8413

.

7 17

, 0.54,1.3113 13

C C

The x-coordinate of F is 7

13 and the y-coordinate

of E is 1713

.

Jordan School District Page 281 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises A

1. C is between A and B with A (3, -5) and B (3, 7). Find the coordinates of C such that

3AC

CB .

2. C is between A and B with 3, 1A and 6, 1B . Find the coordinates of C such that

5

4

AC

CB .

3. C is between A and B with 2, 4A and 2,4B . Find the coordinates of C such that

1

3

AC

CB .

4. C is between A and B with 2,5A and 6,5B . Find the coordinates of C such that

5

3

AC

CB .

5. C is between A and B with A (-5, -3) and B (3, 3). Find the coordinates of C such that

3

7

AC

CB .

Jordan School District Page 282 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 5 Cluster 5 (G.SRT.6, G.SRT.7, G.SRT.8)

Right Triangle Trigonometry

Cluster 5: Defining trigonometric ratios and solving problems

5.5.1 Similarity of triangles leads to the trigonometric ratios of the acute angles.

5.5.2 Understand the relationship between the sine and cosine of complementary

angles.

5.5.3 Use trigonometric ratios and the Pythagorean Theorem to solve right triangles in

applied problems

Two figures that have congruent angles and proportional sides are similar. The requirements for

proving that two right triangles are similar are less than the requirements needed to prove non-

right triangles similar. It is already known that both triangles have one right angle. Therefore,

two right triangles are similar if one acute angle is congruent to one acute angle in the other right

triangle. In a right triangle, the ratio between the side lengths is a function of an acute angle ( 0

to 90 ). There are six distinct trigonometric ratios that are functions of an acute angle in a right

triangle. Right triangles that are similar will have the same trigonometric ratios.

VOCABULARY

The side opposite the right angle is the called the

hypotenuse.

The side that meets the hypotenuse to form the angle

is called the adjacent side.

The side that is opposite the angle is called the

opposite side.

Trigonometric Ratios

Let be an acute angle in the right ABC as shown in the figure above. Then,

sine opposite

sinhypotenuse

cosine adjacent

coshypotenuse

tangent opposite

tanadjacent

cosecant 1 hypotenuse

cscsin opposite

secant 1 hypotenuse

seccos adjacent

cotangent 1 adjacent

cottan opposite

Jordan School District Page 283 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example: Given the figure below, identify all six trigonometric ratios of the angle .

Answer:

The opposite side is 8. The adjacent side is 15. The hypotenuse is 17. Therefore,

8sin

17

15cos

17

8tan

15

817

1 1 17csc

sin 8

1517

1 1 17sec

cos 15

815

1 1 15cot

tan 8

Example: Given the figure below, identify all six trigonometric ratios of the angle .

Answer:

The opposite side is 12. The adjacent side is 5. The hypotenuse is not known. Use the

Pythagorean Theorem to find the missing hypotenuse and then calculate the six trigonometric

ratios.

2 2 2

2

2

5 12

25 144

169

13

c

c

c

c

The hypotenuse is 13.

Jordan School District Page 284 Secondary Mathematics 2

12sin

13

5cos

13

12tan

5

1213

1 1 13csc

sin 12

513

1 1 13sec

cos 5

125

1 1 5cot

tan 12

Practice Exercises A

Given the figures below, identify all six trigonometric ratios of the angle .

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Use a calculator to find each value.

7. sin 9 8. cos 37 9. tan 48

10. cos 55 11. tan 72 12. sin 23

Angle in standard position

θ

Adjacent

Hypotenuse

Opposite

5

7

11

θ

Jordan School District Page 285 Secondary Mathematics 2

When solving equations, you use the inverse operation to find the value of the variable. In

trigonometry, you can find the measure of the angle by using the inverse of sine, cosine, or

tangent.

Equation Inverse Equation Meaning

sinx

y 1sin

x

y

The inverse, or arcsine, of

x

y is equal to the

angle .

cosx

y 1cos

x

y

The inverse, or arccosine, of

x

y is equal to the

angle .

tanx

y 1tan

x

y

The inverse, or arctangent, of

x

y is equal to

the angle .

Practice Exercises B

Use a calculator to find each value.

1. 1sin 0.5 2. 1cos 0.86

3. 1tan 6

4. 1tan 1 5. 1sin 0.75

6. 1cos 0.33

Given the figures below, find the measure of the angle .

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

Angle in standard position

θ

Adjacent

Hypotenuse

Opposite

5

7

11

θ

Jordan School District Page 286 Secondary Mathematics 2

Relationship Between Complementary Angles (Cofunction Identities)

1 1

2 1

cos 90 sin

cos sin

4 4

5 5

1 1

2 1

sin 90 cos

sin cos

3 3

5 5

Practice Exercises C

Use the relationship of complementary angles to find the missing angle.

1. If 1

sin 302

, then 1

cos ____2

2. If cos 0 1 , then sin ____ 1

3. If cos 23 0.92 , then sin ____ 0.92 4. If sin 75 0.97 , then cos ____ 0.97

VOCABULARY

An angle of elevation is the angle made with the

ground and your line of sight to an object above

you.

An angle of depression is the angle from the

horizon and your line of sight to an object below

you.

1

2

2

1

Jordan School District Page 287 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 1:

You are standing 196 feet from the base of an office building in downtown Salt Lake City. The

angle of elevation to the top of the building is 65 . Find the height, h, of the building.

Draw a picture of the situation and label what

you know.

tan 65196

h

You know the adjacent side and want the

opposite side. Use the tangent ratio to help

you set up the problem.

tan 65196

h

196 tan 65 h

420.32 h

Solve for h.

The height of the building is approximately 420.32 feet high.

Example 2:

John is standing on the roof of a building that is 300 feet tall and sees Sarah standing on the

ground. If the angle of depression is 60 how far away is Sarah from John?

Draw a picture of the situation and label what

you know.

300

sin 60d

You know the opposite side and want the

hypotenuse. Use the sine ratio to help you set

up the problem.

Jordan School District Page 288 Secondary Mathematics 2

300

sin 60d

sin 60 300d

300

sin 60d

346.41d

Solve for d.

Sarah is approximately 346.41 feet away from John.

Practice Exercises D

Solve each problem.

1. The angle of depression from the top of a

lighthouse 150 feet above the surface of

the water to a boat is 13 . How far is the

boat from the lighthouse?

2. A guy wire connects the top of an antenna

to a point on the level ground 7 feet from

the base of the antenna. The angle of

elevation formed by this wire is 75 .

What are the length of the wire and the

height of the antenna?

3. A private jet is taking off from Telluride,

Colorado. The runway is 46,725 feet from

the base of the mountain. The plane needs

to clear the top of Mount Sneffels, which

is 14,150 feet high, by 100 feet. What

angle should the plane maintain during

takeoff?

4. A person is 75 feet from the base of a

barn. The angle of elevation from the

level ground to the top of the barn is 60 .

How tall is the barn?

5. From the top of a building 250 feet high, a

man observes a car moving toward him.

If the angle of depression of the car

changes from 18 to 37 , how far does

the car travel while the man is observing

it?

6. A rocket is launched from ground level.

A person standing 84 feet from the launch

site observes that the angle of elevation is

71 at the rocket’s highest point. How

high did the rocket reach?

7. A hot-air balloon is 700 feet above the

ground. The angle of depression from the

balloon to an observer is 5 . How far is

the observer from the hot-air balloon?

8. If a wheelchair access ramp has to have an

angle of elevation of no more than 4.8

and it has to rise 18 inches, how long must

the ramp be?

9. A kite has 25 feet of string. The wind is

blowing the kite to the west so that the

angle of elevation is 40 . How far has the

kite traveled horizontally?

10. A sledding run is 400 yards long with a

vertical drop of 40.2 yards. Find the angle

of depression of the run.

Jordan School District Page 289 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 5 Cluster 5 Honors (N.CN.3, N.CN.4, N.CN.5 and N.CN.6)

Using Complex Numbers in Rectangular and Polar Form

H.5.1 Find moduli of complex numbers.

H.5.2 Represent complex numbers on the complex plane in rectangular and polar form

and explain why the rectangular and polar forms of a given complex number

represent the same number.

H.5.3 Represent addition, subtraction, multiplication, and conjugation of complex

number geometrically on the complex plane; use properties of this representation

for computation.

H.5.4 Calculate the distance between numbers in the complex plane as the modulus of

the difference

H.5.4 Calculate the midpoint of a segment as the average of the numbers at its

endpoints.

VOCABULARY

The complex plane is where the horizontal axis represents the

real component, a, and the vertical axis represents the imaginary

component, bi, of a complex number.

The rectangular form of a complex number, a bi , is written

as ,a b . Traditionally known as ,x y . To graph a point in

the complex plane, graph a units horizontally and b units

vertically.

The modulus (plural form is moduli) of a complex number is

defined by 2 2z a b and is the length, or magnitude, of the

vector in component form created by the complex number in the

complex plane.

Example 1:

Write the following complex numbers in rectangular form, then graph them on the complex

plane.

a. 3 2i

b. 4 5i

c. 2 i

d. 5 3i

Jordan School District Page 290 Secondary Mathematics 2

Answer:

a. 3 2 3, 2i

b. 4 5 4,5i

c. 2 2, 1i

d. 5 3 5,3i

The rectangular form of complex number

a bi is written as ,a b .

Since a is the real component it is graphed

horizontally. Similarly, bi is the complex

component and is graphed vertically.

a. 3 units right and 2 units down

b. 4 units right and 5 units up

c. 2 units left and 1 unit down

d. 5 units left and 3 units up

Example 2:

Find the modulus of 3 4z i .

3 4z i 3a and 4b

223 4z Modulus formula:

2 2z a b

9 16

25

5

z

z

z

Simplify.

Example 3:

Find the modulus of the complex number in rectangular form 3, 6 .

3, 6 3a and 6b

223 6z Modulus formula:

2 2z a b

9 36

45 6.71

z

z

Simplify.

Jordan School District Page 291 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises A

Write the following complex numbers in rectangular form then graph them on the complex

plane.

1. 2 3i 2. 5 4i

3. 1 2i 4. 3 5i

5. 1 i 6. 5 6i

Find the moduli of the following complex numbers.

7. 5 12i 8. 5 4i 9. 1, 2 10. 8, 6

VOCABULARY

The polar form of a complex number, z a bi , is

represented by cos sinz r i (sometimes called

trigonometric form) where cosa r , sinb r , r is the

modulus, 2 2r z a b , of a complex number and is

an argument of z. An argument of a complex number,

z a bi , is the direction angle of the vector ,a b .

To find , when given a complex number z a bi , use

1tanb

a

.

To graph a complex number in polar form, plot a point r

units from the origin on the positive x-axis, then rotate the

point the measure of .

To convert from polar to rectangular form use the fact that cosa r and sinb r .

Jordan School District Page 292 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 4:

Write 3 3i in polar form then graph it.

Answer

3 3i 3a and 3b

2 23 3

9 9

18

3 2

z

z

z

z

Compute the modulus 2 2z a b .

1 3tan

3

45

Find . Make sure that your calculator is in

degrees.

3 2 cos45 sin 45i

Remember that a complex number in polar

form is cos sinz r i . The modulus is r

so 3 2r .

Plot the point 3 2 units from the origin on the

positive x-axis. Rotate it 45 .

Example 5:

Write 3,1 in polar form then graph it.

Answer:

3 i 3a and 1b

2

23 1

3 1

4

2

z

z

z

z

Compute the modulus 2 2z a b .

1 1tan

3

30

Find . Make sure that your calculator is in

degrees.

Jordan School District Page 293 Secondary Mathematics 2

30 180 150

The calculator only returns values between

90 and 90 . In order to get the correct

angle, so that the point is in quadrant II, add

180 to the angle. (If the point is in quadrant

III, you will also add 180 , but if it is in

quadrant IV, you will need to add 360 .)

2 cos150 sin150z i

Remember that a complex number in polar

form is cos sinz r i . The modulus is r

so 2r .

Plot the point 2 units from the origin on the

positive x-axis. Rotate the point from 150 the

positive x-axis.

Example 6:

Write 2 cos135 sin135i in rectangular form.

Answer:

2 cos135 sin135i 2r and 135

2 cos135 1a

2 sin135 1b

To convert from polar to rectangular form use

cosa r and sinb r . Make sure that

your calculator is in degree mode.

The rectangular form is 1,1 . Rectangular form is ,a b .

Example 7:

Write 3 cos210 sin 210i in rectangular form.

Answer:

3 cos210 sin 210i 3r and 210

3 33 cos 210 3 1.5

2 2a

1 33sin 210 3 0.866

2 2b

To convert from polar to rectangular form use

cosa r and sinb r . Make sure that

your calculator is in degree mode.

The rectangular form is 3 3

,2 2

. Rectangular form is ,x y .

Jordan School District Page 294 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

Write the following complex numbers in polar form.

1. 5 12i 2. 5 4i 3. 0,2 4. 8, 6

Write the following complex numbers in rectangular form.

5. 3 cos270 sin 270i 6. 6 cos60 sin 60i

7. 3 cos135 sin135i 8. 4 cos30 sin30i

9. a. Write 10 24i in rectangular form.

b. Write your answer to part a) in polar form.

c. Write your answer to part b) in rectangular form.

d. Compare your answers form part a) and part c).

Representing Addition, Subtraction and Multiplication of Complex Numbers

A Complex Number and its

Conjugate Adding Complex Numbers

Subtracting a Complex

Number

The conjugate is a reflection

through the x-axis.

Adding complex numbers can

be demonstrated geometrically

by showing the addition of the

vector associated with each

complex number z. The sum

of 3 2 1 3i i is the

resultant vector 2,5 or

2 5i .

Subtracting complex numbers

can be demonstrated

geometrically by showing the

subtraction of the vector

associated with each complex

number z. The difference of

3 2 1 3i i is the

resultant vector 4, 1 or

4 i .

Jordan School District Page 295 Secondary Mathematics 2

Multiplying a Complex Number

Multiplication of complex numbers is

geometrically represented by adding the angles

and multiplying the moduli of the two vectors.

2 1 3 2 7 3 1 7i i i i

1 7tan 81.870 180 98.13

1

2 21 7 1 49 50 7.071z

1 2z i

1

1

1tan 26.6

2

2 2

1 2 1 4 1 5z

2 1 3z i

1

2

3tan 71.6

1

2 2

2 1 3 1 9 10z

Sum of angles 1 2 26.565 71.565 98.13

Product of moduli: 1 2 5 10 50 7.071z z z

Example 8:

Add 5 2 2 4i i and represent the sum by graphing it on the complex plane.

Answer:

5 2 2 4i i

5 2 2 4i i Remove the parenthesis.

5 2 2 4

3 2

i i

i

Combine like terms.

Represent the two complex numbers with

vectors.

Jordan School District Page 296 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 9:

Subtract 4 2 2 3i i and represent the difference by graphing it on the complex plane.

Answer:

4 2 2 3i i

4 2 2 3i i Remove the parenthesis.

4 2 2 3

6

i i

i

Combine like terms.

Represent the two complex numbers with

vectors.

Example 10:

Multiply 2 3 1 4i i and represent the product by graphing it on the complex plane.

Answer:

2 3 1 4i i 22 3 8 12

2 11 12

10 11

i i i

i

i

Use your preferred method to multiply.

Simplify and remember that 2 1i .

1

1

3tan 56.310

2

1

2

4tan 75.964

1

Sum of angles: 56.310 75.964 132.27

2 2

1 2 3 4 9 13z

2 2

2 1 4 1 16 17z

Product of moduli: 13 17 221 14.866

Jordan School District Page 297 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises C

Find the conjugate of the complex numbers.

1. 9i 2. 4 i 3. 9 6i 4. 3 7i

Add or subtract and represent the sum or difference on the complex plane.

5. 8 5 7 6i i 6. 4 7 4i i 7. 3 6 4 6i i

8. 1 3 6 4i i 9. 1 7 5 8i i 10. 5 2 9 10i i

Multiply and represent the product on the complex plane.

11. 1 2i i 12. 3 2 4 3i i 13. 3 5 2i i

Powers of Complex Numbers

De Moivre’s Theorem

If cos sinz r i is a complex number and n is any positive integer, then

cos sinn nz r n i n .

Example 11:

Use De Moivre’s Theorem to simplify 8

3 i

Answer:

8

3 i You need the radius and the angle. To get the

radius find the modulus.

2

23 1

3 1

4

2

z

z

z

z

3a , 1b , and 2 2r z a b .

1 1tan

3

30

To get the angle use 1tanb

a

.

30 180 150 The point should be in the second quadrant so

add 180 to the angle.

Jordan School District Page 298 Secondary Mathematics 2

88

8

8

8

8

3 2 cos 8 150 sin 8 150

3 256 cos 1200 sin 1200

1 33 256

2 2

3 128 128 3

3 128 128 3

i i

i i

i i

i i

i i

Substitute 2r , 150 , and 8n into De

Moivre’s Theorem.

Example 12:

Use De Moivre’s Theorem to simplify 3

1 3i .

Answer:

3

1 3i You need the radius and the angle. To get the

radius find the modulus.

22

1 3

1 3

4

2

z

z

z

z

1,a 3,b 2 2and r z a b .

1 3tan

1

60

To get the angle use 1tanb

a

.

60 180 120 The point should be in the second quadrant so

add 180 to the angle.

33

3

3

3

3

1 3 2 cos 3 120 sin 3 120

1 3 8 cos 360 sin 360

1 3 8 1 0

1 3 8 0

1 3 8

i i

i i

i i

i

i

Substitute 2r , 120 , and 3n into De

Moivre’s Theorem.

Jordan School District Page 299 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises D

Use De Moivre’s Theorem to simplify the following.

1. 3

2 2i 2. 3

1 i 3. 4

2 3i

4. 4

2 i 5. 4

3 i 6. 5

3 3 3i

VOCABULARY

The distance between numbers in the complex plane is the modulus, 2 2 ,z a b of the

difference of the complex numbers.

The midpoint of a segment in the complex plane is the average of the endpoints.

Example 13:

Find the distance between 6 2i and 2 3i .

Answer:

6 2 2 3

6 2 2 3

8

i i

i i

i

Find the difference between the two points.

2 2

8 1

64 1

65 8.06

z

z

z

Compute the modulus,

2 2z a b , of the

difference. 8 and 1a b

Example 14:

Find the midpoint between 8 2i and 1 4i .

Answer:

8 2i and 1 4i

The endpoints of the first complex number are

1 8a and 1 2b . The endpoints of the

second complex number are 2 1a and 2 4b .

8 1 2 4,

2 2

9 2,

2 2

9,1

2

is the midpoint or 9

2i

Compute the midpoint by averaging the a

endpoints and the b endpoints.

1 2 1 2,2 2

a a b b

Jordan School District Page 300 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises E

Find the distance and midpoint between the complex numbers.

1. 3 2 and 1 3i i 2. 7 4 and 2 2i i 3. 5 12 and 10 7i i

4. 3 8 and 2 12i i 5. 2 7 and 7 9i i 6. 11 3 and 3 3i i

Jordan School District Page 301 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 5 Cluster 6 (F.TF.8)

Using the Pyathagorean Identity

Cluster 6: Prove and apply trigionometric identities

5.6.1 Prove the Pythagorean identity 2 2sin cos 1 , then use it to find sin(θ),

cos(θ), or tan(θ), given sin(θ), cos(θ), or tan(θ) (limit angles between 0 and 90

degrees).

Proof of the Pythagorean Identity 2 2sin cos 1

2 2 2a b c Given a right triangle with side lengths a, b, and c, use the

Pythagorean Theorem to relate the sides of the triangle.

2 2 2

2 2 2

2 2

2 21

a b c

c c c

a b

c c

Divide each side by 2c so that the expression on the left is

equal to 1 on the right.

2 2

1a b

c c

Use the properties of exponents to rewrite the expression on

the left.

2 2

2 2

sin cos 1

sin cos 1

Substitute sin

a

c and cos

b

c .

VOCABULARY

An angle is in standard position when the vertex is at the origin,

one ray is on the positive x-axis, and the other ray extends into the

first quadrant.

Jordan School District Page 302 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 1:

If 4

sin5

is in the first quadrant, find cos and tan .

Draw a triangle with the angle in standard position.

Then label the information you know.

2 2 2

2

2

2

4 5

16 25

25 16

9

3

b

b

b

b

b

Use the Pythagorean Theorem to find the missing side.

adjacent 3

coshypotenuse 5

opposite 4

tanadjacent 3

Use the definitions of the trigonometric ratios to find

cos and tan .

Example 2:

If 8

tan15

is in the first quadrant, find sin and cos .

Draw a triangle with the angle in standard position.

Then label the information you know.

2 2 2

2

2

8 15

64 225

289

17

c

c

c

c

Use the Pythagorean Theorem to find the missing side.

opposite 8

sinhypotenuse 17

adjacent 15

coshypotenuse 17

Use the definitions of the trigonometric ratios to find

sin and cos .

Jordan School District Page 303 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises A

1. Find sin and cos if 3

tan4

. 2. Find sin and cos if tan 3 .

3. Find sin and tan if 1

cos4

. 4. Find sin and tan if 4

cos5

.

5. Find cos and tan if 5

sin13

. 6. Find cos and tan if 1

sin2

.

7. Find sin and cos if 8

tan5

. 8. Find sin and tan if 1

cos2

.

9. Find cos and tan if 3

sin2

10. Find sin and cos if tan 3 .

Jordan School District Page 304 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 5 Honors Unit Circle

Defining Trigonometric Ratios on the Unit Circle

H.5.6 Define trigonometric ratios and write trigonometric expressions in equivalent

forms.

There are special right triangles. These triangles have special relationships between the lengths

of their sides and their angles that can be used to simplify calculations when finding missing

angles and sides.

45 45 90 Triangle

The Pythagorean Theorem allows us to derive the relationships that

exist for these triangles. Consider a right isosceles triangle with leg

lengths x and hypotenuse h. Since this is a right isosceles triangle, the

measures of the angles are 45 45 90 .

Using the Pythagorean Theorem, we know that 2 2 2x x h . Solving the equation for h, we get: 2 2 2

2 2

2

2

2

2

h x x

h x

h x

h x

45 45 90 Triangle

In any 45 45 90 triangle, the length of the hypotenuse is 2 times the length of its leg.

Therefore, in a 45 45 90 , the measures of the side lengths are x, x, and 2x .

2x

Jordan School District Page 305 Secondary Mathematics 2

30 60 90 Triangles

There is also a special relationship for triangles with angles of

30 60 90 . When an altitude, a, is drawn from the vertex of an

equilateral triangle, it bisects the base of the triangle and two

congruent 30 60 90 triangles are formed. If each triangle has a

base of length x, then the entire length of the base of the equilateral

triangle is 2x.

Using one of the right triangles and the Pythagorean Theorem, we know that 2 2 22a x x .

Solving for a we get:

2 2 2

2 2 2

2 2

2

2

4

3

3

3

a x x

a x x

a x

a x

a x

Therefore, in a 30 60 90 triangle, the measures of the side lengths are , 3, and 2x x x .

30 60 90 Triangles

In any 30 60 90 triangle, the length of the hypotenuse is twice the length of the shorter leg,

and the length of the longer leg is 3 times the length of the shorter leg.

Jordan School District Page 306 Secondary Mathematics 2

Trigonometric Ratios for a Circle of Radius 1

oppositesin

hypotenuse

sin1

sin

y

y

adjacentcos

hypotenuse

cos1

cos

x

x

For any point ,x y on a circle of radius 1, the x-coordinate is the cosine of the angle and the y-

coordinate is the sine of the angle. A circle of radius 1 is called a unit circle. Special values on

the unit circle are derived from the special right triangles, 45 45 90 triangles and

30 60 90 triangles, and their trigonometric ratios.

Special Right Triangles and the Unit Circle

Recall that if you reflect any point ,x y , on the coordinate plane over the x axis, y axis, or the

origin, then the following relationships exist:

Reflection over the y axis ( , ) ( , )x y x y

Reflection over the x axis ( , ) ( , )x y x y

Reflection over the origin ( , ) ( , )x y x y

Jordan School District Page 307 Secondary Mathematics 2

We will use this reasoning to show relationships of special right triangles on the unit circle.

To illustrate a 45 45 90 triangle on the unit circle, we are going to rotate a point 45 from

the positive x-axis. The right triangle formed has a hypotenuse of 1 and leg lengths of x and y.

Since two of the angles are congruent this is an isosceles right triangle and the lengths of the legs

are the same, x y . Finding the value of x will help us identify the numerical coordinates of the

point ,x y .

The length of the hypotenuse in a 45 45 90 is equal to the length of a leg times 2 .

Using this property we can find the length of a leg.

1 2x The hypotenuse, which is length 1, is 2

times the length of leg x.

1

2x Solve for x.

1 2

2 2

2

2

x

x

Rationalize the denominator.

Since both legs are equal, 2 2

and 2 2

x y .

If we relate this to the unit circle where 45 , then the following is true:

2adjacent 22cos cos 45

hypotenuse 1 2x

2opposite 22sin sin 45

hypotenuse 1 2y

Jordan School District Page 308 Secondary Mathematics 2

Thus, the point 2 2

( , ) ,2 2

x y

. If we reflect this point so that it appears in Quadrants II, III,

and IV, then we can derive the following:

The reflection of the point over the y-axis is equivalent to a rotation of 135 from the

positive x-axis. The coordinates of the point are

2 2

( , ) cos 45 ,sin 45 cos135 ,sin135 ,2 2

x y

.

The reflection of the point through the origin is equivalent to a rotation of 225 from the

positive x-axis. The coordinates of the new point are

2 2

( , ) cos 45 , sin 45 cos 225 ,sin 225 ,2 2

x y

.

The reflection of the point over the x-axis is equivalent to a rotation of 315 from the

positive x-axis. The coordinates of the new point are

2 2

( , ) cos 45 , sin 45 cos315 ,sin 315 ,2 2

x y

.

To illustrate a 30 60 90 triangle on the unit circle, we are going to rotate a point 60 from

the positive x-axis and drop a perpendicular line to the positive x-axis. The right triangle formed

has a hypotenuse of 1 and leg lengths of x and y.

The length of the hypotenuse in a 30 60 90 is twice the length of the shorter side. Thus,

1 2x . Upon solving the equation for x we find that 1

2x . We can use this value of x to find

the length of the longer leg, y. The longer leg is 3 times the length of the shorter leg.

Therefore, 3y x and since 1

2x then

13

2y

or 3

2y .

Jordan School District Page 309 Secondary Mathematics 2

If we relate this to the unit circle where 60 then the following is true:

1adjacent 12cos cos60

hypotenuse 1 2x

3opposite 32sin sin 60

hypotenuse 1 2y

Thus, the point 1 3

( , ) ,2 2

x y

. If we reflect this point so that it appears in Quadrants II, III,

and IV, then we can derive the following:

The reflection of the point over the y-axis is equivalent to a rotation of 120 from the

positive x-axis. The coordinates of the point are

1 3

( , ) cos60 ,sin 60 cos120 ,sin120 ,2 2

x y

.

The reflection of the point through the origin is equivalent to a rotation of 240 from the

positive x-axis. The coordinates of the new point are

1 3

( , ) cos60 , sin 60 cos 240 ,sin 240 ,2 2

x y

.

The reflection of the point over the x-axis is equivalent to a rotation of 300 from the

positive x-axis. The coordinates of the new point are

1 3

( , ) cos60 , sin 60 cos300 ,sin 300 ,2 2

x y

.

We can also consider the case where 30 and use the 30 60 90 triangle to find the

values of x and y for this value of .

3adjacent 32cos cos30

hypotenuse 1 2x

1opposite 12sin sin 30

hypotenuse 1 2y

Thus, the point 3 1

( , ) ,2 2

x y

. If we reflect this point so that it appears in Quadrants II, III,

and IV, then we can derive the following:

The reflection of the point over the y-axis is equivalent to a rotation of 150 from the

positive x-axis. The coordinates of the point are

3 1

( , ) cos30 ,sin 30 cos150 ,sin150 ,2 2

x y

.

Jordan School District Page 310 Secondary Mathematics 2

The reflection of the point through the origin is equivalent to a rotation of 210 from the

positive x-axis. The coordinates of the new point are

3 1

( , ) cos30 , sin 30 cos 210 ,sin 210 ,2 2

x y

.

The reflection of the point over the x-axis is equivalent to a rotation of 330 from the

positive x-axis. The coordinates of the new point are

3 1

( , ) cos30 , sin 30 cos330 ,sin 330 ,2 2

x y

.

If we plot all of the points where 30 , 45 , and 60 and their reflections, then we get most of

the unit circle. To obtain the rest of the unit circle we have to examine what happens to a point

when 0 .

Notice that the value of x is equal to 1 and that the value of y is zero. Thus, when 0 , the

point ( , ) 1,0x y . Even though this point does not form a right triangle, any point on a circle

can be found by using cosine and sine. Therefore, cos0 1 and sin0 0 .

If we reflect the point over the y-axis, then the new point is ( , ) 1,0x y . This is equivalent

to a rotation of 180 from the positive x-axis. The coordinates of the new point are:

( , ) cos0 ,sin 0 cos180 ,sin180 1,0x y .

Jordan School District Page 311 Secondary Mathematics 2

Finally we need to observe what happens when we rotate a point 90 from the positive x-axis.

Notice that the value of y is equal to 1 and that the value of x is zero. Thus, when 90 , the

point ( , ) 0,1x y . Therefore, cos90 0 and sin90 1 .

If we reflect the point over the x-axis, then the new point is ( , ) 0, 1x y . This is equivalent

to a rotation of 270 from the positive x-axis. The coordinates of the new point are:

( , ) cos90 , sin90 cos270 ,sin 270 0, 1x y .

Plotting all of the points, we obtain what is referred to as the unit circle.

The unit circle can be used to find exact values of trigonometric ratios for the angles that relate to

the special right triangle angles.

Jordan School District Page 312 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 1:

Find sin135 .

Answer:

The point that has been rotated 135 from the positive x-axis has coordinates 2 2

,2 2

. The

y-coordinate is the sine value, therefore, 2

sin1352

.

Example 2:

Find cos240 .

Answer:

The point that has been rotated 240 from the positive x-axis has coordinates 1 3

,2 2

. The

x-coordinate is the cosine value, therefore, 1

cos 2402

.

Example 3:

Find all values of , 0 360 , for which 1

sin2

.

Answer:

The points that have been rotated 30 and 150 from the positive x-axis have coordinates

3 1,

2 2

and 3 1

,2 2

respectively. The y-coordinate is the sine value and both points have a

y-coordinate of 1

2.

Example 4:

Find all values of , 0 360 , for which cos 1 .

Answer:

The point that has been rotated 180 from the positive x-axis has coordinates 1,0 . The x-

coordinate is the cosine value which is 1 .

Jordan School District Page 313 Secondary Mathematics 2

Defining Tangent Values

Another way to write tan is sin

tancos

. This can be shown algebraically as follows:

opposite

sin hypotenusetan

adjacentcos

hypotenuse

Use the definitionopposite

sinhypotenuse

and

adjacentcos

hypotenuse .

opposite adjacenttan

hypotenuse hypotenuse

Rewrite the division problem so that it is easier

to work with.

opposite hypotenusetan

hypotenuse adjacent

Dividing by a fraction is the same as

multiplying by its reciprocal.

opposite hypotenusetan

adjacent hypotenuse

Use the commutative property of

multiplication to rearrange the terms.

oppositetan 1

adjacent

opposite sintan

adjacent cos

Example 5:

Find tan 210 .

Answer:

The coordinates of the point that has been rotated 210 from the positive x-axis are

3 1, .

2 2

sintan

cos

sin 210tan 210

cos 210

Use the coordinates of the point to find

tan 210 .

1

2tan 2103

2

1sin 210

2 and

3sin 210

2

1 3tan 210

2 2 Rewrite the division problem.

1 2tan 210

2 3

Dividing by a fraction is the same as

multiplying by the reciprocal.

1tan 210

3 Simplify.

3tan 210

3 Rationalize the denominator.

Jordan School District Page 314 Secondary Mathematics 2

Tangent Values for the Angles on the Unit Circle

0 30 45 60 90 120 135 150

tan 0 3

3 1 3 undefined 3 1

3

3

180 210 225 240 270 300 315 330

tan 0 3

3 1 3 undefined 3 1

3

3

Previously we defined the six trigonometric functions. Notice that cosecant, secant, and

cotangent are reciprocals of sine, cosine, and tangent, respectively.

The Six Trigonometric Functions

sine opposite

sinhypotenuse

cosine adjacent

coshypotenuse

tangent opposite

tanadjacent

cosecant 1 hypotenuse

cscsin opposite

secant 1 hypotenuse

seccos adjacent

cotangent 1 adjacent

cottan opposite

Example 6:

Find sec60 .

Answer:

adjacent 1cos60

hypotenuse 2 and secant is the reciprocal of cosine therefore,

hypotenuse 2sec60 2

adjacent 1 .

Example 7:

Find cot330 .

Answer:

sin330 3tan 330

cos330 3

and cotangent is the reciprocal of tangent therefore,

cos330 3 3 3 3 3cot 330 3

sin330 33 3 3

.

Jordan School District Page 315 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 8:

Find all values of , 0 360 , for which 2

csc3

.

Answer:

Cosecant is the reciprocal of sine, therefore find all the values that satisfy 3

sin2

. The

angles rotated 60 and 120 from the positive x-axis have coordinates 1 3

,2 2

and 1 3

,2 2

respectively. Both have y-coordinates of 3

2. Both will have a cosecant of

2

3.

Practice Exercises A

Find the value indicated.

1. sin135 2. cos270 3. tan300 4. sin 45

5. cos60 6. tan120 7. sin180 8. cos0

9. tan 210 10. sin 240 11. cos225 12. tan315

13. csc330 14. sec30 15. cot150 16. csc90

17. sec180 18. cot315 19. csc210 20. sec225

21. cot 270 22. csc45 23. sec120 24. cot 90

Find all values of , 0 360 , that make the statement true.

25. 2

sin2

26. 1

cos2

27. tan 1 28. sin 1

29. 3

cos2

30. tan 0 31. 2

csc3

32. sec 2

33. cot 3 34. csc 1 35. sec 1 36.

cot 1

Jordan School District Page 316 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

Refer to the diagram. Give the letter that could stand for the function value.

1. 180cos

3. sin30

5. sin 0

7. cos90

9. sin135

11. sin330

2. 270sin

4. cos135

6. cos330

8. sin 240

10. cos240

12. cos0

For the indicated point, tell if the value for sin or cos is positive, negative, or neither.

13. cosC

15. sin D

17. cos E

19. cos F

21. sin A

23. sinC

14. sinG

16. cos H

18. sin B

20. cos B

22. cosG

24. sin E

Jordan School District Page 317 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 5 Honors Prove Trigonometric Identities

Trigonometry Proofs

H.5.7 Prove trigonometric identities using definitions, the Pythagorean Theorem, or

other relationships.

H.5.7 Use the relationships to solve problems.

VOCABULARY

A trigonometric identity is a statement of equality that is true for all values of the variable for

which both sides of the equation are defined. The set of values for which the variable is defined

is called the validity of the identity.

The statement sin

tancos

is an example of a trigonometric identity. The validity of the

identity would not include values of that would make cos 0 because dividing by zero is

undefined.

Basic Trigonometric Identities

Reciprocal Identities

1csc

sin

1sec

cos

1cot

tan

1sin

csc

1cos

sec

1tan

cot

Quotient Identities

sintan

cos

coscot

sin

Pythagorean Identities

2 2cos sin 1 2 21 tan sec 2 2cot 1 csc

Cofunction Identities

sin 90 cos cos 90 sin tan 90 cot

Negative Angle Identities

sin sin cos cos tan tan

Recall the work that you have done with expressions that are quadratic in nature. For example,

2( 3) 7 3 10x x is an expression that is quadratic in nature. If 3u x , then the

expression can be rewritten as 2 7 10u u . This could then be factored as 5 2u u .

Replacing u with 3x , you get 3 5 3 2x x . Trigonometry expressions can also be

Jordan School District Page 318 Secondary Mathematics 2

quadratic in nature. For example, the expression 2cos 5cos 6x x is quadratic in nature. If

cosu x , then it could be rewritten as 2 5 6u u . This could then be factored as 2 3 .u u

Substituting cos x back in for u, the factored expression is cos 2 cos 3x x . You may need

to use this idea when proving trigonometric identities.

Trigonometry Proofs

In a trigonometric proof you manipulate one side of the equation using the known trigonometric

identities until it matches the other side of the equation. Pick the more complicated side to

manipulate.

Example 1:

Prove the identity 2 21 sec tanx x .

Answer: 2 21 sec tanx x Manipulate the right side of the equation.

2

2 2

1 sin1

cos cos

x

x x

Rewrite 2sec x and 2tan x using the reciprocal

and quotient identities. 2

2

1 sin1

cos

x

x

The fractions have a common denominator.

Subtract the numerators.

2

2

cos1

cos

x

x

Us the Pythagorean identity 2 2cos sin 1

to replace the numerator with 2cos .

1 1 Simplify.

Example 2:

Prove the trigonometric identity 2 3cos cos sin cosx x x x .

Answer: 2 3cos cos sin cosx x x x Manipulate the left side of the equation.

2 3cos 1 sin cosx x x Factor cos x from the two terms cos x and

2cos sinx x .

2 3cos cos cosx x x

Use the Pythagorean Identity 2 2cos sin 1x x to replace 21 sin x with 2cos x .

3 3cos cosx x Multiply.

Jordan School District Page 319 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 3:

Prove the identity sin tan cos secx x x x .

Answer:

sin tan cos secx x x x Manipulate the left side of the equation.

sinsin cos sec

cos

xx x x

x Rewrite tan x using a quotient identity.

sin sincos sec

1 cos

x xx x

x

2sin

cos seccos

xx x

x

Rewrite sin x so that it is a fraction.

Multiply the fractions.

2sin cossec

cos 1

x xx

x

2sin cos cos

seccos 1 cos

x x xx

x x

Rewrite cos x so that it is a fraction.

The common denominator is cos 1 cosx x .

Multiply the second fraction by cos

cos

x

x.

2 2sin cossec

cos cos

x xx

x x Simplify.

2 2sin cossec

cos

x xx

x

Add the numerators.

1sec

cosx

x Use the Pythagorean Identity 2 2cos sin 1x x .

sec secx x Use the reciprocal identities to rewrite the

fraction.

Example 4:

Prove the identity tan cot sec cscx x x x .

Answer:

tan cot sec cscx x x x Manipulate the left side of the equation.

sin cossec csc

cos sin

x xx x

x x

Rewrite tan x and cot x using the quotient

identities.

sin cossec csc

cos sin

x xx x

x x

sin sin cos cossec csc

cos sin sin cos

x x x xx x

x x x x

2 2sin cos

sec csccos sin cos sin

x xx x

x x x x

Find a common denominator in order to add

the fractions. The common denominator is

cos sin cos sinx x x x .

Multiply the first fraction by sin

sin

x

x and the

second fraction by cos

cos

x

x.

Jordan School District Page 320 Secondary Mathematics 2

Simplify. 2 2sin cos

sec csccos sin

x xx x

x x

Now that the fractions have a common

denominator, add the numerators.

1sec csc

cos sinx x

x x Use a Pythagorean Identity, 2 2cos sin 1 ,

to simplify the numerator.

1 1sec csc

cos sinx x

x x

Rewrite the single fraction as a product of two

fractions.

sec csc sec cscx x x x Use the reciprocal identities to rewrite the

fractions.

Example 5:

Prove the trigonometric identity cos 1 sin

2sec1 sin cos

x xx

x x

.

Answer:

cos 1 sin2sec

1 sin cos

x xx

x x

Manipulate the left side of the equation.

cos 1 sin2sec

1 sin cos

x xx

x x

cos cos 1 sin 1 sin2sec

1 sin cos cos 1 sin

x x x xx

x x x x

Find a common denominator. The common

denominator will be the product of the two

denominators 1 sin cosx x . Multiply the first

fraction by cos

cos

x

x and the second fraction by

1 sin

1 sin

x

x

.

2 2cos 1 2sin sin2sec

1 sin cos 1 sin cos

x x xx

x x x x

Simplify.

2

2

1 sin 1 sin 1 sin sin sin

1 sin 1 sin 2 2sin sin

x x x x x

x x x x

2 2cos 1 2sin sin2sec

1 sin cos

x x xx

x x

Add the numerators.

2 2cos sin 1 2sin2sec

1 sin cos

x x xx

x x

Rearrange the terms using the properties of

equality.

1 1 2sin

2sec1 sin cos

xx

x x

2 2sin

2sec1 sin cos

xx

x x

Use the Pythagorean Identity 2 2cos sin 1

to simplify the numerator.

2 1 sin2sec

1 sin cos

xx

x x

Factor a two from both terms in the numerator.

Jordan School District Page 321 Secondary Mathematics 2

1 sin 22sec

1 sin cos

xx

x x

Rearrange the terms using the properties of

equality.

21 2sec

cosx

x

12 2sec

cosx

x

Simplify.

Rearrange the terms using the properties of

equality.

Rewrite the fraction using a reciprocal identity.

2 sec 2secx x

Practice Exercises A

Prove the trigonometric identities.

1. sec cot cscx x x 2. sin sec tanx x x

3. tan cos sinx x x 4. cot sin cosx x x

5. csc sin cot cosx x x x 6. tan csc cos 1x x x

7. cot sec sin 1x x x 8. tan cot

sincsc

x xx

x

9. 2 2sin 1 cot 1x x 10. 21 cos

sin tancos

xx x

x

11. 21 sin

cos cotsin

xx x

x

12. 2 2 2 2sec csc sec cscx x x x

13. 2sec sec sin cosx x x x 14. 2csc csc cos sinx x x x

15. cos 1 sin

2sec1 sin cos

x xx

x x

16.

2 1 sinsec tan

1 sin

xx x

x

Jordan School District Page 322 Secondary Mathematics 2

Solving Trigonometric Equations

Example 6:

Find all values of x if cos cos sin 0x x x and 0 360x .

Answer:

cos cos sin 0x x x

cos 1 sin 0x x Factor cos x out of both terms.

cos 0x 1 sin 0

1 sin

x

x

Use the zero product property to set each factor

equal to zero.

1cos 0x 1sin 1 x To find x, an angle, use the inverse cosine and

sine.

90 ,270x 90x Find all the angles between 0 and 360 that

have a cosine of 0 or a sine of 1.

The angles that satisfy the trigonometric equation are 90x and 270x .

Example 7:

Find all values of x if 22cos cos 1 0x x and 0 360x .

Answer:

22cos cos 1 0x x

2cos 1 cos 1 0x x Factor.

2cos 1 0

2cos 1

1cos

2

x

x

x

cos 1 0

cos 1

x

x

Use the zero product property to set each factor

equal to zero.

1 1cos

2x

1cos 1x

To find x, an angle, use the inverse cosine.

60 ,300x 180x Find all the angles between 0 and 360 that

have a cosine of 12 or a cosine of 1 .

The angles that satisfy the trigonometric equation are 60x , 300x , and 180x .

Jordan School District Page 323 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

Find all values of x if 0 360x .

1. 0cossincos2 xxx 2. 0tancostan2 xxx

3. xxx tansintan 2 4. xxx sintansin 2

5. 3tan2 x 6. 1sin2 2 x

7. 01cos4cos4 2 xx 8. 01sin3sin2 2 xx

9. 0sin2sin 2 xx 10. xx 2cos2sin3

Jordan School District Page 324 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 5 Cluster 6 Honors (F.TF.9)

Prove and Apply Trigonometric Identities

H.5.8 Prove the addition and subtraction formulas for sine, cosine, and tangent and use

them to solve problems.

H.5.9 Justify half-angle and double-angle theorems for trigonometric values.

It is possible to find the exact sine, cosine, and tangent values of angles that do not come from

special right triangles, but you have to use the angles from the unit circle to find them. The

following formulas can be used to find the sine, cosine, and tangent values of angles that are not

on the unit circle.

The Cosine of the Sum of Two Angles

cos cos cos sin sinA B A B A B

The Cosine of the Difference of Two Angles

cos cos cos sin sinA B A B A B

The Sine of the Sum of Two Angles

sin sin cos cos sinA B A B A B

The Sine of the Difference of Two Angles

sin sin cos cos sinA B A B A B

The Tangent of the Sum of Two Angles

tan tan

tan1 tan tan

A BA B

A B

The Tangent of the Difference of Two

Angles

tan tan

tan1 tan tan

A BA B

A B

Proof of the Cosine Difference Formula: cos cos cos sin sinA B A B A B

Figure 1

Figure 2

Figure 2 shows an angle in standard position. Figure 1 shows the same angle, but it has been

rotated and A B . The chords opposite the angle, , have equal length in both circles.

Therefore, CD is equal to the length of EF . Find the measure of CD and EF .

Jordan School District Page 325 Secondary Mathematics 2

Finding CD

2 2

cos 1 sin 0CD Use the distance formula to find the distance

between the points cos ,sin and 1,0 .

2 2cos 2cos 1 sinCD Expand

2cos 1 . Remember that

2

cos 1 cos 1 cos 1 .

2 2cos sin 2cos 1CD Rearrange the terms so that 2cos and 2sin

are next to each other.

1 2cos 1CD Recall that 2 2cos sin 1 (Pythagorean

Identity).

2 2cosCD Simplify.

Finding EF

2 2

cos cos sin sinEF A B A B

Use the distance

formula to find the

distance between the

points cos ,sinA A

and cos ,sinB B .

2 2 2 2cos 2cos cos cos sin 2sin sin sinEF A A B B A A B B

Expand

2

cos cosA B and

2

sin sinA B .

2 2 2 2cos sin cos sin 2cos cos 2sin sinEF A A B B A B A B

Rearrange the terms

so that 2cos A and 2sin A and 2cos B

and 2sin B are next to

each other.

1 1 2cos cos 2sin sinEF A B A B

Recall that 2 2cos sin 1

(Pythagorean

Identity).

2 2cos cos 2sin sinEF A B A B Simplify.

Jordan School District Page 326 Secondary Mathematics 2

Setting CD EF

2 2cos 2 2cos cos 2sin sinA B A B Set CD EF .

2 2cos 2 2cos cos 2sin sinA B A B Square each side to eliminate the square root.

2cos 2cos cos 2sin sinA B A B Subtract 2 from each side of the equation.

cos cos cos sin sinA B A B Divide each term on both sides of the equation

by 2 .

cos cos cos sin sinA B A B A B Recall that A B

The following identities are needed in order to prove the sine of a sum identity.

Negative Angle Identities

sin sin cos cos tan tan

Proof of the Cosine of a Sum: cos cos cos sin sinA B A B A B

cos cosA B A B Rewrite the expression so that it is a difference.

cos cos cos sin sin( )A B A B A B Use the cosine of a difference identity to

rewrite the expression.

cos cos cos sin sinA B A B A B Use the negative angle identities to eliminate

B .

cos cos cos sin sinA B A B A B Use the commutative property of

multiplication to rearrange the terms.

The following identities are needed in order to prove the sine of a sum identity.

Cofunction Identities

sin 90 cos cos 90 sin tan 90 cot

Proof of the Sine of a Sum: sin sin cos cos sinA B A B A B

sin cos 90A B A B Use the cofunction identity of sine

to rewrite the expression in terms of

cosine.

Jordan School District Page 327 Secondary Mathematics 2

sin cos 90

sin cos 90

A B A B

A B A B

Distribute the negative and then

group the first two terms.

sin cos 90 cos sin 90 sinA B A B A B

Use the cosine of a difference

identity to rewrite the expression.

sin sin cos cos sinA B A B A B

Use the cofunction identities to

rewrite the expression.

Proof of the Sine of a Difference: sin sin cos cos sinA B A B A B

sin sinA B A B Rewrite the expression so that it is a sum.

sin sin cos cos sinA B A B A B Use the sine of sum identity to rewrite the

expression.

sin sin cos cos sinA B A B A B Use the negative angle identities to eliminate

B .

sin sin cos cos sinA B A B A B Use the commutative property of

multiplication to rewrite the expression.

Proof of the Tangent of a Sum Identity:

tan tan

tan1 tan tan

A BA B

A B

sintan

cos

A BA B

A B

Use the definition of tangent to rewrite the

expression.

sin cos cos sin

tancos cos sin sin

A B A BA B

A B A B

Use the sine and cosine of a sum identities to

rewrite the expressions.

sin cos cos sin

cos cos cos costancos cos sin sin

cos cos cos cos

A B A B

A B A BA BA B A B

A B A B

Divide each term in the numerator and the

denominator by cos cosA B .

sin cos cos sin

cos cos cos costancos cos sin sin

cos cos cos cos

A B A B

A B A BA BA B A B

A B A B

Rewrite each expression using properties of

equality.

tan 1 1 tan

tan1 1 tan tan

A BA B

A B

Simplify using the fact that

sintan

cos

.

tan tan

tan1 tan tan

A BA B

A B

Simplify.

Jordan School District Page 328 Secondary Mathematics 2

Proof of the Tangent of a Difference Identity:

tan tan

tan1 tan tan

A BA B

A B

sintan

cos

A BA B

A B

Use the definition of tangent to rewrite the

expression.

sin cos cos sin

tancos cos sin sin

A B A BA B

A B A B

Use the sine and cosine of a difference

identities to rewrite the expressions.

sin cos cos sin

cos cos cos costancos cos sin sin

cos cos cos cos

A B A B

A B A BA BA B A B

A B A B

Divide each term in the numerator and the

denominator by cos cosA B .

sin cos cos sin

cos cos cos costancos cos sin sin

cos cos cos cos

A B A B

A B A BA BA B A B

A B A B

Rewrite each expression using properties of

equality.

tan 1 1 tan

tan1 1 tan tan

A BA B

A B

Simplify using the fact that

sintan

cos

.

tan tan

tan1 tan tan

A BA B

A B

Simplify.

Example 1:

Find the exact value of sin165 .

Answer:

sin165 sin 30 135 Find two special angles that add or subtract to

165 . (There are several possibilities.)

sin165 sin30 cos135 cos30 sin135 Use the sine of a sum identity to rewrite the

expression.

1 2 3 2sin165

2 2 2 2

Substitute known values.

2 6sin165

4 4

2 6sin165

4

Simplify.

Jordan School District Page 329 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 2:

Find the exact value of tan165 .

Answer:

tan165 tan 210 45 Find two special angles that add or subtract to

165 . (There are several possibilities.)

tan 210 tan 45tan165

1 tan 210 tan 45

Use the tangent of a difference identity to

rewrite the expression.

31

3tan165

31 1

3

Substitute known values.

3 3

3 3tan1653 3

3 3

3 3

3tan1653 3

3

3 3tan165

3 3

Simplify.

Practice Exercises A

Use a sum or difference formula to find an exact value.

1. sin15 2. cos15 3. tan 75

4. sin 75 5. cos105 6. tan105

7. sin195 8. cos195 9. tan 255

10. sin 255 11. cos285 12. tan 285

Jordan School District Page 330 Secondary Mathematics 2

Double and Half Angle Formulas

Double-Angle Theorems

sin 2 2sin cos

2 2

2

2

cos 2 cos sin

cos 2 2cos 1

cos 2 1 2sin

2

2 tantan 2

1 tan

Justification of double angle theorem for sine:

sin 2 sin Substitute 2 .

sin 2 sin cos cos sin Use the sine of a sum formula.

sin 2 2sin cos Simplify.

Justification of double angle theorem for cosine:

cos2 cos Substitute 2 .

cos2 cos cos sin sin Use the cosine of a sum formula.

2 2sin 2 cos sin Simplify.

Justification of double angle theorem for tangent:

tan 2 tan Substitute 2 .

tan tantan 2

1 tan tan

Use the tangent of a sum formula.

2

2 tan tantan 2

1 tan

Simplify.

Jordan School District Page 331 Secondary Mathematics 2

Half-Angle Theorems

1 cossin

2 2

1 coscos

2 2

1 costan

2 1 cos

Justification of half-angle theorem for sine: 2

2

2

2

cos 2 1 2sin

cos 2 2sin 1

2sin 1 cos 2

1 cos 2sin

2

1 cos 2sin

2

Use 2cos2 1 2sin . Solve the double angle

formula for sin .

1 cos 22

sin2 2

Substitute

2

.

1 cossin

2 2

Simplify.

Justification of half-angle theorem for cosine: 2

2

2

2

cos 2 2cos 1

cos 2 2cos 1

2cos 1 cos 2

1 cos 2cos

2

1 cos 2cos

2

Use 2cos2 2cos 1 . Solve the double angle

formula for cos .

1 cos 22

cos2 2

Substitute

2

.

1 coscos

2 2

Simplify.

Jordan School District Page 332 Secondary Mathematics 2

Justification of half-angle theorem for tangent:

sin2tan

2cos

2

Use

sintan

cos

. Substitute

2

.

1 cos

2tan2 1 cos

2

Use the half-angle theorems for sine and cosine.

1 cos

2tan1 cos2

2

11 cos

2tan12

1 cos2

1 costan

2 1 cos

Simplify using properties of radicals and exponents.

Practice Exercises B

Use the figures to find the exact value of each trigonometric function.

1. sin 2 2. cos2 3. tan 2

4. sin 2 5. cos2 6. tan 2

7. sin 2 8. cos2 9. tan 2

10. sin2

11. cos

2

12. tan

2

13. sin2

14. cos

2

15. tan

2

16. sin2

17. cos

2

18. tan

2

Jordan School District Page 333 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 6

Circles With and

Without Coordinates

Jordan School District Page 334 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 6 Cluster 1 (G.C.1, G.C.2, G.C.3, and Honors G.C.4)

Understand and Apply Theorems about Circles

Cluster 1: Understanding and applying theorems about circles

6.1.1 Prove that all circles are similar.

6.1.2 Understand relationships with inscribed angles, radii, and chords (the relationship

between central, inscribed, circumscribed; the relationship between inscribed

angles on a diameter; the relationship between radius and the tangent).

6.1.3 Construct the inscribed and circumscribed sides of a triangle.

6.1.3 Prove properties of angles for a quadrilateral inscribed in a circle.

6.1.4 (Honors) Construct a tangent line from a point outside a given circle to a circle.

VOCABULARY

A circle is the set of all points equidistant from a given point

which is called the center of the circle.

A radius is any segment with endpoints that are the center of the

circle and a point on the circle. Radii is the plural of radius.

AB is the radius of circle A. The center of the circle is point A.

A segment with endpoints on the circle is called a chord.

DE is a chord of circle A.

A diameter is any chord with endpoints that are on the circle and

that passes through the center of the circle. The diameter is the

longest chord of a circle.

CB is the diameter of circle A.

An angle that intersects a circle in two points and that has its

vertex at the center of the circle is a central angle.

BAF is a central angle of circle A.

Jordan School District Page 335 Secondary Mathematics 2

An angle that intersects a circle in two points and that has its

vertex on the circle is an inscribed angle.

DBC is an inscribed angle of circle A.

A polygon that is circumscribed by a circle has all of its vertices

on the circle and the polygon’s interior is completely contained

within the circle.

Circle A is circumscribed about Quadrilateral BCDE.

A planar shape or solid completely enclosed by (fits snugly inside)

another geometric shape or solid is an inscribed figure. Each of

the vertices of the enclosed figure must lie on the “outside” figure.

Quadrilateral BCDE is inscribed in circle A.

A line that intersects a circle in only one point is a tangent line.

The point where the tangent line and the circle intersect is the

point of tangency.

BC is a tangent line to circle A. Point B is the point of tangency.

A line that intersects a circle in two points is a secant line.

BC is a secant line to circle A.

Other helpful sources: http://www.mathgoodies.com/lessons/vol2/geometry.html

Jordan School District Page 336 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises A

Identify a chord, tangent line, diameter, two radii, the center, and point of tangency and, a central

angle.

1. chord: ______________________________

2. tangent line: _________________________

3. diameter: ____________________________

4. radius: ______________________________

5. point of tangency : ____________________

6. center: ______________________________

7. central angle: ________________________

Identify the term that best describes the given line, segment, or point.

8. AF

10. C

12. EG

14. CE

9. PF

11. BD

13. PC

15. P

Jordan School District Page 337 Secondary Mathematics 2

Prove All Circles are Similar

Figures that are similar have corresponding parts that are proportional. To prove that all circles

are similar, you will need to prove that their corresponding parts are proportional.

Proof that all circles are Similar

Given: A D , radius of circle A is x, and radius of circle D is y.

Prove: Circle A is similar to Circle D.

First we need to prove that ABC DEF so we need to establish AA criterion. Since

AB AC , ABC is an isosceles triangle. The base angles of an isosceles triangle are congruent

to one another. Therefore B C . Similarly, DE DF so DEF is also an isosceles

triangle. Therefore E F . The sum of the angles in a triangle is 180 so

180A B C and 180D E F . We know that B C and E F so

2 180A B and 2 180D E . Solving each equation for A and D yields

180 2A B and 180 2D E . Since A D we know that

180 2 180 2B E and B E . By AA similarity ABC DEF . Because the two

triangles are similar their sides will be proportional. The ratio of proportionality is AB x

yDE .

AB is a radius of circle A and DE is a radius of circle D. The ratio of the radii of the circles is

x

y. The diameter of circle A is 2x and the diameter of circle D is 2y . The ratio of the diameter

of circle A to the diameter of circle D is 2

2

x x

y y . The circumference of circle A is 2 x and the

circumference of circle D is 2 y . The ratio of the circumference of circle A to the

circumference of circle D is 2

2

x x

y y

. The corresponding parts of circle A are proportional to

the corresponding parts of circle D, therefore circle A is similar to circle D.

In addition to having corresponding parts proportional to one another, figures that are similar to one

another are dilations of one another. A dilation is a transformation that produces an image that is the

same shape as the original figure but the image is a different size. The dilation uses a center and a

scale factor to create a proportional figure. The ratio of the corresponding parts is the scale factor of

the dilation.

Jordan School District Page 338 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

1. Given a circle of a radius of 3 and another circle with a radius of 5, compare the ratios of the

two radii, the two diameters, and the two circumferences.

2. Given a circle of a radius of 6 and another circle with a radius of 4, compare the ratios of the

two radii, the two diameters, and the two circumferences.

Properties of Central Angles and Inscribed Angles

VOCABULARY

An arc is a portion of a circle's circumference.

An intercepted arc is the arc that lies in the interior of an

angle and has its endpoints on the angle.

A central angle is an angle that intersects a circle in two

points and that has its vertex at the center of the circle. The

measure of the angle is the same as the measure of its

intercepted arc.

An inscribed angle is an angle whose vertex is on a circle and

whose sides contain chords of the circle. The measure of the

angle is half the measure of the intercepted arc.

ACB is a central angle of circle C and its intercepted arc is

AB and m ACB mAB . ADB is an inscribed angle of

circle A and its intercepted arc is AB and 1

.2

m ADB mAB

If the m ACB is less than 180, then A, B, and all the

points on C that lie in the interior of m ACB form a minor

arc. A minor arc is named by two consecutive points. The

measure of a minor arc is the measure of its central angle.

AB is the minor arc of circle C.

Points A, B, and all points on C that do not lie on AB form

a major arc. A major arc is named by three consecutive

Jordan School District Page 339 Secondary Mathematics 2

points. The measure of a major arc is 360° minus the measure

of the related minor arc.

ADB is the major arc of circle C.

A semicircle is an arc whose central angle measures 180°. A

semicircle is named by three points.

An inscribed angle that intercepts a semicircle is a right angle.

1 1

180 902 2

m ABC mAC

The arc addition postulate states that the measure of an arc

formed by two adjacent arcs is the sum of the measures of the

two arcs.

mML mLN mMN

Congruent arcs are arcs with the same measure either in the

same circle or congruent circles. Congruent central angles or

inscribed angles have congruent arcs and congruent arcs have

congruent central angles or inscribed angles.

ABC CBD AC CD

Jordan School District Page 340 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises C

FH and JK are diameters. Find the measure of each angle or arc.

1. m FAJ

3. m KAF

5. mLH

7. mKF

9. mJH

2. m LAH

4. mJL

6. mHK

8. mJF

10. mJHF

FH and KJ are diameters, 40m FHM , 60mHK , and 50mJL . Find the measure of

each angle or arc.

11. mJF

13. m JKL

15. m HAK

17. mMK

12. mLH

14. mFM

16. mKF

18. mJGK

19. Find the measure of angles 1, 2, and 3.

20. Find the measure of angles 1 and 2 if

1 2 13m x and 2m x .

Jordan School District Page 341 Secondary Mathematics 2

Theorems If two chords intersect inside a circle, then the measure of

each angle formed is half the sum of the measures of the arcs

intercepted by the angle and its vertical angle.

12

2

11

2

m mCD mAB

m mBC mAD

If two chords intersect inside a circle, then the product of the

lengths of the segments of one chord is equal to the product

of the lengths of the segments of the other chord.

xy wz

Example 1:

Find the value of x.

The two chords forming the angle

that measures x intercepts the

two arcs AB and CD . The

measure of will be equal to

one-half the sum of the measures

of the intercepted arcs.

Answer:

Example 2: Find the value of x.

The chords AC and BD intersect

inside the circle, therefore the

product of the lengths of the

segments of each chord are equal

to one another. By setting up this

equation you can solve for x.

Answer:

9 3 6

9 18

2

x

x

x

x

1

2

1106 174

2

1280

2

140

x mAB mCD

x

x

x

Jordan School District Page 342 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises D

Find the value of x.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

Jordan School District Page 343 Secondary Mathematics 2

Theorems If a line is tangent to a circle, then it is perpendicular to the

radius drawn at the point of tangency.

If l is tangent to C at B, then l to CB .

In a plane, if a line is perpendicular to a radius of a circle at

its endpoints on the circle, then the line is tangent to the

circle.

If l toCB , then l is tangent to C at B.

If two segments from the same point outside a circle are

tangent to the circle, then they are congruent.

If BD and CD are tangent to circle A at points B and C,

then BD CD .

Example 3: Using Properties of Tangents

AC is tangent to B at point C. Find BC.

Answer:

2 2 2

22 2

2

2

2

12 13

144 169

169 144

25

5

AC BC AB

BC

BC

BC

BC

BC

Since AC is tangent to circle B at point C,

AC BC . This makes ABC a right triangle

and the Pythagorean Theorem can be used to

find BC.

Jordan School District Page 344 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 4: Finding the Radius of a Circle

BC is tangent to circle A at point B. Solve for r.

Answer:

2 2 2

22 2

2 2

15 9

225 18 81

225 18 81

225 81 18

144 18

8

BC AB AC

r r

r r r

r

r

r

r

Since BC is tangent to circle A at point B,

AB BC . This makes a right triangle

and the Pythagorean Theorem can be used to

find r.

Example 5: Verify a Line is Tangent to a Circle

Show that AC is tangent to B .

Answer:

2 2 29 12 15

81 144 225

225 225

If you can show that 2 2 29 12 15 , then the

lines are perpendicular.

225 = 225 is a true statement, so the lines are

perpendicular.

ABC

Jordan School District Page 345 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 6: Using Properties of Tangents

Find x if AB is tangent to circle C at point B

and AD is tangent to circle C at point D.

Answer:

2 3 11

2 8

4

AD AB

x

x

x

Because AB and AD are tangent to the same

circle and contain the same exterior point, the

measures of each length are equal.

Practice Exercises E

Find the value of x.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6. Prove that radius AB AC using the Pythagorean

Theorem.

Jordan School District Page 346 Secondary Mathematics 2

Circumscribed Angles

Theorem If two secants, a secant and a tangent, or two tangents intersect in the exterior of a circle, then the

measure of the angle formed is one-half the positive difference of the measures of the intercepted

arcs.

Two Secants Secant and Tangent Two Tangents

1

2m A mDE mBC 1

2m A mDC mBC 1

2m A mCDB mBC

Example 7:

Find the value of x.

A is formed by two secants so its measure will be one-

half the positive difference of the two intercepted arcs DE

and BC .

1

2

1120 54

2

166

2

33

m A mDE mBC

x

x

x

Example 8:

Find the value of x.

A is formed by two tangents so its measure will be one-

half the positive difference of the two intercepted arcs

360BDC x and BC x .

Jordan School District Page 347 Secondary Mathematics 2

1

2

130 360

2

130 360 2

2

30 180

150

150

m A mBDC mBC

x x

x

x

x

x

Practice Exercises F

Find the value of x. Assume lines that appear tangent are tangent.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Jordan School District Page 348 Secondary Mathematics 2

Constructions

See Secondary Math 1 for more help with constructions.

Circumscribe a triangle with a circle

Step 1: Create a triangle.

Step 2: Construct the perpendicular bisector of AB by

setting the compass to slightly more than half the

distance between points A and B.

Step 3: With the compass on point A, draw an arc on both

sides of .

Step 4: With the compass on point B, draw an arc on both

sides of .

Step 5: With a straightedge, draw the line connecting the

intersection points. This is the perpendicular

bisector of .

Step 6: Construct the perpendicular bisector of another side

of the triangle.

Step 7: The intersection of the two perpendicular bisectors

will be equidistant from the vertices. Set the

compass to the distance between a vertex and this

intersection point.

Step 8: With the compass on the intersection of the

perpendicular bisectors, draw a circle that

circumscribes the triangle.

Step 1

Steps 3 and 4

Step 5

Step 8

AB

AB

AB

Jordan School District Page 349 Secondary Mathematics 2

Inscribe a circle in a triangle

Step 1: Draw a triangle. Label the vertices A, B, and C.

Step 2: Bisect A of the triangle by setting the compass

to a medium length. With the compass

somewhere on point A draw an arc from AB to

AC .

Step 3: With the compass on AB where the arc intersects

the segment, draw an arc in the interior of A .

Step 4: With the compass on AC where the arc intersects

the segment, draw an arc in the interior of A .

Step 5: Connect point A to the intersection of the two

arcs in its interior with a straightedge. This is the

bisector of the angle.

Step 6: Bisect another one of the angles.

Step 7: The intersection point of the two bisectors is the

center of the inscribed circle.

Step 8: Construct a perpendicular from the center point to

one side of the triangle.

Step 9: Set the compass to be more than the distance from

the center to a side of the triangle AC . With

the compass on the intersection of the two angle

bisectors, draw two arcs that intersect a side of the

triangle AC .

Step 10: Set the compass to the distance between the two

arcs that intersect a side of the triangle AC .

With the compass on one of the intersections,

draw an arc below a side of the triangle AC .

Step 11: With the compass on the other intersection, draw

an arc below a side of the triangle AC .

Step 2

Steps 3 and 4

Step 5

Step 6

Step 8

Step 12

Jordan School District Page 350 Secondary Mathematics 2

Step 12: Draw the line connecting the intersection of the

two angle bisectors to the intersection of the two

arcs below a side of the triangle AC .

Step 13: Place the compass on the center point; adjust the

length of the compass to touch the intersection of

the perpendicular line and the side of the triangle.

Step 14: Now create the inscribed circle.

Step 14

Quadrilaterals Inscribed in Circles

Theorem If a quadrilateral is inscribed in a circle, its opposite angles are supplementary.

Proof of Theorem:

Given: Quadrilateral ABCD is inscribed in circle E

Prove: A and C are supplementary. B and D are

supplementary.

By arc addition and the definitions of arc measure, 360mBCD mBAD and

360mABC mADC . Since the measure of the intercepted arc is twice the measure of the

inscribed angle, 2m A mBCD , 2m C mBAD , 2m B mADC and 2m D mABC . By

substitution 2 2 360m A m C and 2 2 360m B m D . Using reverse distribution, the

equations can be rewritten as 2 360m A m C and 2 360m B m D . Applying

the division property of equality the equations can be rewritten as 180m A m C and

180m B m D . By definition of supplementary, A and C are supplementary and B

and D are supplementary.

Jordan School District Page 351 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 1:

Find x and y.

The opposite angles of a

quadrilateral inscribed in a

circle are supplementary.

Answer:

180

180 80

100

x m EDC

x

x

180

180 120

60

y m BCD

y

y

Practice Exercises G

1. Triangles EFG and EGH are inscribed in A with EF FG .

Find the measure of each numbered angle if 1 12 8m x

and 2 3 8m x .

2. Quadrilateral LMNO is inscribed in P . If 80m M and

40m N , then find m O and m L .

3. Find the measure of each numbered angle for the figure if

120.mJK Diameter JL .

Jordan School District Page 352 Secondary Mathematics 2

4. Find the measure of each numbered angle for the figure if

1

2m R x and

15.

3m K x

5. Quadrilateral QRST is inscribed in a

circle. If 45m Q and 100,m R find

m S and m T .

6. Quadrilateral ABCD is inscribed in a

circle. If 28m C and 110m B , find

m A and m D .

(Honors) Construct a tangent line from a point outside a given circle to a circle

Step 1: Start with a circle with center A, and a point B outside

of the circle.

Step 2: Draw a line segment with endpoints A and B.

Step 3: Find the midpoint M of AB by constructing the

perpendicular bisector of AB . Depending of the size

of the circle and the location of point B, the midpoint

may be inside or outside of the circle.

Step 4: Place the compass on point M and set the compass

width to the center A of the circle.

Step 5: Without changing the compass width, draw an arc that

intersects the circle in two points. These points (label

them C and D) will be the points of tangency.

Step 6: Draw BC and BD . These lines are tangent to circle A

from a point B outside circle A.

Step 3

Step 5

Step 6

Other helpful construction resources:

http://www.khanacademy.org/math/geometry/circles-topic/v/right-triangles-inscribed-in-circles--

proof;

http://www.mathopenref.com/consttangents.html;

http://www.mathsisfun.com/geometry/construct-triangleinscribe.html;

http://www.mathsisfun.com/geometry/construct-trianglecircum.html;

http://www.benjamin-mills.com/maths/Year11/circle-theorems-proof.pdf

M

M

M

Jordan School District Page 353 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 6 Cluster 2 (G.C.5)

Circles with Coordinates and Without Coordinates

Cluster 2: Finding arc lengths and areas of sectors of circles

6.2.1 The length of the arc intercepted by the angle is proportional to the radius

6.2.1 The radian measure is the ratio between the intercepted arc and the radius

6.2.1 Derive the formula for the area of the sector

Recall that the measure of an arc is the same as the measure of the

central angle that intercepts it. The measure of an arc is in degrees,

while the arc length is a fraction of the circumference. Thus, the

measure of an arc is not the same as the arc length.

Consider the circles and the arcs shown at the

left. All circles are similar therefore circle 2 can

be dilated so that it is mapped on top of circle 1.

The same dilation maps the slice of the small

circle to the slice of the large circle. Since

corresponding lengths of similar figures are

proportional the following relationship exists.

1 1

2 2

r l

r l

Solving this proportion for 1l gives the following

equation.

1 2 1 2

21 1

2

r l l r

lr l

r

This means that the arc length, 1,l is equal to the radius, 1,r times some number, 2

2

l

r. We can

find that number by looking at how the central angle compares to the entire circle. Given a

central angle of 30 it is 30

360

or

1

12 of the entire circle. The length of the arc that is

intercepted by the central angle of 30 will also be 1

12 of the circumference. Therefore the

length of the arc depends only on the radius.

Jordan School District Page 354 Secondary Mathematics 2

To generalize the relationship between the arc length and the radius, set up a proportion showing

that the central angle compared to the whole circle is proportional to the length of the arc

compared to the circumference of the circle.

360 2

l

r

Find the length of an arc by multiplying the central angle ratio by the circumference of the circle

(2πr). In other words solve for l (length).

2360

l r

This equation can be simplified because 360, 2 and are all constants.

2

360

180

l r

l r

Compare this formula with the formula we obtained earlier 21 1

2

lr l

r . The number 2

2

l

r is

180

where is the measure of the central angle in degrees.

Formula for arc length

If the central angle of a circle with radius r is degrees, then the length, l, of the arc it intercepts

is given by: 180

l r

.

Example 1: Finding arc length

Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 5 centimeters and the central angle is 72 . Write

the answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to nearest thousandth.

Answer:

180

725

180

l r

l

Use the formula for arc length. Substitute 5 in

for r and 72 in for .

725

180

360

180

2 6.283

l

l

l

Simplify.

The arc length is 2 centimeters or approximately 6.283 centimeters.

Jordan School District Page 355 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 2: Finding arc length

Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 7 inches and the central angle is 120 . Write the

answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.

Answer:

180

1207

180

l r

l

Use the formula for arc length. Substitute 7 in

for r and 120 in for .

1207

180

840

180

1414.661

3

l

l

l

Simplify.

The arc length is 14

3 inches or approximately 14.661inches.

Practice Exercises A

1. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 10 yards and the central angle is 44 . Write

the answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.

2. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 8 meters and the central angle is 99 . Write

the answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.

3. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 2 feet and the central angle is 332 . Write the

answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.

4. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 3 kilometers and the central angle is 174 .

Write the answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.

5. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 9 centimeters and the central angle is 98 .

Write the answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.

6. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 6 miles the central angle is 125 . Write the

answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.

Jordan School District Page 356 Secondary Mathematics 2

Another way to measure angles is with radians. The radian measure of a central angle is defined

as the ratio of the arc length compared to the radius. If is the radian measure of a central

angle then, 180

180

rl

r r

, where is the measure of the central angle in degrees. To

convert any angle in degrees to radian measure multiply the angle in degrees by 180

.

Converting Between Radians and Degrees

To convert degrees to radians, multiply the angle by radians

180

.

To covert radians to degrees, multiply the angle by 180

radians

.

Example 3: Converting from degrees to radians

Convert an angle of 25 to radian measure. Leave your answer in terms of .

Answer:

radians25

180

25 radians

180

Multiply the angle by the conversion factor

radians

180

.

5 radians

36 Simplify the fraction.

Example 4: Converting from radians to degrees

Convert an angle of 2

radians to degrees.

Answer:

180 radians

2 radians

180 radians

2 radians

Multiply the angle by the conversion factor

180

radians

.

90 Simplify the fraction.

Practice Exercises B

Find the degree measure of each angle expressed in radians and find the radian measure of each

angle expressed in degrees. (Express radian measures in terms of .)

1. 135 2. 2

3

3. 45

4. 5

4

5. 330 6.

5

2

Jordan School District Page 357 Secondary Mathematics 2

The arc length can also be found by using a radian measure for the central angle. When this

happens the formula is l r , where is in radian measure.

Practice Exercises C

Compare your answers found here to those in Practice Exercises A.

1. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 10 yards and the central angle is 11

45

. Write

the answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.

2. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 8 meters and the central angle is 11

20

. Write

the answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.

3. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 2 feet and the central angle is 83

45

. Write the

answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.

4. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 3 kilometers and the central angle is 29

30

.

Write the answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.

5. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 9 centimeters and the central angle is 49

90

.

Write the answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.

6. Find the arc length if the radius of a circle is 6 miles the central angle is 25

36

. Write the

answer in terms of and give a decimal approximation to the nearest thousandth.

Area of a Sector

A region of a circle determined by two radii and the arc intercepted by

the radii is called a sector of the circle (think of a slice of pie). A

sector is a fraction of a circle, so the ratio of the area of the sector to

the area of the entire circle is equal to the measure of the central angle

creating the sector to the measure of the entire circle.

Symbolically this ratio is area of a sector measure of central angle

area of circle measure of circle .

Jordan School District Page 358 Secondary Mathematics 2

Using substitution this becomes, 2

area of a sector

360r

. Solving for the area of a sector we

get: 2area of a sector360

r

.

Another way of looking at area of a sector is shown below.

The area of a circle is

2A r . The area of one-half a circle is 21

2A r .

The area of one-fourth circle is

21

4A r . The area of any fraction of a circle is

2

360A r .

Area of a sector

If the angle is in degrees then the area of a sector, A, is 2

360A r

.

(Rewriting the formula for area of a sector you get 21

2 180A r

, recall that an angle in radian measure is equal to

180

where is in degrees.)

If the angle is in radian measure then the area of a sector, A, is 21

2A r .

Example 5:

Find the area of a sector with radius 5 cm and central angle of 135 . Express your answer in

terms of and approximate it to the nearest thousandths.

Answer:

2

360A r

Use the formula for the area of a sector with

the angle in degrees.

21355

360A

3

258

A

75

8A

Substitute known values. 135 and 5r

Simplify.

The area of the sector is 75

29.4528 cm

2.

Jordan School District Page 359 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises D

Find the area of the sector given the radius and central angle. Express your answer in terms of

and approximate it to the nearest thousandths.

1. A radius of 2 feet and a central angle of 180 .

2. A radius of 5 centimeters and a central angle of 90 .

3. A radius of 4 inches and a central angle of 60 .

4. A radius of 10 inches and a central angle of 120 .

5. A radius of 10 meters and a central angle of 45 .

6. A radius of 7 centimeters and a central angle of 2

.

7. A radius of 2 millimeters and a central angle of 5

6 .

8. A radius of 6 feet and a central angle of 5

4 .

9. A radius of 3 inches and a central angle of 3

2 .

10. A radius of 6 meters and a central angle of 5

3 .

Jordan School District Page 360 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 6 Cluster 3 (G.GPE.1)

Equation of a Circle

Cluster 3: Translating between descriptions and equations for a conic section

6.3.1 Find the equation of a circle given the center and the radius using the Pythagorean

Theorem; also complete the square to find the center of the circle given the

equation

Deriving the Equation of a Circle Centered at the Origin

A circle is the set of all points equidistant from a given point called the center. In order to derive

the equation of a circle, we need to find the distance from the center to any point ,x y on the

circle. This distance is the length of the radius. We can derive the equation of a circle using the

distance formula or the Pythagorean Theorem.

Create a right triangle with the radius as the hypotenuse, the

length x as the horizontal leg, and the length y as the vertical

leg.

Using the Pythagorean Theorem to relate the sides we get: 2 2 2r x y .

Where r is the radius and the circle is centered at the origin.

Example 1:

Identify the center and radius of the circle with equation 2 2 49.x y

Answer:

2 2

2 2 2

49

7

x y

x y

Rewrite the equation so that it matches the

standard form of the equation of a circle.

The square root of 49 is 7, therefore 27 49 .

The center is at the origin and the radius is 7.

Example 2:

Write the equation of a circle centered at the origin with a radius of 2.

Answer:

2 2 2x y r Use the standard form of the equation of a

circle. 2 2 22x y 2 2 4x y

Substitute known values. 2r

Simplify.

Jordan School District Page 361 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises A

1. Identify the center and the radius for the circle with the equation 2 2 36.x y

2. Write an equation for a circle centered at the origin with a radius of 5.

3. Write an equation for a circle centered at the origin with a diameter of 14.

4. Write an equation for a circle centered at the origin that contains the point 3,5 .

Deriving the Equation of a Circle Centered at ,h k

Find any point ,x y on the circle. Create a right triangle

with the radius as the hypotenuse, the length x h as the

horizontal leg, and the length y k as the vertical leg.

Then using the Pythagorean Theorem to relate the sides we

get:

2 22r x h y k .

Where r is the radius and the circle is centered at the point

,h k .

Example 3:

Find the center and radius for the circle with equation 2 2

3 2 81x y .

Answer:

22 23 2 9x y

The center is 3, 2 and the radius is 9.

Rewrite the circle’s equation so that it matches

the standard form of a circle.

The square root of 81 is 9 so 29 81 .

Jordan School District Page 362 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 4:

Write the equation for the circle centered at 1,5 and radius 4.

Answer:

2 2 2x h y k r

Start with the standard form of the equation of

a circle.

2 2 21 5 4x y

Substitute the known values. 1h , 5k ,

and 4r .

2 2

1 5 16x y Simplify.

Example 5:

Write the equation for the circle that has a diameter with endpoints 1,5 and 5, 3 .

Answer:

5 31 5,

2 2

4 2,

2 2

2,1

Find the center of the circle by finding the

midpoint of the diameter.

2 2

2 2

2

2 1 1 5

2 1 4

3 16

9 16

25

5

r

r

r

r

r

r

Find the length of the radius by finding the

distance between the center and either of the

endpoints of the diameter.

2 2 22 1 5x y

2 2

2 1 25x y

Substitute the known values into the standard

form of the equation of a circle centered at

,h k and simplify. 2h , 1k , and 5r

Jordan School District Page 363 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

Given the standard form of a circle determine the center and the radius of each circle.

1. 2 2( 2) ( 3) 16x y 2.

2 2( 1) ( 7) 25x y 3. 2 2( 5) ( 6) 4x y

4. 2 2( 2) ( 9) 36x y 5.

2 2( 10) ( 21) 196x y 6. 2 2( 1) ( 3) 49x y

Write the standard form of a circle with the given characteristics.

7. A circle with radius 10 centered at 8, 6 .

8. A circle with radius 5 centered at 4,3 .

9. A circle with diameter endpoints at 9,2 and 1,6 .

10. A circle with diameter endpoints at 3,4 and 5,2 .

Example 6:

Complete the square to find the center and radius of a circle given by the equation 2 2 6 2 6 0x y x y .

Answer:

2 26 2 6x x y y

Collect the x terms together, the y terms

together and move the constant to the other

side of the equation.

2 2

2 2

2 2

2 2

6 ___ 2 ___ 6

6 26 2 6 9 1

2 2

6 9 2 1 16

x x y y

x x y y

x x y y

Group the x and y terms together. Complete

the square and simplify.

2 2

3 1 16x y Rewrite each trinomial as a binomial squared.

The center is at 3, 1 and the radius is 4.

Jordan School District Page 364 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises C

Complete the square to find the center and radius of a circle given by the equation.

1. 2 2 4 6 8 0x y x y 2.

2 2 4 10 20 0x y x y

3. 2 2 6 2 15 0x y x y 4.

2 2 6 4 9 0x y x y

Challenge Problem 2 22 2 6 8 12 0x y x y

Jordan School District Page 365 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 6 Cluster 4 (G.GPE.4)

Proving Geometrical Theorems Algebraically

Cluster 4: Using coordinates to prove theorems algebraically

6.4.2 Use coordinates to prove geometric theorems algebraically (include simple proofs

involving circles)

A trapezoid is a quadrilateral with only one set of parallel

sides.

An isosceles trapezoid is a trapezoid with congruent legs and

congruent base angles. The diagonals of an isosceles

trapezoid are congruent.

A parallelogram is a quadrilateral with opposite sides

parallel and congruent. The diagonals of a parallelogram

bisect each other.

A rectangle is a special parallelogram with four right angles.

The diagonals of a rectangle are congruent.

A rhombus is a special parallelogram with four congruent

sides. The diagonals bisect each other and are perpendicular

to one another.

A square is a special rectangle and rhombus with four

congruent sides. The diagonals are congruent, bisect each

other, and are perpendicular to each other.

Jordan School District Page 366 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 1:

Prove FGHJ with vertices 2,1F , 1,4G , 5,4H , and 6,1J is a parallelogram.

Plot the points on a coordinate plane.

2 2 222 1 1 4 1 3 1 9 10GF

2 2 2 25 6 4 1 1 3 1 9 10HJ

2 2 2 26 2 1 1 4 0 16 4FJ

2 2 2 25 1 4 4 4 0 16 4GH

Find the distance of ,GF ,HJ ,FJ

and .GH

1 4 33

2 1 1GFm

4 1 33

5 6 1HJm

1 1 00

6 2 4FJm

4 4 00

5 1 4GHm

Find the slopes of ,GF ,HJ ,FJ and

.GH

Since opposite sides are congruent and parallel the quadrilateral FGHJ is a parallelogram.

Example 2: Prove that the point (5,2) is on the circle with center (3,2) and radius 2.

Create the circle on a coordinate plane.

Jordan School District Page 367 Secondary Mathematics 2

2 2

2 2

5 3 2 2

2 0

4

2

r

r

r

r

Use the distance formula to show that the

radius is 2. Use the center as 1 1,x y and 5,2

as 2 2,x y .

The radius of the circle is 2 therefore the point must lie on the circle.

Practice Exercises A

1. Prove that quadrilateral EFGH is an

isosceles trapezoid given the following

vertices: 3,2E , 2,2F , 3, 2G ,

and 4, 2H .

2. Prove that quadrilateral ABCD is a

parallelogram given vertices: 2,3A ,

3,6B , 6,8C and 5,5D .

3. Prove that ABCD is a parallelogram given

vertices: 3,2A , 0,4B , 1,8C and

2,6D using distance and slope.

4. Prove that PQRS is not a rectangle given

vertices: 0,2P , 2,5Q , 5,5R , and

4,2S .

5. Prove that ABCD is a parallelogram given

vertices: 2,4A , 6,4B , 5,0C , and

1,0D .

6. Prove that ABCD is a rhombus given

vertices: 1,2A , 0,6B , 4,7C , and

3,3D .

7. Prove that the point 3, 3 lies on the

circle with radius 2 and center 2,0 .

8. Prove that the point 2, 5 lies on the

circle with radius 2 and center 2, 3 .

9. Given a circle with center 2,3

determine whether or not the points

4, 1 and 3,5 are on the same circle.

10. Given a circle with center at the origin

determine whether or not the points

1, 3 and 0,2 lie on the same circle.

11. Prove that the line containing the points

5,3 and 3,3 is tangent to the circle

with equation 2 2

1 1 16x y .

12. Prove that the line containing the points

0,8 and 4,11 is tangent to the circle

with equation 2 2

2 3 100x y .

Other helpful resources:

http://www.regentsprep.org/regents/math/geometry/GCG4/CoordinatepRACTICE.htm

http://staff.tamhigh.org/erlin/math_content/Geometry/PolyQuad/CoordinateGeometryNotes.pdf

http://mtprojectmath.com/Resources/Coordinate%20Geometry%20Proofs.pdf

Jordan School District Page 368 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 6 Cluster 5 (G.GMD.1 and G.GMD.3, Honors G.GMD.2)

Formulas and Volume

Cluster 5: Explaining and using volume formulas

6.5.1 Informal arguments for circumference of circle, volume of a cylinder, pyramid,

and cone (use dissection arguments, Cavalieri’s principle) (use the relationship of

scale factor k, where k is for a single length, k2 is area, k

3 is volume)

H.6.1 Give an informal argument using Cavalieri’s principle for the formulas for the

volume of a sphere and other solid figures.

6.5.2 Use volume formulas for cylinders, pyramids, cones, and spheres to solve

problems

Formula for Circumference

The circumference of a circle is 2 r . The perimeter of a regular polygon inscribed in a circle

gives an estimate of the circumference of a circle. By increasing the number of sides, n, of the

regular polygon we increase the accuracy of the approximation.

3n 4n 5n 6n 8n

If we had a regular polygon with an infinite number of sides, then we would have the exact value

of the circumference of a circle. To prove this numerically, we need a formula for the perimeter

of a regular polygon with n sides. The perimeter of a regular polygon is found by multiplying

the number of sides by the side length. Symbolically that is P ns . If we can find the value for

any side length, s, then we can find the perimeter for any regular polygon with n sides.

Given a regular polygon with side length s and radius r we can divide

the polygon into n congruent isosceles triangles.

Each triangle has a hypotenuse of length r and a base of length s. If we

construct a perpendicular bisector from the central angle to the base,

we can use trigonometric ratios to find the length of s.

Jordan School District Page 369 Secondary Mathematics 2

Since the perpendicular bisector, a, divides the side of length, s, in

half 2s x . Thus, we need to find the value x. The opposite side is x

and the hypotenuse is r therefore sinx

r . By multiplying each side

of the equation by r we can isolate x and we get sinx r . Since

2s x , 2 sins r . Substituting this value into our perimeter

equation yields 2 sinP ns n r .

The central angle is found by dividing 360 by the number of sides, n. The angle is half of the

central angle. Thus, 360

2n .

We can use this equation to show that as n increases the perimeter approaches 2 6.283r r .

The following table demonstrates this relationship.

n 360

2n

Perimeter Expression 2 sinP n r Approximation

3

36060

2 3

3 2 sin 60P r 5.196r

4

36045

2 4

4 2 sin 45P r 5.656r

5

36036

2 5

5 2 sin 36P r 5.878r

6

36030

2 6

6 2 sin 30P r 6.000r

10

36018

2 10

10 2 sin 18P r 6.180r

100 360

1.82 100

100 2 sin 1.8P r 6.282r

1000 360

0.182 1000

1000 2 sin 0.18P r 6.283r

A regular polygon with 1000 sides is accurate to four decimal places for the approximation of

2 r . With an infinite number of sides, the regular polygon would essentially be a circle and the

perimeter would equal 2 r . Therefore, the circumference of a circle is 2 r .

Jordan School District Page 370 Secondary Mathematics 2

Area of a Circle

A similar process can be used to show that the area of a circle is 2r . The area of a regular

polygon inscribed in a circle gives an estimate of the area of a circle. By increasing the number

of sides, n, of the regular polygon we increase the accuracy of the approximation of the area of a

circle.

Because a regular polygon with n sides of side length s can be divided

into n isosceles triangles, the area of the regular polygon can be found

by multiplying the area of one isosceles triangle by the number of

triangles formed. Symbolically, area of triangleA n or

1

2A bh n

.

The base is length s and we know that 2 sins r . We need to find

the height, which is the altitude of the triangle and is sometimes called

the apothem. This can be done by using trigonometric ratios.

The altitude is adjacent to the angle and the radius is the hypotenuse.

So, cosa

r . By multiplying each side by r we can isolate a and we

get cosa r .

3n 4n 5n 6n 8n

Jordan School District Page 371 Secondary Mathematics 2

By substituting these values into our area formula we get 1 1

2 sin cos2 2

A bh n r r n

simplifying it we get 2 sin cosA r n . We can use this equation to show that as n increases the

area approaches 2 23.142r r . The following table demonstrates this relationship.

n 360

2n

Area Expression

2 sin cosA r n Approximation

3

36060

2 3

2 3 sin 60 cos 60A r 21.299r

4

36045

2 4

2 4 sin 45 cos 45A r 22.000r

5

36036

2 5

2 5 sin 36 cos 36A r 22.378r

6

36030

2 6

2 6 sin 30 cos 30A r 22.598r

10

36018

2 10

2 10 sin 18 cos 18A r 22.939r

100 360

1.82 100

2 100 sin 1.8 cos 1.8A r 23.140r

1000 360

0.182 1000

2 1000 sin 0.18 cos 0.18A r 23.142r

A regular polygon with 1000 sides is accurate to four decimal places for the approximation of 2r . With an infinite number of sides the regular polygon would essentially be a circle and the

area would equal to 2r . Therefore, the area of a circle is

2r .

A simpler way to look at this is by slicing the circle into infinitely many slices and arranging

those slices so that they form a parallelogram. The smaller the slice, the more linear the

intercepted arc becomes and the more it looks like a parallelogram.

6n 8n 10n

Jordan School District Page 372 Secondary Mathematics 2

The base of the parallelogram is half of the circumference. Therefore, 1

22

b r r . The

height is the radius. The area of a parallelogram can be found by multiplying the base times the

height. Symbolically, 2A bh r r r .

Volume

VOCABULARY

The volume of a three dimensional figure is the space that it occupies.

A prism is a three-dimensional figure with two congruent and parallel

faces that are called bases.

A cylinder is a three-dimensional figure with parallel bases that are

circles.

A cone is a three-dimensional figure that has a circle base and a vertex

that is not in the same plane as the base. The height of the cone is the

perpendicular distance between the vertex and the base.

A pyramid is a three-dimensional figure with a polygon as its base

and triangles as its lateral faces. The triangles meet at a common

vertex.

A sphere is the set of all points in space that are the same distance

from the center point.

Jordan School District Page 373 Secondary Mathematics 2

The three figures above have the same volume. Each figure has the same number of levels and

each level has the same volume. This illustrates Cavalieri’s Principle.

Cavalieri’s Principle

If two space figures have the same height and the same cross-sectional area at every level, then

they have the same volume.

The volume of any prism or cylinder can be found by multiplying the area of the base times the

height, V Bh .

Volume of a Cylinder

Extending the idea of Cavalieri’s principle, the volume of a cylinder is the area of its base, a

circle, times the perpendicular height. Symbolically, 2V Bh r h .

Formula for the Volume of a Cylinder

The volume of a cylinder with radius r and height h is 2V r h .

Example 1: Volume of a cylinder

The radius of a circular container is 4 inches and the height is 10 inches. Find the volume of the

container.

Answer: 2V r h Use the formula for the volume of a cylinder.

2

4 10V Substitute in known values. 4r and 10h

16 10

160 502.655

V

V

Simplify.

The volume is approximately 502.655 in3. Volume is measured in cubic units.

Jordan School District Page 374 Secondary Mathematics 2

Volume of a Pyramid

The volume of a cube can help us find the volume of a pyramid. Since a cube has 6 faces that

are all squares, the volume of a cube is 2 3V Bh b b b , where b is the length of the side.

Inside the cube, place 6 pyramids that have a face of the cube as a

base and share a vertex at the center of the cube. The six pyramids

are equally sized square pyramids.

Using the formula for the volume of a cube, we can derive the volume of one of the pyramids.

3

2

V b

V Bh

V b b

Begin with the volume of a cube. Rewrite it so

that it is in the form V Bh .

21

6V b b

There are 6 equally sized pyramids within the

cube. The volume of one pyramid will be equal

to one-sixth the volume of the cube.

2

2

1

6

12

6

V b b

V b h

Rewrite the formula using the height of the

pyramids. Use 2b h because the height of

the cube is equivalent to the height of two

pyramids.

2

2

2

6

1

3

V b h

V b h

Simplify.

In general, the volume of a pyramid is 21 1

3 3V b h Bh . In other words, the volume of a

pyramid is the area of its base, regardless of whether or not it is a square, times the height.

Formula for the Volume of a Pyramid

For any pyramid with area of base, B, and height h, the volume is 1

3V Bh .

Jordan School District Page 375 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 2: Volume of a Pyramid

Find the volume of the pyramid with a rectangular base that is 4 ft by 5 ft

and height of 6 ft.

Answer:

1

3V Bh Use the formula for the volume of a pyramid.

1

20 63

V The base is a rectangle so the area of the base

is 4 5 20A lw . The height is 6.

1

1203

40

V

V

Simplify.

The volume of the pyramid is 40 ft3. Volume is measured in cubic units.

Volume of a Cone

The relationship between the volume of a cone and the volume of a cylinder is similar to the

relationship between the volume of a pyramid and the volume of a prism. We already know that

the volume of a pyramid is one-third the volume of a prism. We want to show that the volume of

a cone is also one-third the volume of a cylinder. To do this, we are going to look at a pyramid

with a base that has n sides. If we increase the number of sides until there are an infinite number

of sides, the pyramid will have a circular base and be a cone.

6 sided base

8 sided base

Inifinite sided base

When we increase the number of sides of the base of pyramid, we also change the shape of the

prism that holds the pyramid. The prism that contains the pyramid with an infinite number of

sides is a cylinder.

Jordan School District Page 376 Secondary Mathematics 2

6 sided base

8 sided base

Infinite sided base

Since a cone is essentially a pyramid with an infinite number of sides and a cylinder is a prism

with a base that has an infinite number of sides, the volume of a cone is one-third the volume of

a cylinder.

Formula for the Volume of a Cone

For any cone with radius, r, and height h, the volume is 21

3V r h .

Example 3: Volume of a cone

Find the volume of the cone with radius 8 cm and height 12 cm.

Answer:

21

3V r h Use the formula for the volume of a cone.

21

8 123

V Substitute in known values. 8r and 12h

164 12

3

1768

3

256 804.248

V

V

V

Simplify.

The volume of the cone is approximately

804.248 cm3.

Volume is measured in cubic units.

Jordan School District Page 377 Secondary Mathematics 2

Volume of a Sphere

In order to derive the formula for the volume of a sphere, we need to review Cavalieri’s

Principle. That is, that if two figures have the same height and same cross-sectional area at every

level, then they have the same volume. We will also use the volume of a cone 21

3V r h and the

volume of a cylinder 2V r h .

Consider the cylinder and hemisphere given below, both with a radius of r and height r. From the

cylinder, a cone is cut out that shares the same base as the cylinder and also has a radius of r and

a height of r. We are going to prove that this “cone-less cylinder”, or the part of the cylinder that

remains after the cone has been removed, has the same volume as the hemisphere. Once we have

proven that they have the same volume, we can merely double the formula for the “cone-less

cylinder” to obtain the volume for a sphere.

Cylinder

Hemisphere

We start calculating the volume of the “cone-less cylinder” by subtracting the volume of the

cone from the volume of the cylinder. Since the height is r, the volume of this cone would be

2 2 31 1 1

3 3 3V r h r r r and the volume of the cylinder would be

2 2 3V r h r r r .

Upon subtracting their volumes we get 3 3 31 2

3 3V r r r . So the volume of the “cone-less

cylinder” is 32

3V r

In order to use Cavalieri’s Principle, we are going to create circular cross sections of the figures

by slicing them at height h and comparing their areas. The cross section of the cylinder and the

hemisphere are shown below.

Cylinder with cone inside

Hemisphere

Jordan School District Page 378 Secondary Mathematics 2

Cross sectional slice of cylinder with cone

Cross sectional slice of hemisphere

If we can prove that these cross sections have the same area, then by Cavalieri’s Principle the

volume of the hemisphere and the volume of the “cone-less” cylinder are the same. Start by

finding the area of the cross section of the hemisphere, or the disk shaped cross section. We need

to find its radius, z. Since the cross section is h units above the base of the hemisphere, we can

use the Pythagorean Theorem and the radius of the hemisphere’s base to calculate the cross

sectional radius z to be 2 2z r h . Using this radius we can now calculate the area of the

cross section. 2

2 2 2 2 2( )A z r h r h . To find the area of the cross-section of the

“cone-less cylinder”, or the washer shaped cross section, we need to subtract the small circle

from the large circle. Since the radius of the cone at any height h is proportional to the height

with a 1:1 ratio, the large circle (cross-section of the cylinder) has a radius of r while the small

circle (cross-section of the cone) has a radius of h. Thus the area of the large circle is 2r and the

area of the small circle is 2h . Their difference is

2 2 2 2( )r h r h . Therefore, the area of

the cross section from the hemisphere is the same as the area of the cross section from the “cone-

less” cylinder. Cavalieri’s Principle states that if we sum up all of our equal slices or cross

sectional areas then we obtain equivalent volumes for the hemisphere and “cone-less cylinder.”

Recall that the volume of the cone-less cylinder is 32

3V r . We can then infer that the volume

of the hemisphere is 32

3V r and the that volume of the sphere would be twice the volume of

the hemisphere or 3 32 42

3 3V r r .

Formula for the Volume of a Sphere

For any sphere with radius r the volume is 34

3V r .

Jordan School District Page 379 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 4: Volume of a sphere Find the volume of a sphere with radius of 2 ft.

Answer:

34

3V r Use the formula for the volume of a sphere.

34

23

V Substitute in known values. 2r

4

83

3233.5210

3

V

V

Simplify.

The volume of the sphere is approximately

33.5210 ft3.

Volume is measured in cubic units.

Jordan School District Page 380 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises A

Find the volume of the following.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13. Find the volume of a cylindrical pool if

the diameter is 20 feet and the depth is 6

feet.

14. A fish tank is in the shape of a cylinder.

The tank is 22 feet deep and 40 feet in

diameter. Find the volume of the tank.

15. Popcorn is served in a conical container

that has a radius of 3 inches and a height

of 6 inches. What is the volume of the

small container?

16. A tank is in the shape of a pyramid. The

base of the tank is a rectangle with length

3 feet and width 7 feet. It is 9 feet high.

Find the volume of the tank.

17. Find the volume of a pyramid if the base

is a square with side 6 feet and the height

is 4 feet.

18. How much ice cream is needed to fill a

conical shaped sugar cone that is 4 inches

deep and 6 inches in diameter?

19. A soccer ball has a radius of 4.3 inches.

What is the volume of soccer ball?

20. A softball has a diameter of 9.6 cm. What

is its volume?

Jordan School District Page 381 Secondary Mathematics 2

Relating Scale Factor, Length, Area, and Volume

The drawings below are dilations of one another. The length and area of each figure are

compared.

Original Drawing Dilated Drawing

Length Scale Factor

Dilated Length

Original Lengthk

Area Scale Factor

2Dilated Area

Original Areak

21

3 3 4.5 cm2

A

216 6 18 cm

2A

62

3 218

4 24.5

By comparing the side of the dilated triangle to the corresponding side of the original triangle, we

see that the ratio is 2. Thus, the scale fator 2k . If we compare the area of the dilated triangle to

the area of the original triangle, the ratio is 4. If we write this in terms of k we get 24 2 or 2k .

Original Drawing Dilated Drawing Length Scale Factor

Dilated Length

Original Lengthk

Area Scale Factor

2Dilated Area

Original Areak

2 26 36 inA

2 22 4 inA

2 1

6 3

24 1 1

36 9 3

By comparing the radius of the dilated circle to the radius of the original figure, we see that the

ratio is 1

3. Thus, the scale factor

1

3k . If we compare the area of the dilated circle to the area of

the original circle, the ratio is 1

9. If we write this in terms of k we get

2

21 1 or k

9 3

.

Therefore, if a figure is dilated by a scale factor of k, its area is 2k times the area of the original

figure.

3 cm

3 cm

6 cm

6 cm

4 in 2in

Jordan School District Page 382 Secondary Mathematics 2

The three dimensional figures below are dilations of one another, the length and the volume scale

factors of each figure are compared.

Original Drawing Dilated Drawing

Length Scale Factor

Dilated Length

Original Lengthk

Volume Scale Factor

3Dilated Volume

Original Volumek

32.5 3 1 7.5 ftV

35 6 2 60 ftV

2.52

5 360

8 27.5

By comparing one side of the dilated prism to the corresponding side of the original prism, we

find that the ratio is 2. Thus, the scale factor 2k . If we compare the volume of the dilated

prism to the volume of the original prism, then the ratio is 8. If we write this in terms of k, we 38 2 get or 3k .

Original Drawing Dilated Drawing Length Scale Factor

Dilated Length

Original Lengthk

Volume Scale Factor

3Dilated Volume

Original Volumek

2 38 12 768 mV

2 32 3 12 mV

3 1

12 4

312 1 1

768 64 4

By comparing the radius of the dilated cylinder to the radius of the original cylinder, we find that

the ratio is 1

4. Thus, the scale factor

1

4k . If we compare the volume of the dilated cylinder to

the volume of the original cylinder, then the ratio is 1

64. If we write this in terms of k we get

31 1

64 4

or 3k .

Therefore, if a figure is dilated by a scale factor of k, its volume is 3k times the volume of the

original figure.

Jordan School District Page 383 Secondary Mathematics 2

Example 5:

The volume of a cylinder is 2V r h . If the original cylinder has radius 4 inches and height 10

inches how will the volume compare to a cylinder with the same radius but double the height?

Answer: 2V r h Find the volume of each cylinder.

2V r h

2

4 10V

16 10V

160 502.655V in3

For the original cylinder 4r and 10h .

2V r h

2

4 20V

16 20V

320 1005.310V in3

For the cylinder with double the height 4r

and 20h .

volume of original 160 1

volume of double height 320 2k

Compare the volumes.

The volume of the original cylinder is half the volume of the cylinder with double the height.

The dilation was applied to only one length of the cylinder so it doubled the volume. If the

dilation had been applied to the radius and the height, then the volume of the cylinder would

have been one-eighth of the cylinder that was double the radius and double the height.

Example 6:

If the original cylinder has radius 4 inches and height 10 inches how will the volume compare to

a cylinder with the same height but double the radius?

Answer: 2V r h Find the volume of each cylinder.

2V r h

2

4 10V

16 10V

160 502.655V in3

For the original cylinder 4r and 10h .

2V r h

2

8 10V

64 10V

640 2010.619V in3

For the cylinder with double the radius 8r

and 10h .

volume of original 160 1

volume of double height 640 4k

Compare the volumes.

The volume of the original cylinder is one-fourth the volume of the cylinder with double the

radius.

Jordan School District Page 384 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

Use the trapezoids to answer questions 1–3.

1. What is the ratio of the perimeter of the larger trapezoid to the perimeter of the smaller

trapezoid?

2. What is the ratio of the area of the larger trapezoid to the area of the smaller trapezoid?

1 2

1

2A b b h

3. What is the scale factor k?

Use the prisms to answer questions 4–6.

4. What is the ratio of the surface area of the smaller prism to the surface area of the larger

prism? 2 2 2S lw lh wh

5. What is the ratio of the volume of the smaller prism to the volume of the larger prism?

6. What is the scale factor k?

7. You have a circular garden with an area of 32 square feet. If you increase the radius by a

scale factor of 5, what is the area of the new garden?

8. Jan made an enlargement of an old photograph. If the ratio of the dimensions of the

photograph to the enlargement is 1:3, what will be the ratio of the area of the original

photograph to the area of the enlargement?

9. You and your friend are both bringing cylindrical thermoses of water on a camping trip.

Your thermos is twice as big as his in all dimensions. How much more water will your

thermos carry than your friend’s? If your friend’s thermos has a diameter of 10 cm and a

height of 18 cm, what are the dimensions of your thermos?

Jordan School District Page 385 Secondary Mathematics 2

10. A cylinder has radius 3 cm and height 5 cm. How does the volume of the cylinder change if

both the radius and the height are doubled?

11. A pyramid has a square base with length 4 ft and a height of 7 ft. How does the volume of

the pyramid change if the base stays the same and the height is doubled?

12. A pyramid has a square base with length 4 ft and a height of 7 ft. How does the volume of

the pyramid change if the height stays the same and the side length of the base is doubled?

13. A movie theater sells a small cone of popcorn for $2. A medium cone of popcorn is sold for

$4 and comes in a similar container but it is twice as tall as the small container. Which

popcorn size gives you more for your money? Explain your answer.

14. Another movie theater sells a small cone of popcorn for $2. A medium cone of popcorn is

sold for $4 and comes in a similar container as the small but the radius is twice the length of

the small container. Which popcorn size gives you more for your money? Explain your

answer.

15. How much does the volume of a sphere increase if the radius is doubled? Tripled?

Jordan School District Page 386 Secondary Mathematics 2

Selected

Answers

Jordan School District Page 387 Secondary Mathematics 2

Secondary Mathematics 2 Selected Answers

Unit 1 Cluster 1 (N.RN.1 and N.RN.2)

Practice Exercises A

1. 3/45 3. 1/3k

5. 2/3

1

y 7.

1

6

9. 1 11. 1/3y

Practice Exercises B

1. 3 48 3.

9 5a

5. 3k 7.

2 23 64 4

9. 5 2x

Practice Exercises C

1. 1/311 3. 8/3

10

5. 7/6x 7. 5/7w

9. 2/5z

Practice Exercises D

1. 3 5p 3. 32 3xy

5. 5 3x y 7. 24 y y

9. 314 12m

Unit 1 Cluster 2 (N.RN.3)

Practice Exercises A

1. 2 7 3. 3

5. 39 2 7. 3 5 2 6

9. 12 2 4 3

Practice Exercises B

1. 256x 3. 38 10x

5. 32 20 7. 2

9. 10 13 5 20

11.

1111/28282 2y y

You Decide

1. yes, 145

3. yes, 72

5. no

7. When adding two rational numbers the

result is rational. When adding a

rational number and an irrational

number the result is irrational.

Unit 1 Cluster 4 (A.APR.1)

Practice Exercises A

1. not a polynomial; it has a variable raised

to a negative exponent

3. polynomial; degree 5, leading

coefficient 2

5. not a polynomial; there is a cube root of

a variable

Practice Exercises B

1. 24 2 4x x ; polynomial

3. 3 23 9 3x x x ; polynomial

5. 3 22 2 6x x x ; polynomial

7. 212 3u u ; polynomial

9. 2 4 21x x ; polynomial

11. 28 14 3x x ; polynomial

13. 24 28 49x x ; polynomial

15. 6 325 10 1x x ; polynomial

17. 3 22 5 12x x x ; polynomial

19. 4 3 22 2 3x x x x ; polynomial

You Decide

Polynomials are closed under addition,

subtraction and multiplication. All of the

answers to Practice Exercises B were

polynomials.

Jordan School District Page 388 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 2 Cluster 1 and 2 (F.IF.4, 5, 7 and

9)

Practice Exercises A

1. Domain: , ; Range: ,

3. Domain: 3, ; Range: 2,

5. Domain: x k where k is an integer and

0 k

Range: 0.1 10y k k is an integer and

0 k

Practice Exercises B

1. x-int: 5,0 ; y-int: 0,2

3. x-int: 6,0 , 5,0 ; y-int: 0, 30

5. x-int: 3,0 , 6,0 ; y-int: 0, 18

7. maximum 1,3

9. maximum 2, 2

11. minimum 3,12

Practice Exercises C

1. a. increasing ,

b. never decreasing

c. never constant

d. positive 6,

e. negative , 6

3. a. increasing 3,

b. never decreasing

c. never constant

d. positive 3,

e. never negative

5. a. increasing 4,

b. decreasing , 4

c. never constant

d. ,

e. never negative

Practice Exercises D

1. a. D: , ; R: ,

b. 2.5,0 , 0,5

c. no symmetry

d. inc. ,

e. positive 2.5, ; negative , 2.5

f. no relative extrema

g. lim ( )x

f x

; lim ( )x

f x

3. a. D: 2, ; R: 4,

b. 14,0 ; 0,5.3

c. no symmetry

d. inc. 2,

e. positive 14, ; negative 2,14

f. rel. min. 2, 4

g. lim ( )x

f x

5. a. D: , ; R: ,

b. 124,0 , 0,4

c. no symmetry

d. inc. ,

e. positive 124, ; negative

, 124

f. no relative extrema

g. lim ( )x

f x

; lim ( )x

f x

You Decide

Group A should win because the rocket

reached a maximum height of 487 feet and

was in the air for 11 seconds. Group B’s

rocket reached a maximum height of 450

feet and was in the air for 10.5 seconds.

Group C’s rocket reached a maximum height

of 394 feet and was in the air for 10 seconds.

Unit 2 F.IF.6 and F.LE.3

Practice Exercises A

1. 5

5. 6110

3. 6

7. 32,000

Jordan School District Page 389 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

Table 1: -4, -2, 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10

Table 3: 14, 1

2, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32

Practice Exercises C

1. f(x)

3. h(x)

5. f(x)

Practice Exercises D

1.

You Decide

1. h(x) and r(x)

Factoring

Practice Exercises A

1. 24 12 16x x

3. 2 28 4 2x x x

5. 29 3 4 2x x

Practice Exercises B

1. 7 3x x

3. 1 2x x

5. 9 8x x

7. 4x y x y

9. 8 9x y x y

Practice Exercises C

1. 7 5 7 5x x

3. 3 2 3 2x x

5. 6 11 6 11x x

Practice Exercises D

1. 6 2 1x x

3. 2 3 4x x

5. 2 1 1x x

7. no factors

9. 4 3 3 2x x

Practice Exercises E

1. 2 5 5x x

3. 3 4 3x x

5. 5 8 5 8x y x y

7. 4 1y y

9. 2 3 2 3x x

11. 3 2 3 2x x

Unit 2 Cluster 2 F.IF.8, A.SSE.1,

A.SSE.3 Practice Exercises A

1. 0,0 7,0

3. 13,0 4,0

5. 6,0 1,0

7. 6,0 2,0

9. 0,0 3,0

11. 65,0 2,0

Practice Exercises B

1. 2 10 25x x

3. 2 22 121x x

5. 22 6 9x x

Practice Exercises C

1. 5, 3

3. 0,5

5. 2,3

Practice Exercises D

1. 5, 45 ; min

3. 2, 29 ; min

5. 4, 6 ; min

Practice Exercises E

1. 1, 11 ; min 3. 3, 15 ; min

You Decide

The zeros are 0,0 and 10,0 . The first zero

means that the rocket starts its launch from the

ground at time zero. The second zero represents

when the rocket comes back down to the ground 10

seconds later. The vertex is 5,400 . This means

that the rocket reaches its maximum height of 400

feet after 5 seconds.

Jordan School District Page 390 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises F

1. 2 seconds, 144 feet

3. 7 seconds

5. 4 seconds

Unit 6 Cluster 3 G.GPE.2 Practice Exercises A

1. 2120

y x

3. 2118

1.5y x

5. 21

63 2.5y x

Practice Exercises B

1. 2116

x y

3. 2112

x y

5. 21

84 4x y

Practice Exercises C

1. v: 5,1 , f: 6,1 , d: 4x

3. v: 5,1 , f: 6,1 , d: 4x

5. v: 2, 3 , f: 5, 3 , d: 1x

You Decide

(2, 1) is a point on the parabola because the

distance to the point from the focus is equal

to the distance from the point to the

directrix.

Unit 6 Cluster 3 G.GPE.3 (HONORS) Practice Exercises A

1. V: 4,0 4,0 ; F: 3,0 3,0

3. V: 0, 6 0,6 ; F: 0, 3 0,3

5. V: 0, 3 0,3 ; F: 0, 5 0, 5

7. 2 2

164 39

x y

9. 2 2

17 16

x y

11. 2 2

116 36

x y

Practice Exercises B

1. C: 2,1 V: 5,1 1,1 ;

F: 2 5,1 2 5,1

3. C: 3, 1 V: 3,3 3, 5 ;

F: 3, 1 7 3, 1 7

Jordan School District Page 391 Secondary Mathematics 2

5. C: 1, 3 V: 1,0 1, 6 ;

F: 1, 3 5 1, 3 5

7.

2 23 4

19 5

x y

9.

2 25 2

19 8

x y

11.

2 21 2

116 9

x y

Practice Exercises C

1. C: 0,0 V: 2,0 2,0

F: 2 5,0 2 5,0

A: 2 , 2y x y x

3. C: 0,0 V: 1,0 1,0

F: 10,0 10,0

A: 3 , 3y x y x

5. C: 0,0 V: 0, 4 0,4

F: 0, 2 5 0,2 5

A: 2 , 2y x y x

7. 2 2

11 3

y x

9. 2 2

125 24

y x

11. 2 2

116 25

x y

Practice Exercises D

1. C: 6,5 , V: 6, 4 6,0

F: 6,5 41 6,5 41

A: 5 54 4

6 5, 6 5y x y x

3. C: 6,5 , V: 6, 4 6,0

F: 6,5 41 6,5 41

A: 5 54 4

6 5, 6 5y x y x

Jordan School District Page 392 Secondary Mathematics 2

5. C: 4,6 , V: 4, 4 4,16

F: 4,6 2 30 4,6 2 30

A: 10 10

2 5 2 54 6, 4 6y x y x

7.

2 25 1

14 12

y x

9.

2 22 4

125 11

x y

11.

2 24 3

14 16

y x

Unit 2 Cluster 3 F.BF.1 Practice Exercises A

1. quadratic

function

3. exponential

function

5. exponential

function

Practice Exercises B

1. 2( ) 2.5 24.7 3f x x x

3. ( ) 119.60 1.096x

f x

Practice Exercises C

1. exponential, ( ) 49.34 0.85x

f x

3. quadratic, 2( ) 0.015 0.24 4.73f x x x

Practice Exercises D

1. 212 5 3x x 11.

1

4 3x

3. 212 8x x

5. 212 2 4x x

7. 3 236 21 20 12x x x

9. 4 3 2144 24 143 12 36x x x x

Practice Exercises E

1. 35

3. -31

5. 182

7. 54

9. -1

Practice Exercises G

1. 20.75 50 19,900P x x x ;

$750,000,000,000

3. 20.5 34 1213C x x x ; $2813

Unit 2 Cluster 4 F.BF.3 and F.BF.4 Practice Exercises A

1. shifted up 6 units, reflected over the line

6y

3. shifted 4 units to the right and a vertical

stretch by a factor of 3

5. axis of symmetry x = 1, vertex (1, -3)

D: , ; R: , 3

7. axis of symmetry x = -6, vertex (-6, -4)

D: , ; R: 4,

9. axis of symmetry x = 3, vertex (3, 0)

D: , ; R: 0,

Jordan School District Page 393 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

1. Shifted 5 units up and reflected over the

line y = 5.

3. Shifted 5 units down, 2 units to the left

and stretched by a factor of 3.

5. vertex: 2, 4 , D: , R: 4,

7. vertex: 0, 5 , D: , R: 5,

9. vertex: 4,0 , D: , R: 0,

Practice Exercises C

1. odd

3. even

5. neither

Practice Exercises D

1. neither

3. even

5. even

Practice Exercises E

1. 1,1 , 2,2 , 3,3 , 4,4 , 5,5

3. 6, 10 , 9,3 , 4, 1 , 1, 7 , 8,6

Practice Exercises F

1. 1 1 2

3 3f x x

3. 1 1 5

6 6f x x

5. 1 36

2f x x

7. 1 5

3

xf x

9. 1 9 7f x x

Unit 3 Cluster 1 A.SSE.2 Practice Exercises A

1. yes

3. no

5. yes

Practice Exercises B

1. 2 212 7 12 7x y x y

3. 4 3 4 310 11 10 11x y x y

5. 1/2 1/22 1 1x x

7. 5 53 3x y x y

9. 1/3 1/32 3 4x x

Practice Exercises C

1. 2u x ; 2 2

2 3 2 2x x

3. 2 5u x ; 2 2

2 5 5 5 2 5 4x x

5. 1/4u x ; 1/4 1/45 2x x

7. 1/2u x ; 1/2 1/22 5 2 5x x

9. 2 1u x ; 2 2

2 22 1 3 2 1 3x x

Unit 1 Cluster 3 N.CN.1 and N.CN.2 Practice Exercises A

1. 5 , 5i i

3. 12 , 12i i

5. 4 13, 4 13i i

Jordan School District Page 394 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

1. 13 7i

3. 3 2i

5. 40 10i

7. 15 9i

9. 9 17i

11. 90 22i

Unit 1 Cluster 3 HONORS N.CN.3 Practice Exercises A

1. 6 6i 3. 2 3i

Practice Exercises B

1. 35i

3 i

5. 2 2i

Practice Exercises C

1. 3 14 4

i

3. 3 i

5. 5 54 12

i

Unit 3 Cluster 3 and 4 A.REI.4 and

N.CN.7 Practice Exercises A

1. 5, 5

3. 3, 3

5. 2, 2

7. 3 6,3 6

9. 1 15, 1 15

Practice Exercises B

1. 2 3,2 3

3. 1, 15

5. 2, 4

Practice Exercises C

1. 2 real

3. 2 real

5. 1 real

Practice Exercises D

1. 5 109

6x

3. 14

1,3

x

5. 3 6x

7. 1 3

2

ix

9. 1 11

3

ix

Practice Exercises E

1. 5 7

4

ix

3. 2 2x i

5. 3 19

2

ix

7. 9

2x i

9. 1 7x i

11. 2x i

Unit 3 Cluster 5 HONORS N.CN.8 and

N.CN.9 Practice Exercises A

1. 3x i ; 3 3x i x i

3. 1x i ; 1 1x i x i

5. 2x i ; 2 2x i x i

7. , 2x i i ;

2 2x i x i x i x i

9. 1,x i ; 1 1x x x i x i

Unit 3 Cluster 3 A.CED.1 and A.CED.4 Practice Exercises A

1. width 12 in, length 15 in

3. height 30 in, base 50 in

5. 2 in

7. 14, 34

Practice Exercises B

1. 10.102 seconds

3. 227.5 meters

5. 22.0625 feet

7. 1.118 seconds

Practice Exercises C

1. , 10 8,

3. , 4 2,

5. 0,2

7. ,5

9. 12,3

11. 40,200

Jordan School District Page 395 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises D

1. 2 2b c a

3. 6

As

5. 3 9 8

2

Nk

7. 1 1 8

2

Nn

Unit 3 Cluster 3 Honors Practice Exercises A

1. 4, 1 3,

3. , 5 0,5

5. 1,

7. , 2 6,

9. , 3 2,

11. , 3 2,

You Decide

7.236 hours

Unit 3 Cluster 3 A.CED.2 Practice Exercises A

1. 2

2 3f x x

3. 2

3 1f x x

5. 1 7f x x x

7. 2

2 1f x x

9. 2

1 2f x x

11. 4f x x x

Practice Exercises B

1.

3.

5.

7.

9.

Unit 3 Cluster 6 A.REI.7 Practice Exercises A

1. 1,2 and 6, 3

3. 1,4 and 5114 4

,

5. 2,1

7. 0,0 and 1,1

9. 8,5 and 5, 8

11. 2,2

Unit 3 Cluster 6 Honors A.REI.8 and

A.REI.9 Practice Exercises A

1.

3 3 1 6

0 6 9 3

8 5 5 1

Jordan School District Page 396 Secondary Mathematics 2

3.

3 3 1 6

8 1 14 2

0 6 9 3

5. 2 1 2: 2 3R R R

Practice Exercises B

1. 1 0 3

0 1 5

; 3, 5

Practice Exercises C

1. 6,3,5

3. 1, 2,3

Practice Exercises D

1. 1, 2, 3x y z , consistent

3. inconsistent

5. 3, 2, 1, 1x y z w , consistent

Practice Exercises E

1.

15 4 5

12 3 4

4 1 1

3. 1 1 14 2 4

51 14 2 4

0 1 2

5. 71 14 2 4

31 14 2 4

1 1 3

Practice Exercises F

1. (1, 2, -1)

3. (2, -1, 5)

5. (2, 3, -5)

7. (1, 2, -1)

9. (-1, -2, 1)

Unit 2 Cluster 2b F.IF.8b, A.SSE.1b,

A.SSE.3c Practice Exercises A

1. $13,140.67

3. Analeigh should choose the

compounded monthly because after 3

years it is $14,795.11 while the

continuous is $14,737.67.

Practice Exercises B

1. 1.23% 3. $7,126.24

Practice Exercises C

1. 7.36 % 3. 24.79%

Practice Exercises D

1. a. 574,000,000 people

b. 0.026 people/year

c. 2,461,754,033 people

d. 40 years, 2014

Practice Exercises E

1. a. decrease 6.57%

b. 1400 0.934t

B t

c. 707 or 708 birds

d. 38.65 years

3. a. 124,009,000 1.031t

P t

b. 497,511,091 people

c. 15.66 years

You Decide

1.93%; the Utah population can’t grow

indefinitely at this rate. Students should

include ideas such as housing, jobs, access to

water etc. to justify their conclusion.

Unit 4 Cluster 1 S.CP.1 Practice Exercises A

1. A. {A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O,

P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z}

B. Answers will vary {F, I, R, S, T}

C. Answers will vary {A, L, S, T}

D. Answers will vary {A, F, I, L, R, S, T}

E. Answers will vary {S, T}

3.

A. {hearts: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, J, Q, K, A;

diamonds: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, J, Q, K,

A}

B. {diamonds: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, J, Q, K,

A}

C. {spades: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, J, Q, K, A;

clovers: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, J, Q, K, A}

D. the empty set

Jordan School District Page 397 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 4 Cluster 1–2 S.CP.2-7

Practice Exercises A

1. A. 25 1

50 2

B. 7

50

C. 10 1

50 5

D. 41

50

E. 12 6

50 25

F. 34 17

50 25

G. 15 3

50 10

H. 3

50

3. A. 7

10

B. 8 4

10 5

C. 5 1

10 2

D. 7

10

E. 8 4

10 5

Practice Exercises B

1. 54 27

100 50

3. 38 19

100 50

5. 27

100

Practice Exercises C

1. 100 1

200 2

3. 42 21

200 100

5. 9

200

7. 85 17

200 40

9. 0

200

Practice Exercises D 1. Yes, because

0.7 0.3 0.21P A P B P A B

3. A. answers will vary

B. answers will vary

C. answers will vary

D. none of the activities and gender are

independent

Practice Exercises E

1. 64

403

3. 146 73

394 197

5. 154 22

403 29

7. 0.5625

9. 0.4375

11. no, one is

0.5625 and the

other is 0.45

Practice Exercises F

1.Yes,

grades malegrades 0.52

male

PP

P

3. Yes, P cold|vitamin C 0.122 while

P cold|no vitamin C 0.221

Unit 4 Clusters 2-3 Honors S.CP.8-9,

and S.MD.6-7 Practice Exercises A

1. A.

B. 1

12

C. 1

12

D. 0

12

Practice Exercises B

1. 8 7 10 9 7

18 17 16 15 102

3. 33 32 16

55 54 45

Jordan School District Page 398 Secondary Mathematics 2

5. A. 0.15 B. 0.2

C. 0.45 D. 0.2

Practice Exercises C

1. 336

3. 1

5. 4,989,600

7. 362,880

9. 210

Practice Exercises D

1. 462

3. 43,680

5. 3060

7. 15,504

You Decide

A. 44,878,080

B. 40,320

C. 5040

Practice Exercises E

1. 8 3

22 3

2

55

C

C

3. 14 3 10 2

39 5

20

703

C C

C

5. 12 3 6 2

18 5

275

714

C C

C

Practice Exercises F

1. 268

0.825325

3. No, a student is more likely to score above

the minimum requirement if he or she takes

the prep class.

Unit 5 Cluster 1 G.SRT.1, G.SRT.2, and

G.SRT.3 Practice Exercises A

1.

3.

5.

7.

9. false

11. false

Practice Exercises B

1. ABC DEF 3. KNO KLM

5. QRU STU 7. DGH DEF

9. GKJ IKH 11. No

Practice Exercises C

1. JKL NML ; 7x , 6ML ,

10LK

3. JKM NOP ; 2.8x , 1.8KM ,

4.8OP

Unit 5 Cluster 2 G.CO.9 Practice Exercises A

1. Vertical Angles: 1 and 4 ,

2 and 3 , 5 and 8 , 6 and 7

Corresponding Angles: 1 and 5 ,

2 and 6 , 3 and 7 , 4 and 8

Alternate Interior Angles: 3 and 6 ,

4 and 5

Jordan School District Page 399 Secondary Mathematics 2

3. Vertical Angles: 2 and 8 ,

3 and 9 , 4 and 6 , 5 and 7 ,

10 and 16 , 11 and 17 ,

12 and 14 , 13 and 15

Corresponding Angles: 2 and 10 ,

3 and 11 , 4 and 12 ,

5 and 13 , 6 and 14 ,

7 and 15 , 8 and 16 ,

9 and 17

Alternate Interior Angles: 8 and 10 ,

6 and 12 , 9 and 11 ,

7 and 13

5. We are given that l m . We know that

2 3 because vertical angles are congruent.

We know that 3 7 because corresponding

angles are congruent. We can conclude that

2 7 because of the transitive property of

equality.

7. We are given that l m . We know that

2 4 180m m because they form a

straight angle. We know that 4 8m m

because corresponding angles are congruent.

We can conclude that 2 8 180m m

because of the substitution property of equality.

Practice Exercises B

1. 1x

3. Statements Reasons

1. PA PB

PM AB

1. Given

2. 90

90

m PMA

m PMB

2. Definition of

perpendicular

3. m PMA m PMB 3. substitution property

of equality

4. m PAM m PBM

4. base angles of an

isosceles triangle are

congruent

5. PAM PBM 5. AAS congruence

6. AM BM 6. CPCTC

7. PM is the

perpendicular bisector

of AB

7. definition of

perpendicular bisector

Unit 5 Cluster 2 G.CO.10 Practice Exercises A

1. 106

3. 1 128m , 2 52m , 3 68m ,

4 60m , 5 116m

5. 6

7. 39, 39

9. 9

11. 6

13. a. 2.5,0D , 6.5,0E , 4, 4F

b. the medians intersect at the point 8 4

,3 3

equations: 2 4y x , 8 52

23 23y x ,

8 20

31 31y x

Unit 5 Cluster 2 G.CO.11 Practice Exercises A

1. a. Given b. Definition of consecutive

angles c. L and M are consecutive

angles d. J and K are supplementary

e. J L f. supplementary angles of the

same angle are congruent.

3. a. 55

18.33

b b. 12y 4z c. 22x

5. a. 4, 4, 4x QS RT

b. 5 29 29

, ,3 3 3

x QS RT

c. 3, 7, 7x QS RT

Unit 5 Cluster 3 G.SRT.4, G.SRT.5 Practice Exercises A

1. 128

, 16.53

x y

3. 8x

5. Yes, the scale factor for corresponding

parts of HNJ to HMK is 1:3.

Jordan School District Page 400 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises B

1. 3 2

3. 60

5. 1345 36.7

Unit 5 Cluster 4 G.GPE.6 Practice Exercises A

1. 3, 2

3. 2, 2

5. 2.6, 1.2

Unit 5 Cluster 5 G.SRT.6, G.SRT.7,

G.SRT.8 Practice Exercises A

1. 4

sin5

, 3

cos5

, 4

tan3

, 5

csc4

,

5sec

3 ,

3cot

4

3. 7

sin170

, 11

cos170

, 7

tan11

,

170csc

7 ,

170sec

11 ,

11cot

7

5. 9

sin13

, 2 22

cos13

, 9

tan2 22

,

13csc

9 ,

13sec

2 22 ,

2 22cot

9

7. 0.156

9. 1.111

11. 3.078

Practice Exercises B

1. 30

3. 80.538

5. 48.590

7. 53.130

9. 32.471

11. 43.813

Practice Exercises C

1. 60 3. 67

Practice Exercises D

1. 649.721 feet

3. 16.960

5. 437.66 feet

7. 8,001.037 feet

9. 19.151 feet

Unit 5 Cluster 5 Honors N.CN.3-

N.CN.6 Practice Exercises A

1. 2,3

3. 1, 2

5. 1, 1

7. 13 9. 5 2.236

Practice Exercises B

1. 13 cos112.620 sin112.620i

3. 2 cos90 sin90i

5. 0, 3 7.

3 2 3 2,

2 2

9. a. 10,24

b. 26 cos67.380 sin67.380i

c. 10,24

d. they are the same

Practice Exercises C

1. 9i

3. 9 6i

5. 15 11i

#1#2

#3

#4

#5

#6

Jordan School District Page 401 Secondary Mathematics 2

7. 1 12i

9. 4 15i

11. 1 3i

13. 13 11i

Practice Exercises D

1. 16 16i

3. 119 120i 5. 8 8 3i

Practice Exercises E

1. 5

12

i

, 17 4.123

3. 5 5

2 2i

, 586 24.207

5. 9

82

i

, 29 5.385

Unit 5 Cluster 6 F.TF.8 Practice Exercises A

1. 3

sin5

, 4

cos5

3. 15

sin4

, 15

tan1

5. 12

cos13

, 5

tan12

7. 8

sin89

, 5

cos89

9. 1

cos2

, tan 3

Unit 5 Honors Unit Circle Practice Exercises A

1. 2

2 3. 3

5. 1

2 7. 0

9. 3

3 11.

2

2

13. -2 15. 3

17. -1 19. -2

21. 0 23. -2

25. 225 , 315 27. 135 , 315

29. 150 , 210 31. 150 , 210

33. 30 , 210 35. 180

Practice Exercises B

1. i 3. d

5. b 7. e

9. h 11. q

13. neither 15. positive

17. negative 19. negative

21. neither 23. positive

Jordan School District Page 402 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 5 Honors Prove Trigonometric

Identities Practice Exercises A

1. sec cot csc

1 coscsc

cos sin

1csc

sin

csc csc

x x x

xx

x x

xx

x x

3.

tan cos sin

tan cos sin

sincos sin

cos

sin sin

x x x

x x x

xx x

x

x x

5.

2

2

2

csc sin cot cos

1 sincot cos

sin sin

1 sincot cos

sin

coscot cos

sin

coscos cot cos

sin

cot cos cot cos

x x x x

xx x

x x

xx x

x

xx x

x

xx x x

x

x x x x

7. cot sec sin 1

cos 1sin 1

sin cos

cos 1sin 1

cos sin

1 1

x x x

xx

x x

xx

x x

9.

2 2

2 2

2

2

sin 1 cot 1

sin csc 1

1sin 1

sin

1 1

x x

x x

xx

11.

2

2

1 sincos cot

sin

coscos cot

sin

coscos cot cos

sin

sin tan cos cot

xx x

x

xx x

x

xx x x

x

x x x x

13.

2

2

2

2

sec sec sin cos

sec 1 sin cos

sec cos cos

1cos cos

cos

cos cos

x x x x

x x x

x x x

x xx

x x

15.

2 2

2 2

cos cos 1 sin 1 sin2sec

1 sin cos cos 1 sin

cos 1 2sin sin2sec

1 sin cos 1 sin cos

cos 1 2sin sin2sec

1 sin cos

1 1 2sin2sec

1 sin cos

2 2sin2sec

1 sin cos

2 1 sin2sec

1 sin cos

x x x xx

x x x x

x x xx

x x x x

x x xx

x x

xx

x x

xx

x x

xx

x x

22sec

cos

2sec 2sec

xx

x x

Practice Exercises B

1. 30 , 90 , 150 , 270

3. 0 , 90 , 180 , 270 , 360

5. 60 , 120 , 240 , 300

7. 60 , 300

9. 0 , 180 , 360

Jordan School District Page 403 Secondary Mathematics 2

Unit 5 Cluster 6 Honors F.TF.9 Practice Exercises A

1. 6 2

4

3. 3 3

3 3

5. 2 6

4

7. 2 6

4

9. 3 3

3 3

11. 6 2

4

Practice Exercises B

1. 24

25 3.

24

7

5. 119

169 7.

240

289

9. 240

161 11.

2 2 5

55

13. 1 26

2626 15.

1

5

17. 5 5 34

3434

Unit 6 Cluster 1 G.C.1-4 Practice Exercises A

1. BD or CG 3. CG

5. G 7. CAE or GAE

9. radius 11. tangent line

13. radius 15. center

Practice Exercises B

1. 3 6 3 6 3

, ,5 10 5 10 5

Practice Exercises C

1. 65 3. 115

5. 65 7. 115

9. 115 11. 60

13. 25 15. 30

17. 40

19. 1 27.5m , 2 27.5m , 3 30m

Practice Exercises D

1. 40 3. 120

5. 41 7. 16

3

9. 7.5 11. 98.5

Practice Exercises E

1. 10

3. 3

5. 3

Practice Exercises F

1. 20 3. 130

5. 5

Practice Exercises G

1. 1 64m , 2 26m , 3 45m ,

4 45m

3. 1 30m , 2 30m , 3 60m ,

4 30m , 5 60m , 6 60m ,

7 30m , 8 60m

5. 135m S , 80m T

Unit 6 Cluster 2 G.C.5 Practice Exercises A

1. 22

7.679 yds9

3. 166

11.589 ft45

5. 49

15.394 cm10

Practice Exercises B

1. 3

4 3.

1

4

5. 11

6

Practice Exercises C

1. 22

7.679 yds9 3.

16611.589 ft

45

5. 49

15.394 cm10

Jordan School District Page 404 Secondary Mathematics 2

Practice Exercises D

1. 22 6.283 ft 3. 288.378 in

3

5. 22539.270 m

2

7. 25

5.236 mm3

9. 22721.206 in

4

Unit 6 Cluster 3 G.GPE.1 Practice Exercises A

1. center (0, 0), radius 6

3. 2 2 49x y

Practice Exercises B

1. center (2, 3) radius 4

3. center (-5, 6) radius 2

5. center (10, -21) radius 14

7. 2 2

8 6 100x y

9. 2 2

4 4 29x y

Practice Exercises C

1. center (2, 3) radius 5

3. center (-3, 1) radius 5

Challenge: center 32, 2 radius 1

2

Unit 6 Cluster 4 G.GPE.4 Practice Exercises A

1. 0EF GHm m , 4.123EF GHd d

3. 2

3AB CDm m , 4BC ADm m ,

3.606AB CDd d , 4.123BC ADd d

5. 0AB CDm m , 4BC ADm m ,

4AB CDd d , 4.123BC ADd d

7. 2 22 4x y

22

2

3 2 3 4

1 3 4

4 4

9. 2 2

1 2 4 3 1 20d which

doesn’t equal

2 2

2 2 3 3 5 29d

11. there is only one point of intersection at

(1, 9)

Unit 6 Cluster 5 G.GMD.1-3 Practice Exercises A

1. 312 37.699 ft 3. 3588 1847.256 m

5. 375 in 7. 396 301.593 cm

9. 3400 1256.637 cm 11. 34000

34188.790 cm

13. 360 188.496 ft 15. 318 56.55 in

17. 348 ft 19. 3333.038 in

Practice Exercises B

1. 30 5

18 3 3.

5

3k

5. 81 27

192 64 7. 800 square feet

9. 8 times as much, 20 cm diameter and 36

cm height

11. 2 times as much volume

13. They are the same. The larger popcorn

has twice as much popcorn as the

smaller popcorn for twice the price.

15. 8 times as much volume, 27 times as

much volume


Recommended